Home

Mercury Series

1. 11 Channel relocation and Digital Cross Connect Application 12 Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point erre rear 13 T1 E1 Drop amp Insert for Data amp VOICE ooccooccconccoccconiconiconcconcconconncnnnoncncnnocnnonnnos 13 TDM Modular Integrated Access Device eee nennen 14 E1 T1 Channelized Routing Application ooccooccconcocncocnconncocnconncocncncnconononcnnnnos 15 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application coocccoccconcconcconcconconnconnconncococonononos 16 T1 E1 Fiber Path Protected Application oocccoocccoccconcconiconcconcconconncoonconnnonononos 17 Broadcast Multicast ApplicatiON ooccooccconcccnconnconncocnconnconnconncnnnonnnonnononononcnnnnos 18 Multiplexing structure of SDH standard erre 19 Support network topologies eee O UART Eni 20 Basico DEALapD ICAO qM T E RET 20 TWpIcalSDELABDICALON cerrada a End EEE 21 SDE IMA ON cotos 22 Front Panel view of Mercury 800 cccocccccccccccccococccnoconocnonononnononnonnnnnnnonannonnnenaninannss 58 Rear Panel view of Mercury 800 eres nnn nnns 60 Front Panel view of Mercury 3600 een aerea 61 Front Panel view of Mercury 3600 eee renan 61 Rear Panel view of Mercury 3600 3600 erre 63 Front panel view of Mercury 3820 eee rena nnn
2. 282 An example of manipulation Frame Relay ccccccseccseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenses 203 Manipulation Frame Relay via XDSL Modem erre 203 Manipulation Frame Relay via Mercury Series Product 284 Application of Bridging Ethernet cooocccocccccnncccnconcnconnccncncnnnonnnnnnnnconnncnnnnnnnnnos 285 The sub menu to setup Ethernet Bridging eee 285 The sub menu of RIP function eee enne 286 An application of the router ccooccocccocccocncocnconncocncocnconnnnrnnnnnonnnnnnnnonononcnnnnonnnons 209 The sub menu of routing table ooccoocccocnccccccocncconncocncconononnnnnnnonnnconnnnncnnos 289 The sub menu of setting the Static rOUtesS ooccocccoccconcconncornconncnnnonnconnconnnoss 289 The sub menu of setting Default Gateway eee 291 The sub menu of NAT configuration menu serrana 291 Example of NAT Application erre erre ere era nenne 292 Choose NC lu 293 Proxy POLIS oe Desconectarse 294 Slate NAT CONIQUITAS seisseen asa pedido nda santas saias da Tas sus Pic M ue iran adaga 295 The sub menu of Incoming Filter settings i seen 295 The sub menu of Incoming Filter cooocccocnccccoconnccnnnconnnonnnnonnnnnncnncncnnnnnnnnnos 296 The sub menu of DHCP SettingS
3. oocccccnccccccocnccocncncncnncncnnnonnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 310 PRE Se PIMOS OWAN c alii 310 Sub menu of TSA settings for Ch r module er 312 The sub menu of TSA selectiON oocccoccccccccocnoccncnonncconoconnnnononanonnnnnonnnnnanonanonos 312 The sub menu of Routing Table setting eee 313 The sub menu of SNMP settings cece eecceeeeceeeeee cess eeeseeseeeseeeeseeseneeaes 314 The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu occoccccccnccccncccnconnnnncnnoncnnonnnonnnoncncnnnnnononos 315 The sub menu to view the Interface stalus eee 316 The sub menu to view current routing status i erre 317 The sub menu to view current ARP table eee 318 The sub menu to view the statistics of each interface ssusse 319 The sub menu tree of Device Control MenNu ooccccccccccccccnccnncccnoconnnonnnnncncnnnnnncnnos 320 The sub menu of Warm Start menu eee erererere nnne nnns 321 The sub menu of Cold Start MenNu occooccccccccccncccncncnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnos 321 The sub menu of Restore Default menu eterna 322 The sub menu of Firmware Upgrade MeNU occcoccccccnccccccncncccnconnnnnnnnnnnnoncncnnnnnononos 323 The Firmware Upgrade menu eee errar nnn nnns nis 324 Success to upgrade the Firmware een arena 324 The sub menu tree
4. Appendix B Ordering Information Product Mai i A roduc bat Number Description ain Option EXP ENO Code Equipment Equipment ROUTER C 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F Bs01500001 RIAS PHONE BOX A O O Power Module DC 2 00008 40008 MERCURY DC UO mam O o AC 2 00008 40009 MERCURY AC EE o S Table B 2 Mercury 3600 Order Information 371 Appendix B Ordering Information B 3 Mercury 3600 Ordering Information Product Main Opti A Opti e Part Number Description eur puron NNE ption Code A sum 3600 00010 50001 MERCURY 3600 O P1 UNIT 90003 3600 BASE UNIT WITH DC Ea E1 4CB 00008 40002 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 1200 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 1 p 00008 40002 EU 4T1 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE omm ean EN NENNEN 33010 00006 DB25 M cable 1 na 35015 00001 sts PHONE BOX E1 4CU 0008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 P uomo 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 33010 00026 DB25 L 372 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 09100 60047 BNC F gt 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 F cable 1 8m E1 2CU 00008 40005 MERCURY 2E1 A O 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M
5. Chapter 4 Maintenance Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Z Z Z Z lt lt Z Z D D D D D 2 2 D O O O O O O O O gt O Chapter 4 Maintenance handshake Situation equipment NTU LTU or connect with Scorpio 1400 Have the remote ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report Informative message has been switch off at no action required specified port Informative message State no action required report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 14 1P SHDSL V alarm messages 4 1 15 SDH Table 4 15 lists the alarm messages generated by the SDH specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning FANE of signal Informative alert NEM TIM Regenerator section Informative alert Alarm Minor trace identifier mismatch BIP 8 B1 Regenerator section BIP Informative alert fiam Me error MS AIS Multiplex section AIS Informative alert Alarm Major RN EN ER NN BIP 24 B2 Multiplex section BIP Informative alert Alarm Major er e emm MS REI Multiplex section remote Informative alert Alarm Minor i merde Po pa 238 Chapter 4 Maintenance MS RDI Multiplex section remote Informative alert Alarm Minor K2 defect indication AU AIS Administrative unit AIS Informative alert AU LOP Administrative unit loss Informative alert Alarm Major il RR pr A HP UNEQ HO path une
6. seen enne nennen essei ssn annt e sse nne nn 365 B 3 MERCURY 3600 ORDERING INFORMATION eene nennen nene rne snnt essen 372 B 4 MERCURY 3820 ORDERING INFORMATION cssscccccsssecccceseccccaeseceeeueeeceeeuaeeceesaaeceeeanes 378 B 5 MERCURY 3630 ORDERING INFORMATION c ccssscccccsssecceceseeccceaeseceecueeeccesaeeeceesaaeceseanes 384 APPENDIX C TROUBLE REPORT 55e toria E poe E Dav ERDU e Fol odo Feb pe eode evo eye ea sedeada 391 APPENDIX D TROUBLE SHOOTING e eere eee ee re cocos cocos cocos cccossecossoo 393 APPENDIX E GrLOSSAR Vecinos tedio orba enbnUE Eeaea oen ise esae as vies esi ve coa v ends 395 Mercury Series User s Manual Figure 1 1 Table 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 FIGURES System Architecture of MerCury Serles oocccocccccnccocccocnoccnnconnonanocncnonanonannonononaninnnnss 3 General Features of Mercury Series Product erre 7 Bien E age pra upa cet ene uu 10 Transport of T1 frame over E1 transmission Facilities
7. esses 266 The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu occoccccocnccccncocnconnnnncnnnnnnnonnnoncnoncnconnnnncnnos 268 The sub menu to view current configuration eee 268 The sub menu to show the current routing table iii 269 The sub menu to view the ARP table ooccocccccccccncocncocncocococococonoconanconnconnnons 270 The sub menu for current statistics oooccconnoconcconnconnnconnncnnononnnonncnnnnconnnoncnnns 271 The sub menu to show current NAT Buffer eee 2171 The sub menu for DHCP table eee nnns 212 The sub menu tree of Device Control MenNu occoocccoccccocccocccocncocnconnconnconnonnnonnconnnons 273 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis menu cocccoccncccnccccncccncnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnconnnnnnonos 273 The Ping command for Diagnosis in Diagnosis menu sese 275 System EnCapsulale cisco ici cite 276 PPP configure for WAN interface eee nnns 276 WAN port Point to Point CONNECtION occocccccconnconconicocncoccococoncnnnnononnonnncononnnnnnonons 217 WAN IP unnumbered setting cooccooccocccocnconncocncocnconnnnconanonanonanonnnconnconnnons 278 PPP configure Tor AUX interface scsi pes 279 AUX PRE 0 RR oieia 280 Frame Relay WAN Encapsulation oocoocccccnconncocococonoconononononanonanonnonnnnnnnnnninnnos 281 Frame Relay Encapsulations to setup LMI and DLCI
8. xDSL Modem E f PC g Router Module Terminal Router Module Configured with IP being configured address 192 168 254 1 default IP address 192 168 254 254 sub mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 5 5 Access via Telnet functionality Caution The IP address must not be in use by another device or a conflict may occur The default IP address must not be used as the permanent IP address Router Module will not allow you to access TCS by Console or TELNET simultaneously It is up to you to determine which is the easiest way to access TCS to perform the initial configuration 5 5 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Navigating the TCS Interface The TCS Terminal Configuration System is the interface that you use to configure your Router Module There are several operations you should become familiar with before attempting to modify the configuration System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security Filter DHCP Setup RIP Option Enter select ESC previous menu Il left gt right Routed Disable Mode Passive LAH WAH AUX is send Ver RIP 1 RIP 1 RIP 1 Recv Ver RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 Default Route o 1 o 1 o Horizon SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT Next Hop advertise Ho Ho Ho Sub Accept Yes yes yes Sub Advertise yes yes yes Action Key Hits a Figure 5 6 Describe the operation window when access into Router module oman xoy meron NN M
9. USER S MANUAL Digital Cross Connect System Mercury Series Headquarters No 25 Alley 15 Lane 120 Sec 1 Nei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan Version 1 9 TEL 886 2 26583000 Date 2007 1 3 FAX 886 2 26583232 P N 07008 00067 Beijing Branch 3F A Building 113 Zhi Chun Lu HaiDian District Beijing China Zip Code 100086 TEL 86 10 62522081 87 FAX 86 10 62522077 Mercury Series User s Manual Copyright O 2007 TAINET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CORP All rights reserved Notice This document is protected by the international copyright law No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without the permission of Tainet Communication System Corporation TAINET is a registered trademark and Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E are trademarks of Tainet Communication System Corporation Other product names mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The information provided from Tainet Communication System Corporation is believed to be accurate Any changes and enhancements to the product and to the information thereof will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Trademark All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Mercury Series User s Manual About This Manual This s
10. Chapter 4 Maintenance Class D4 ESF framing 3 Replace the T1 module CRC errors Error Have the T1 link Alarm detected in the T1 checked link receive signal lt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on T1 links operating with DA ESF frame plus CRC E Bit error The Problem in network Alarm E bit error rate of facilities the link receive signal 1000 bits sec Receive Blue Problem at the remote Alarm Alarm Receive equipment the unframed all ones signal Receive Yellow Problem at the remote Alarm Alarm Receive the equipment remote loss of frame synchronization alarm on the specified link 210 CV Code Violation Have the link checked Alarm error Detected error occur over critical limited 2048 bits sec Updated once per second Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Chapter 4 Maintenance 15 CV 15 Minutes Informative alert P M Code Bipolar Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold 1H CV 1 hour Code Bipolar Informative alert P M Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold 1D CV 1 day Code Bipolar Informative alert Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message report has been no action required switch off at specified port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Informative message OFF Off Alarm re
11. Storage temp Storage temp 25 70C 25 70C Environment 25 70C Humidity O Humidity O Humidity O 95 RH 9596 RH 9596 RH non condensing non condensin non condensi g ng 218 W x206 1430 W x330 D 430 W x330 Dimension D x59 H D x44 H mm mm EOS Ethernet over SDH M3630 Supported Chapter 1 Overview DENM M800 M3600 3600 M3630 3630E Mercury 3820 only Supported Supported Mercury 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E use same modules 2 slots for power module AC or DC power module Redundant and Hot swappable power module optional Operation temp 0 50C otorage temp 25 10C Humidity O 95 RH non condensin g 445 W x320 D x132 H mm Table 1 1 General Features of Mercury Series Product Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 2 Purpose and Key Features The Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E are a family of highly versatile digital cross connect systems with SNMP management The Mercury family offers a wide range of system requirement yet maintains the same common set of advanced features Mercury family offers user programmable routing at the level of the individual time slot and thus allows connecting any incoming 64 Kbps time slot to any outgoing 64 Kbps time slot For time slots that carry voice channels T 1 to E1 conversions can also include the required A law u law and signaling format conversion In additio
12. UI IEA 33010 00025 DB25 M 0 mem O isn A MU 00008 40011 MERCURY AJUBOARD 2P V35 00008 40012 MERCURY 2V35 BOARD 379 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V 35 F 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable PEL hm 33010 00013 DB25 M 5V 35 M cable 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 4IDSL 00008 40013 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD RJ 11 X50 MUX 5 00008 40014 MERCURY X 50 NEN NNI 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem X50 MUX 4 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 NEM MN 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable pero OH 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem X50 DACS 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 JANE NN 33010 00022 SCSI Il 5 DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable RR RR RR 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 4IDSL 00008 40019 MERCURY 4IDSL BEEN 380 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option Annex Option Product e Part Number Description Code e BOARD BOARD TB T1 ES 40024 o AT1 FOR PTT BOARD 1000 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable isn FIBER B 00008 40025 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP FIBER 1 00008 40026 SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER FIBER 2 00008 40027 DAUL PORT FIBER XCODE 00008 40028 MERCURYXCODE 2P SHDSL 00008 40051 DAUL PORT E Rowe T1 2CB 00008 40029 MERCURY 2T1 gud c o 33010 00025 DB
13. Informative alert Major Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert PM Major Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert P M Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert P M Major Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Major 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert Major Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert 229 Major Chapter 4 Maintenance Class Message 1D ES 1D SES 1D UA ALM OF ALM amp DA C OFF XS RXS F Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Transmit Elastic Store Slip Detected Tx clock slip Receive Elastic Store Slip Detected Rx clock slip Alarm Off Alarm report has been switch off at specified port Alarm and DAC Off Alarm report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 10 4P Data module alarm message Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Problem at unstable clock source Problem at uns
14. Site B with AUX IP 100 0 0 2 24 Lease Line asa RS 232 MI ease Line Lease Line Router Module Router Module Modem Modem Figure 5 26 AUX PPP link Site A 100 0 0 1 24 Site B 100 0 0 2 24 Traffic Types IP Routing Traffic Types IP Routing Local IP Local IP ocal 1400 0 0 1 yin 100 0 0 2 address address encapsulate Net Mask 255 255 2550 9PSU l Net Mask 55 255255 0 PPP PPP Remote IP 0 0 address 0 0 0 0 Table 5 10 Example of AUX port PPP setting 1 280 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The standard PPP encapsulate can be set up as above table or you can assign the IP to the remote site Site A 100 0 0 1 24 Site B 100 0 0 2 24 Traffic Types IP Routing Traffic Types IP Routing Encapsulate Net Mask 255 255 25 Encapsulate PPP ss lt PPP gt Remote IP Remote IP 100 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 11 Example of AUX port PPP setting 2 B Unnumbered Setting IP unnumbered can be configured for AUX interface as well Configure the AUX Local IP Address the same as the Router LAN IP and assign Net Mask IP to 255 255 255 255 will now enable the AUX IP unnumbered 5 6 4 4 Frame Relay Setup Configuring Frame Relay on a Router Module includes the mapping of IP addresses to DLCIs and telling the router which virtual circuits are connected Enable the Frame Relay Encapsulation by changing the WAN protocol to Frame Relay See the following Figure 5 27 Configuration MENU
15. Structure 192 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring p s A Di dps ee DELLE SD DD as A A SO it a DS EE SO pira Mercury A Mercury B High 3 Main Loop High Priority E 1A gt 1A ETE Priority Lou NY Protect Loop V Lo Priority DO R E 1C Priority RS el do A Figure 3 76 1 1 Revertive Protection with priority Actions on Port 1A Run profile 2 Run profile 1 Do ereta Table 3 17 Alarm status for CP Command B Configurations o Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock o Mercury B e CIk 1a 1c Setup the master clock received from port 1A the slave clock is from port 1C o Mercury A amp B e Logr 1 Run profile 1 when following profiles are created B Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B o Logb e Starting logging command scripts o Xc1a 1b 193 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Cross port 1A to 1B higher priority data o Xc 1c 1d e Cross port 1C to 1D lower priority data o Cp 1a off 1 on 2 sw 1 e Enable the call profile facility on port 1A if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 2 and change the higher priority traffic to Protect Loop If the alarm is cleared on port 1A system will execute profile 1 to change the traffic back to Main Loop o Loge 1 Mainloop e Stop and save the above commands into the 1 profile with the name Mainloop o Logb a Starting logging command
16. Table 5 14 Most often used port numbers 9 6 6 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Step 3 Configuring the Static NAT Assign the remaining public IP to the workstation or server in your LAN Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14t System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 168 192 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 248 Porxy Port List Protocol PORT IP Protocol PORT IP TCP 21 192 168 1 24 TCP 80 192 168 1 25 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 Static Network Address Translation static NAT Public IP lt gt Private IP Public IP lt gt Private IP 168 192 0 2 lt gt 192 168 1 26 168 192 0 6 lt gt 192 168 1 30 168 192 0 3 lt gt 192 168 1 27 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 168 192 0 4 lt gt 192 168 1 28 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 168 192 0 5 lt gt 192 168 1 29 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 43 Static NAT Configuring IP Filter Setting Your Router Module uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a packet IP filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters depending on the direction of the packet relative to a serial port WAN port To enable the
17. CLK NO able XXXXXXX XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ACTIVE ALM DAC XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ 1 on XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ display current DAC sharing status COUNT count XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ Console off Checksum Error 0 2 Count 10 11A DAC on 32 Count 10 Figure 3 35 None Display current DAC sharing status XXXXEXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ Code Violation 0 Move to the router module where it located COUNT Assign the time slot numbers start from O XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ NET Command Screen Enable Disable the DAC sharing function with port 10B XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 33 NMS Command Accommodate Mercury 3600 Purpose o Set up which router module to handle the SNMP request from the NMS Syntax o NMS port Param o port Port identifier for the indicated router module Example o nms 5a e Choose router module located on port5A to process the SNMP request from remote NMS Mercury gt help nms Usage Setup NMS amp SNMP link port Syntax NMS port Params port router port identifier NOTE view NMS amp SNMP link port if no parameter Mercury nms 5a NMS link port 5A Figure 3 36 NMS Command Screen 3 6 34 PM Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose o Display the contents of the performance monitoring reports for
18. Console password Craft port Baud P Data Bits Parity Flow Control Type Rate Mercury 3600 DCE 119200 Mercury 800 3600 19200 3820 3630 Table 5 2 The craft port settings for Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 256 5 4 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration After the Router Module has been successfully connected to your network and has been assigned an IP address to the Router interface you can then establish a TELNET session Access via Telnet Mode If your Router Module has been assigned an IP address access to TCS by establishing a TELNET session onto the assign IP address of Router telnet IP address The default username and password for TELNET access are both root You can change username and password later on Please refer to Section 5 6 2 for more detail Caution If the IP address is changed during configuration and the changes are saved your TELNET session onto the router is broken You can then telnet to the new IP address assigned during the configuration The Router Module is assigned a default IP address when shipped 192 168 254 254 with Network Mask 255 255 255 0 This IP address can be used to access the router via LAN as follows If you temporarily reconfigure a terminal to use the same network number as the default IP address for example the terminal could be assigned the IP address 192 168 254 1 with a network mask of 255 255 255 0 257 Chapter 5 Router Configuration
19. ets is optional if one time slot selected Mercury rs530 2a 1 6 dsr 0 Mercury stat 2a TYPE 1RS530 Configuration RL no Speed 384 Kbps RTS off DTR off CTS on DSR off DCD on RI off Time Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 Connection active TXC normal RXC normal 3 6 37 Sdsl Command CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Figure 3 39 RS530 Command Screen B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E 136 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Purpose o To specify the SDSL port location of module setup the operation mode frame type testing diagnosis and connection speed Mercury Series Product supports single port SDSL card which can be set to work as LTU NTU To 1300 mode With 2 wire lines connection and CAP modulation technology the operational distance can be extended for data rate up to 2 048 Mbps The SDSL card also provides the Local and Remote loopback testing for diagnostic When the loopback testing is activated the front panel LED indicator will keep blinking B Syntax o SDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr EOC eoc count B Param o port Port identifier for the indicated SDSL port o MOD The mode of SDSL card type It can be set to LTU NTU mode or To 1300 if connect to remote stand alone Xstream 1300 o mod O LTU 1 NTU default 2 To 1300 o TEST Enable the loopback testing function for diagnoistic o test 0 normal default 1 local loopback 2 remote loopback o FR Configure
20. gt SBNC cable F 09100 60047 m F gt connector 33010 00006 DB25 M cable 1 E1 2CB 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 33010 00025 DB25 M RJ 48 pd 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE po T ume 33010 00006 DB25 M gt T1 2CB 00008 40007 MERCURY 2T1 CETERI 33010 00025 DB25 M 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE SE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt mm O MU 00008 40011 MERCURYAMBONRD TS 2P V35 00008 40012 MERCURY 2V35 BOARD 373 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option Annex Option Product Part Number Description Code Equipment Equipment leable L Los 00006 A M cable 1 x 33010 00013 DB25 M 2 V 35 M cable 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 4IDSL 00008 40013 MERCURY 4IDSL eres emma o o X50 MUX 5 00008 40014 MERCURY X 50 me uM 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem X50 MUX 4 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 aec MM 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem X50 DACS 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 ANNI NNI 33010 00022 SCSI II 5 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F o mmo ooo Bet 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 4IDSL 00008 40019 MERCURY 4IDSL re ore T1 4CB 00008 40024 MERCURY 4T1 O 374 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option ANNEX Option Code Equipment Equipment FORPTT BORRO 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE SE 3301
21. o ES Error Seconds is any second containing one or more CRC error controlled slip or OOF events o esCurrent 15min 1hour 1day ES threshold o SES Severely error seconds is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error events or one or more OOF events o ses Current 15min 1hour 1day SES threshold o CV Code violation or Bipolar violation the total number of code violation or bipolar violation counted in the last minute 147 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o cvCurrent CV threshold B Example o THRE O ua 100 es 100 e Set up UA and ES of 15 min PM threshold to 100 sec o THRE View current PM threshold setting Mercury help thre Usage Setup PM Threshold Syntax THRE type UA ua ES es SES ses CV cv Params type 0 15min 1 lhour 2 1day UA Unavailable second ES Error Second SES Severely Error Second CV CV BPV ua 15min lhour lday UA threshold es 15min lhour lday ES threshold ses 15min lhour lday SES threshold cv 15min lhour lday CV threshold l view current setup if no parameter 2 15min ua es and ses threshold 1 900sec 0 disable lhour ua es and ses threshold 1 3600sec 0 disable lday ua es and ses threshold 1 86400sec 0 disable all cv threshold 1 2E 9 bit 0 disable Mercury gt thre 0 ua 100 es 100 Mercury gt thre PM threshold CV BPV Figure 3 47 THRE Command Screen 3 6 45 Time Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setthe Time for Mercury Internal clock B S
22. 2 Power supply sockets 1 2 for Mercury 3820 Power supply socket 3 for connecting to external 48VDC this is for voice application Once the voice cards is plugged into Mercury this 48VDC power is required to supply the additional power for generation of the ring tone PG screw Protective Ground screw for connecting to the earth ground Table 2 6 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3820 Chapter 2 Installation 2 9 Mercury 3630 3630E Front Panel Description The Mercury 3630 3630E enclosure has 5 slots which are assigned to the interface modules It can support up to 20 channels and each card can support 4 channels maximum Mercury 3630 3630E is a versatile device with SDH interface device depending on the plug in cards selected multi access platform for 64kbps base unit Figure 2 8 shows the status indicators on each interface module and the buttons Table 2 7 describes the function in detailed Figure 2 8 Front panel view of Mercury 3630 3630E 68 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 7 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3630 3630E LED Indicator Buttons Description Alarm in SDH channel 1 channel 2 Off SDH L1 L2 is in normal condition 1 2 3 4 5 Green Card is ready in the indicated slot Major alarm occurred in the indicated slot O op ard is unavailable Green Indicates this channel in normal condition Yellow Minor alarm occurred in this channel Red Major alarm occurred in this channel Blinking Indic
23. 387 Appendix B Ordering Information is Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description Equipment Equipment o RAAWG 2M 2M ee 00006 E ae 1 pd 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 B d NEN 4P V24 33010 00006 DB25 M F cable m E oo em 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null EN NENNEN add 00008 40033 MERCURY 4P FXO EN EE RE 4 POTS FX 00008 40034 MERCURY 2P DATA e m LL 2P DATA 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V35 F 33010 00006 DB25 M gt 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 M 33010 00023 DB25 M 2 DB15 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE SYNC Dem o fmm 00010 20005 MERCURY 3820 Pre T peso AA ROUTER 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 388 Appendix B Ordering Information Annex Option Product Main Option Part Number Description dd Code Equipment Equipment 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F EN RR PA 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE EN RD ROUTER C 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY BP8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F Power 90001 00059 AC DC POWER 33001 00001 AC POWER CORD I P 110 230V O P 5V 6A 3 PIN 10A 125V 6 FEET 50001 00060 DC DC POWER I P 48V O P 5V 6A Oo E O Uus qU Table B 5 Mercury 3630 Order Information Appendix Trouble Report Appendix C Trouble Report ompany Local Representation Purchase Order No Equipment
24. A SO AARA A RNZZ AR A NANZZ 121 F 66664 EHXEXXXEXNXE EXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXNXE EXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXNXE EXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXNXE HXEXXXEXXE Frame integrity 7 DACS ch loss Harked timeslot is unidirection Accommodate Mercury 3630 3630E Purpose o Setup SDH correlation parameters Support EXC DEG to configure error threshold and TIM function for report insert alarm to other layer Syntax o SDH Lx LL act RL act S1 byte EXC ber DEG ber RTIM tim Re 221 F00005 241 F 86011 261 F BH17 XXEXXEXXNXE XXEXXEEXXE XXEXXEXXNE XXEXXEXXNE XXEXXEEXXE XXEXXEXXNE XXEXXEXXXE voice conversion combined channel ARAARARAAA RAMNAHAXZKAX RANAHAXKAXN BO htt rea BO AAA ARAARARAAA RANAHAXKAXN RAMNAHAAKAX E LOS ELS LA SA unice conversion amp combined channel XP Command Screen HTIM tim EJO str TJO str EJ1 str TJ1 str 175 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Param a LxL1 L2 identifier o LL Enable the local loopback the outgoing signal is looped back through the internal digital time slot interchanged circuit All DSO time slots are looped back to the received path This will check the time slot cross connected table and the physical connection to the user equipment that provides the signal o RL Enable the remote loopback it returns the outside received signal back to the original user equipment This will check the data port including the interface physical
25. Balance 120 Ohm mode and Long Haul Mercury gt help el Usage Syntax Params Mercury gt el 3a Mercury gt stat 3a TYPE 2E1 120 Configuration LL no RL no RCRC no TCRC no SIGNAL CAS FRAME FAS CV CV AIS off HAUL long SIDLE 09h DET 00h CHG 00h SIDLE Setup El Parameters El port Fr fr CAS cas TCRC act RCRC act CV cv SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig BAL bal HAUL haul port port identifier Fr frame mode CAS ccs cas TCRC Ex Cre RCRC rx crc CV cv bpv AIS Alarm Indication Signal Signal Idle Signal Detect Number Signal Change Number 0 fas 1 unframe 0 ccs 1 cas 0 disable 1 enable 0 cv 1 bpv 0 disable 1 enable value between O0 and 15 ABCD bit TCRC and RCRC are disable when changing to unframe Unframe needs to assign 32 timeslots BAL and HAUL is for Mercury 800 built in E1 port only AIS ais DET CHG fr 0 cas 1 tcrc 0 rcrc 0 bal 1 haul 1 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC E1 Command Screen Figure 3 20 110 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 15 EM Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The EM Card is the module of the Mercury and can via a console to control it The command as below m Usage o Setup E amp M Parameters B Syntax o EM Port MOD mod DL act TSA act TONE act LAW law Tgain tgain Rgain rgain BH Params o port port identifier o MOD setup E amp M mode o DL digital loopback o TSA TSA loopback o TONE
26. Caution Mercury 3600 3600 3820 and 3630 3630E share the same I O modules But now the interface card for Mercury 800 is different connector designed to Mercury 3600 3600 3820 and 3630 3630E so the card for thoes can NOT plug into Mercury 800 54 Chapter 2 Installation Chapter 2 Installation This Chapter provides installation operation instructions for the Mercury Series Product and to ensure it is working properly 2 1 Unpacking Make a preliminary inspection of the shipping container before unpacking evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the nearest Tainet representative Unpack the equipment as follows B Place the container with the top facing upwards B Unpack equipment carefully check for completeness against the purchase order B Inspect equipment for shipping damage including bent or loose hardware or broken connectors B To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD damage avoid touching the internal components Before plugging in any user interface module please turn the power off Caution Turn off the power then remove the top cover before changing or installing any module on the Mercury 800 base unit For Mercury 3600 be sure to turn off the power before replacing any module otherwise the device may be damaged Mercury s shipping package should includes the following items B A Mercury stand alone unit 55 Chapter 2 Installation User Manual in CD
27. Figure 5 32 Application of Bridging Ethernet In bridging mode you can still assign a specific IP to Router LAN interface this will allow you to telnet into Router Module for further configuration Bridging function can be configured at Configuration System Traffic Types Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Traffic Types Ethernet Bridging LAN IP Address 192 168 0 1 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 255 0 Figure 5 33 The sub menu to setup Ethernet Bridging When operating in Bridging mode the rear panel WAN LED will go into a flash state as the WAN interface detects data flowing across it 5 6 5 2 RIP function Setup Routing Information Protocol RIP is a distance vector protocol for use in intra domain on the interior of a gateway There are actually two versions of RIP in the TCP IP protocol suite Version 1 is the original Version 2 is the updated version Version 2 is used almost exclusively because of its enhanced capabilities Chapter 5 Router Configuration Your Router Module supports both RIP 1 and RIP 2 RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Confi
28. Location B NA Figure 1 6 T1 E1 Drop amp Insert for Data amp Voice 13 Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 6 In a drop insert and bypass application channels from a trunk connecting two locations are dropped at an intermediate location inserted for additional data or just bypassed to allow the data to continue on to the next location In the basic application shown in Figure 1 6 some of the channels of trunk A are routed to trunk B and others are routed to trunk C Similarly some of the channels of trunk B are routed to trunk C This arrangement can be extended to any desired number of trunks TDM Modular Integrated Access Device TDM Integrated Access Device Mercury Series Mercury Series o o Do a 2 i Fractional E1 T1 il J Fl J a E FXS FXO E amp M PBX Figure 1 7 TDM Modular Integrated Access Device Mercury system is an E1 T1 or Fractional E1 T1 modular integrated access device IAD It can operate multiple applications simultaneously Mercury enables service providers to bundle voice services and Internet access over a single E1 or T1 line A variety of voice interfaces are available E1 T1 for digital PBX connectivity or analog voice interfaces FXS FXO or E amp M for connecting an analog PBX or telephones Mercury system can be also treated as a Multiplexer for variant services and de multiplex those data stream at the remote site via upper trunk such as E1 T1 xDSL or Fiber opt
29. Once you have made the change please memorize it and DO NOT forget the new ID and PW otherwise you must send your Mercury back to TAINET for service while the ID and PW will be lost forever BH Syntax o SECE No ID P W mode B Param o No The user number from 1 to 5 there are 5 sets of ID and PW can be set in system o IDThe identification for log into Access mode a PAW The password for the corresponding ID o Mode 139 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e here are two modes for this specified user Supervisor has full authority to operate Mercury including adding and modifying the newer Login ID and PW When operator is assigned as Normal user he can also fully operate Mercury but cannot add the newer Login ID and PW only can modify his own ID and PW e S Supervisor e N Normal User default B Example a SECE 5 Test test n e Add a newer Normal user with No 5 ID is Test and PW is test Oo SECC 5 Test test n o Confirm the new ID and PW o USER o Display all user ID and PW in Mercury Mercury help secc Usage Setup ID amp P W confirm Syntax SECC No ID P W mode Params No user number ID identification P W password mode S supervisor N normal user Notes 1 Method of ID amp P W Modification Step 1 use SECE to select new user No ID amp P W Step 2 use SECC to confirm new user No ID amp P W 2 ID amp P W are case sensitive Mercury sece 5 Test pn use SECC to con
30. Syntax Oo V24 port MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts INV inv LL act RL act CC cc Param a port port identifier for the indicated port o MOD The data format for selected port Both Synchronous and Asynchronous formats are supported For Async mode data bits can be selected to 7 or 8 bits Oo mod O Sync 1 Async 2 Async8 default o SPD Port speed for the indicated the port o spd 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 default o DCD DCD signal o dcd O forceon 1 on when sync default 2 remote RTS 3 off o CTS Channel CTS signal o cts O forceon 1 local RTS default o INV TxC and RxC clock polarity o inv O normal default 1 inverted o LL Local loopback 150 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring RL Remote loopback act O disable default 1 enable CC Enable the port combined function when enable this function the combined port will occupy 1 time slot and share the bandwidth of 64 Kbps So each of the assigned combinative ports can up to 9600bps only while choosing cc to 3 or 4 ccO none default 1 ab combined 2 ab combined amp cd combined 3 abc combined 4 abcd combined Example V24 6a mod 2 spd 3 cc 3 e Setup the 4P V24 card on port 6A to speed 9600bps and Async mode 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control Enable the combined function for port 6A 6B and 6C that will occupy 1 time slot so that the maximum speed for port 6A 6B and 6C only can up to
31. TSA Routing Table Time Slot Assignment Time Slot 00 Access lt WAN 01 gt Provision yes Time Slot 08 Access Provision Time Slot Access Provision Time Slot Access Provision TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC done Figure 5 60 Sub menu of TSA settings for Ch r module Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table Time Slot Assignment Time Slot 00 Access Provision lt none gt WAN 01 WAN 02 WAN 04 WAN 05 WAN 06 Time Slot WAN 08 WAN O9 WAN 10 Access WAN 12 WAN 13 WAN 14 Provision Time Slot Access Provision Time Slot Access Provision TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 61 The sub menu of TSA selection 312 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The following table describes in details the TSA Configuration items Time Slot The Time Slot number Access Time Slot to the specified WAN interface Provision Yes Time Slot be assigned to Channelize Router Module on Device Platform No Time Slot none be assigned to Channelize Router Module on Device Platform Na Time Slot is not available Table 5 20 Descriptions of TSA parameters 5 7 3 5 Routing Table Setup This menu allows configuration of the static Routing Table of the Ch r module for packet forwarding This setting is in Configuration Routing Table menu Provisiononon Mercury Channelized Router Ve
32. Traffic Types IP Routing Encapsulate Local IP 0 0 0 0 Encapsulate Local IP 10 0 0 2 lt PPP gt address lt PPP gt address Net Mask 0 0 0 0 Net Mask 255 255 255 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Remote IP 10 0 0 1 address address Table 5 8 Example of PPP settings 2 Note The IP shown this section are examples You should substitute the IP values shown with values that are appropriate for your network The configuration for Table 5 8 is the example to setup the client server mode for WAN PPP The WAN IP at site A will be the remote IP assianed at site R raiter B Unnumbered Setting Ethernet Site A with LAN IP Site B with LAN IP 192 168 1 254 24 172 16 1 1 20 inm possa F Router Module Router Module Figure 5 24 WAN IP unnumbered setting 278 2 6 4 3 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Site A unnumbered Site B unnumbered Traffic Types IP Routing Traffic Types IP Routing PPP Local IP 192 168 1 Local IP 172 16 1 1 address 254 address encapsulate NotMask 55 255 25 9P9U2l Net Mask 255 255 255 929 ppp Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Remote IP o address address Table 5 9 IP unnumbered configuration IP unnumbered configuration allows you to enable IP processing on a serial interface without assigning it an explicit IP address Configure the PPP Local IP Address the same as the Router LAN IP and assign Net Mask IP to 255 255 255 255 will now enable the WAN IP unnumbered Setting up
33. e Setup 4P Data card on port 4B to V 35 type speed 1280 Kbps count number is 20 start from time slot O and end with time slot 19 104 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring The clock mode is default value dev 0 DTE without clock and TxC RxC Mercury gt help data Usage Setup Data Parameters Syntax DATA port count TYPE type RI act DEV dev Params port port identifier count time slot count TYPE interface type CTS CTS signal DSR DSR signal DCD DCD signal RI RI signal DEV the type of device connected to INV TXC amp RXC polarity type N A 1 RS530A 2 RS530 3 X 21 4 V 35 act signal inactive 1 signal active dev DTE without clock TXC RXC CTS act INV inv DSR act DCD act DTE DTE DCE DCE DTE DTE without clock with clock without clock with clock without clock with clock TXC EXC TXC RXC EXC TXC EXC TXC RXC EXC TXC TCC TXC EXC TCC TXC normal RXC normal 1 TXC normal RXC inverted TXC inverted RXC normal 3 TXC inverted RXC inverted NOTE 1 start timeslot be set O Mercury data 4a 10 type 2 dev 4 Mercury stat 4a TYPE 4DATA Configuration TYPE RS530 LL no RL no Speed 640Kbps RTS on DTR on CTS on DSR on DCD on RI off Time Slot 0 9 TXC normal RXC normal External Device DCE with clock TXC RXC EXC Mercury gt data 4b 20 type 4 Mercury gt stat 4b TYPE 4DATA Configuration TYPE V 35 LL no RL no Speed 1280Kbps RTS on DTR on CTS on DSR o
34. eeeeeeeeeeen eene nennen nenne 261 5 6 1 The Description of N R Configuration sesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeee ener nn nnn nnne nene 261 3 0 2 Change the System Password a ueisoagiia tot isrb sepe baa ck eo ehh ea ouod tex Resta parecia ciertas 264 5 06 3 Organization of TCS menu We uii oec errare o eon adu eerte Rea bo aee pepe o ev CE in noain i ba anki p toto Geb ligadas 265 OUO LAND WAN Connora Oea icio Piasieodt easet scans oua eise diaria E anda ii ipa 2123 5 6 5 Bridging and Routing Access Configuration eeeessessssssssssssseeseeeeeeenn nnn nnne nennen nnns 284 00 Nare Do A A 291 307 DHCP CONO ndo os caspase ase E ero A A E E EE S 291 5 6 8 SNMP 299 DOS Sys enr VI IM ICHANCO sagnosa eine e n rerin ro ia Taranee iant areca apip arero Toce tt 300 5 7 CONFIGURATION OF CHANNELIZE ROUTER MODULE CH R eee 304 VN NER I MEET e ILE m 304 MES CMT SLM 305 2459 A a egt dU nee 306 Dedo o O 00090998088 0000900000092 6p60R1UPOUSMA DI dde dans 315 io Devre Bonis Nm 320 MEME BI ui EM RETE 325 APPENDIN A INTRODUCTION sensata A MERCURY 800 3600 3820 3630 CRAFT PORT INTERFACE RJ 45 TO DB 9 ADAPTER WITH INNOEEMODENLINSIDB sis oro S OE 329 A 2 MERCURY 800 3600 3820 3630 PPP PORT INTERFACE RJ 45 TO DB 25 ADAPTER 330 A 3 MERCURY 3600 CRAFT PORT INTERFACE DB 9 CONNECTOR cere 331 A 4 MERCURY SERIES ALARM PORT DB 9 FEMALE cernere nnne nennen 332 X Mercury S
35. even odd none Flow Control RTS CTS SYNC Baud 2 4 Kbps to 128 Kbps 37 Chapter 1 Overview Data Sync PPP Clock external Electric Signal V 24 Connector RJ 45 B Channelized Router Module Router C o General Description e Router Module can provide TCP IP Protocol and 32 channels WAN INTERFACE Provides In band TELNET Out band Console port Management o Electrical Characteristic e LAN Port Physical Layer Signal IEEE802 3 Electric Signal IEEE802 3 Connector RJ 45 10BaseT e WAN Port Support 32 channels WAN INTERFACE e Protocol PPP RFC compliant IP RFC compliant ARP RFC compliant TELNET RFC compliant SNMP RFC compliant o Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping o Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only B A U law card A U Law o General Description e Non blocking A law u law conversion of 120 time slots It is used for transferring the voice signal between E1 and T1 voice switch 38 Chapter 1 Overview o Electrical Characteristic e ITU T G 711 Pulse code modulation PCM of voice frequencies o Timeslot Allocation e No necessary to assigned the time slot o Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only B X 50 card X50 MUX 5C X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C o General Description e X 50 cards have 5 Physical ports with RS232 I F characteristics and the SCSI Il cable to 5 DB25 female
36. occur over critical limited lt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second E Bit error The Problem in network Alarm Minor E bit error rate of facilities the link receive signal lt 1000 bits sec Only on E1 links operating with 67328 framing Receive Unframed Problem at the remote Alarm Minor All One Unframed equipment all ones sequence in received in the link data stream Receive Remote Problem at the remote Alarm Minor Alarm Receive equipment 205 Chapter 4 Maintenance the remote loss of frame synchronization alarm on the specified link 15 CV 15 Minutes Informative alert P M Minor Code Bipolar Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold 1H CV 1 hour Code Bipolar Informative alert P M Minor Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold 1D CV 1 day Code Bipolar Informative alert P M Minor Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor report has been no action required switch off at specified port ALM amp Dac Alarm and DAC Informative message State Minor OFF Off Alarm report no action required and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 1 E1 alarm message Chapter 4 Maintenance T1 Module Table 4 2 lists the alarm messages generated by the T1 module specifies their class Major or Mi
37. when channel 1 was broke system will auto switch to channel 2 even channel 1 was recovered and channel 2 won t auto switch back to channel1 B Example O O SPO SP SP 1 SP 178 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o SP2 o SP o SP3 o SP o SP4 o SP a SP5 Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Hode Disable Status L1 Working Hercury gt sp 1 Set SDH protection mode to Auto non reversion Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Mode Auto non reversion Status L1 Working Hercury gt sp 2 Set SDH protection mode to Manual Line Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Mode Manual Line1 Status L1 Uorking Hercury sp 3 Set SDH protection mode to Hanual Line2 Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Mode Manual Line2 Status L4 Horking Hercury gt sp 4 Set SDH protection mode to Force Linei Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Hode Force Linei tatus L1 Working Hercury gt sp 5 Set SDH protection mode to Force Line2 Hercury gt sp SDH Protection Hode Force Line2 Status L2 Protecting Figure 3 66 SDH Command Screen 3 6 61 EOS Command Accommodate Mercury 3630E B Purpose o Use for setup EOS parameters B Syntax o EOS Nx MOD mod FLOW act FR fr LL act VC vc DD dd DELTA del PIT pti UPl upi ADD byte CTR byte SAPI word TIM tim FCS act SCRB act EJ1 str TJ1 str EC2 byte TC2 byte EJ2 str TJ2 str EV5 v5 TV5 v5 EK4 byte TK4 byte B Param 179 Chapter 3 Configuration an
38. 0 0E 00 1E1 75 00900 1 0E 00 00000 0 0E 00 00000 0 0E 00 1E1 75 00900 1 0E 00 00000 0 0E 00 00000 0 0E 00 SPACE key for more or ESC to abort gt Mercury gt pm clr 2 Mercury gt pm 4a clr 0 Figure 3 37 PM Command Screen 132 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 35 RP Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose O Setup the ring protection mode and its clocking Constructing the E1 11 Fiber ring protection feature can provide an always alive transmission path to prevent failure on the specified link Currently Mercury Series support 4 rings within 1 device this function allows user to set 4 individual rings to different locations or set 4 rings to become 1 big ring and extend the bandwidth All interfaces of that ring should be of with same interface type This automatic redundant path protection function can select the live path automatically to protect the data transmission if the primary link malfunctions It can also provide the time slot drop on the multiple nodes of the ring protect associated point The RP command always comes with command DROP refer to section 3 6 13 DROP Command and the ring protection requires a start node which is in the Master mode all other nodes connected to chain act in Slave mode This mechanism will automatically distinguish all node connections If one of the links fails due to cable faults or problems the Main Ring can be wrapped onto the Backup R
39. 09100 60047 BNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m T1 2CB L for 00010 00009 MERCURY 800 33010 00025 DB25 M 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M LE 29 ee aE 360 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option Annex Option Product Part Number Description Code Equipment Equipment feable 1 8m 1 8m A MU L 00010 00010 MERCURY 800 A u po eer eres o 4IDSL L 00010 00011 MERCURY 800 4IDSL ud o RR RR X50 MUX 5 00010 00012 MERCURY 800 X 50 il O 33010 00022 SCSI Il 5DB25 33010 00006 BEI M gt ee To pf O EDD 00010 00013 MERCURY 800 X 50 BOARD 33010 00022 SCSI Il 5DB25 33010 00006 RE M gt E X50 DACS 2 00010 00014 MERCURY 800 X 50 ow sl FE 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 5DB25 EE V 33010 00006 DB25 M gt fF a 2P V35 L 00010 00015 MERCURY 800 2V35 E 361 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 33010 00002 DB25 y 33010 00006 DB25 a gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V 35 M cable EE o v 4 FXS D L 00010 00016 4 FXS VOICE CARD a eee a 35015 00002 PHONE BOX o o RR FIBER B L 00010 00017 WITH 1 1 BACKUP for NNNM CR FIBER 1 L 00010 00018 SINGLE PORT FIBER TEN O MERO FIBER 2 L 00010 00019 DAUL PORT FIBER for DP eRe XCODE L 00010 00020 MERCURY 800 A Neco O L 33008 00009 RJ 45 8P8C ommum UU Rem PP SHDSLLQO0o00088 DAULFORTGSHDSL DS 2P DATA L 00010 000
40. 1B gt 1C When Loop fails port 1A detects the alarm 187 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring criteria which can be set by user system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and change the uni directional connection from 1A gt 1B to 1C 1B then all the traffic will be transmitted and received through port 1B and 1C 1B 1C 1B gt 1A System will keep detecting the alarm on port 1A If the alarm is cleared system will reload profile 1 and revert back to original traffic path B Structure A Se ee ee Se A Figure 3 74 1 1 Protection Actions on Port 1A Alarm Alarm off gt on on gt off Run profile 2 Run profile 1 Table 3 15 CP states table B Configurations o Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock o Mercury B e Clk 1a 1c Setup the master clock received from port 1A the slave clock is from port 1C o Mercury A amp B e Xc la 1b 188 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Cross port 1A to port 1B e Xcs 1b 1c Uni directional cross from source port 1B to destination port 1C e Cp 1a off 1 on 2 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port 1A if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm are detected system will execute profile 2 and change the traffic to Loop2 If the alarm is cleared on port 1A system will execute profile 1 to change the traffic back to Loop1 B Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B o Logb e Starting logging command scripts o Xcs la 1b e Uni
41. 3 6 50 3 6 52 and 3 6 58 for more detailed description and examples B Command Set o XC mode porta portb 80 3 4 4 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring a XT mode porta tsa portb tsb count fp o XP framer channel Diagnostic Mercury Series Product provides the diagnostic ability such as the function of alarm status performance monitoring and loopback testing The alarm status shows the current alarm condition in the alarm buffer and the performance monitoring lists the performance evaluation as a group report for 15 minutes 1 hour 1 day interval The loopback testing may force the data to loop back and check the connection section by section Refer to Section 3 6 3 3 6 19 3 6 32 3 6 39 and Chapter 4 for more detailed description and examples BH Command Set o ALM CLR port p o LINK port LL act RL act ACT sw o PM port VIEW view CLR clr o STAT port Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 5 Default Configuration Setting and User Stored Profiles There is a factory default configuration for Mercury Series Product and each of the tributary modules When powering on the Mercury or plugging in a new card the default factory settings will be loaded until further changes are done by the operator supervisor Refer to the following table for the default settings of each card Mercury Series Product also provides up to 20 sets of user profiles for Supervisor to
42. 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE D A 33010 00006 DB25 M i 1 ed C ia 40011 MERCURY A uBOARD FA A MU 00008 40012 MERCURY 2V35 BOARD 2P V35 33010 00002 DB25 M V 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M cable 1 o 33010 00013 DB25 M 2 V 35 M cable 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 00008 40013 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD RJ 11 4IDSL 00008 40014 MERCURY X 50 BOARD X50 MUX 5 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt C 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 OOO peer o O oo X50 MUX 4 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt C 5DB25 F cable Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 F 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 EN o O oo uM 33010 00022 SCSI Il Fe 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 00008 40019 MERCURY 4IDSL Do e m o 4IDSL 00008 40024 MERCURY 4T1 IEEE mm IS T1 4CB 33010 00025 DB25 M 5 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE O ci 33010 00006 DB25 M L Lenses 1 00008 40025 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP FIBER B 00008 40026 SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER FIBER 1 00008 40027 DAULPORTFIBER FIBER 2 00008 40028 MERCURY XCODE L IXCODE 00008 40051 40051 DAUL DAUL PORT G SHDSL G SHDSL 0 2P SHDSL 00008 40029 MERCURY 2T1 add co NN NN RN T1 2CB 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 Qguxeooi0 RU4SOMME
43. 3630 allow the use of TFTP to upgrade their Flash firmware The router module with the latest firmware version supports this upgrade function too Please keep in mind that TFTP upload is only available if 300 Chapter 5 Router Configuration e O TCP IP is configured on your Router module Some of the newer modules are supported with newer Boot version that can only be upgraded using EPROM writer B Files require TFTPServer1 1 exe CISCO TFTP Server freeware Vxxx bin binary firmware upload file otep 1 Setup the TFTP server Run TFTPServer1 1 exe and install it to your workstation Launch the TFTP Server Figure 5 48 TFTP Server settings Note User can use any TFTP software But in these sections we use Cisco TFTP as an example otep 2 Configure the TFTP Server Press the option button at top left corner and then locate the root directory where the upgrade firmware is stored otep 3 Telnet to the Router configuration management Terminal 301 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Telnet to the Router Configuration manual and select Device Control gt Firmware Upgrade 24 C AWTNTN Theystem 32 emd exe telnet 172 16 5 250 1D xi evice Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Download process will ERASE the program code in the device DO NOT interrupt the dounload process If you suspect t
44. 4 POTS FXO V1 16 Supported Table 1 16 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 ompatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO Table 1 17 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 ompatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO V1 03 V1 07 Supported Table 1 18 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 ompatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO V1 03 V1 00 Supported Table 1 19 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Chapter 1 Overview Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO V1 00 V1 00 Supported Table 1 20 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Caution If voice card was plugged into Mercury 800 and 3600 no other external power is required and only support one 4P POTS FXO card B Router card Single Router Module Router o General Description e Router Module can provide TCP IP Protocol and two PPP ports Provides In band TELNET Out band Console port Management o Electrical Characteristic e LAN Port Physical Layer Signal IEEE802 3 Electric Signal IEEE802 3 Connector RJ 45 10BaseT e WAN Port AUX port ASYNC Baud 2 4 Kbps to 115 2 Kbps Data 8 Bit start stop Stop 1 1 5 2bit Parity
45. 530 PIN definition for Mercury series eesesssssss 339 X 21 PIN definition for Mercury series ccoocccconncconncccnconnncncnnnnnnnonnnoncnonononaninnnnnos 340 V 36 RS 449 PIN definition for Mercury series erre 341 A U card 8 pm terminal block xuc ueiucetxesintetuimGGc Rec ra Qe bi cni rv EHI REG PER E 342 X 50 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment occcoccccncnccccncccnccnnonocnnonnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnonos 343 IDSL Line pin assignment errar eere errar re errar rea ra na nnns 344 SDSL Interface PIN assignment erre ereana 345 Table A 19 Table A 20 Table A 21 Table A 22 Table A 23 Table A 24 Table A 25 Table A 26 Table A 27 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table D 1 Table E 1 Mercury Series User s Manual Ethernet interface for router module eee eerennea 346 RJ 45 TO DB25 PIN DEFINATION AUX oocccoocccocccoccccocccoccccoccconcocncoconccnnnncnnncnnos 347 Pin definition of Ethernet interface of Router C ooccocccccccccccncocnconcncncnconnccnnnonaninons 347 FXS interface PIN assignment eee nnne nnns 349 SCSI II gt DB 25 CABLE PIN assignment erre 350 4P V24 Interface SCSI II PIN assignMent occcoccccccccccccoccccocncocnnnncncnnnnnncncnaninnnnnos 351 4 POTS FXO FXS Interface DB44 PIN assignment seeeeeesess 352 Adaptor cable DB44 to RJ 11 x 4 PIN as
46. 7 N R Jumper Configuration System Setup Traffic Types This field allows you to choose the traffic mode of your Router Module Routing or Bridging LAN Setup IP Address The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on the network Each IP address consists of four sets of decimal numbers separated by the period e g 192 72 243 1 Each address is composed of two parts a network part and a host part The network part identifies the unique subnet that contains the host the host part identifies the actual host device 261 Chapter 5 Router Configuration IP NetMask The IP address netmask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which the host part A one 1 in a mask bit location means the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network value a zero 0 means the corresponding bit is part of the host value MAC Address Shown the Ethernet Address of your Router Module WAN Setup WAN Protocol Selected the WAN protocol Frame Relay or PPP encapsulation PPP FrRelay and AUX Setup Local IP This parameter identifies the IP address for local WAN IP NetMask The IP net mask for WAN when protocol is selected PPP PPP Remote IP This parameter identifies the IP address for the WAN port on PPP a remote router when the protocol is s
47. 9600bps V24 6b mod 1 spd 0 dcd 1 cts 1 e Setup port 6B to speed 1200bps and Async mode 7 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control the DCD signal will be on when it is in sync with remote site V 24 card and CTS signal will follow the local RTS signal V24 6c mod 0 spd 2 oetup port 6C to speed 4800bps and Sync mode V24 6d mod 0 spd 4 Setup port 6D to speed 19200bps and Sync mode 151 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury help v24 Usage Setup V24 Parameters Syntax V24 port MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts INV inv LL act RL act CC cc Params port port identifier MOD channel mode SPD channel speed DCD channel DCD signal CTS channel CTS signal INV channel clock polarity LL local loopback RL remote loopback CC combined channel sync l async7 2 async8 spd 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS 3 off force on 1 local RTS normal 1 inverted disable 1 enable cc none 1 ab combined 2 ab combined cd combimed 3 abc combined 4 abcd combined Notes 1 The ports which combined means that the transmitted data of these ports are in the same timeslot 2 In abc combined state the speed of a b c port are up to 9600bps 3 In abcd combined state the speed of all ports are up to 9600bps Mercury v24 6a mod 2 spd 3 cc 3 Mercury v24 6b mod 1 spd 0 dcd 1 cts 1 1 Mercury v24 6c mod 0 spd 2 0 Mercury gt v24 6d mod Mercury stat 6a TYPE 4V24 CLK NO ACTIVE
48. ALM DAC Configuration MODE async8 SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 9600bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury gt stat 6b Configuration MODE async7 SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 1200bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury gt stat 6c Configuration MODE sync SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 4800bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury gt stat 6d Configuration MODE sync SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 19200bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc spd 4 Figure 3 50 V24 Command Screen 152 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 48 V35 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Define V 35 port parameters The DTE transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the sts starting time slot and ets end time slot for 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps it may start from time slot 1 to time slot 8 So the parameter sts is 1 and ets is 8 The valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 but for 2V35 card it is between O and 31 time slot O can be used for 2V35 card only B Syntax o V35 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act Rl act DEV dev INV inv BH Param a port Port identifier for the indicated V 35 port o sts The start time slot number o ets The end time slot number o CIS V 3
49. DEG ber EJ1 str TJl str EC2 byte TC2 byte EJ2 str TJ2 str EV5 v5 TV5 v5 EK4 bytel TK4 byte NI N4 YCG identifier MOD Fast Ethernet capacity flow control FR Encapsulation format i Virtual container Type LGAS Link capcacity adjustment scheme Differential delay DELTA GFP pre sync Payload type identify UFI User payload identify LAPS address field GIR LAPS control fiald LAPS SAP field TIM Set Report LP TIM Insert 2M AIS Frame check squence SORE Srcambling control Expected JI VC3 only TJ Transmit J1 VC3 only Expected 02 V63 only TG Transmit C2 VC3 only Expected J2 VC12 only TJ2 Transmit J2 VC12 only Expected V5 VC12 only TV5 Transmit V5 YC12 only Expected K4 VC12 only TK4 Transmit K4 VCl only Rj E ym hm i ep mod O AUTO 1 10M FIRL 2 10M HALF 3 100M F LL 4 TOOW HAE fr O GFP 1 LAPS vo Q VC12 1 VO3 act O disable 1 enable dd value 10 64 defaul t 64 pti value 077 upi value 0 255 del value 177 v5 value 0007 byte one byte value DO FF word one word value 0000 FFFF str a input string and lengh less 15 character tim Disable Disable l Report Disable 2 Report Insert Figure 3 67 EOS Command Screen 181 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 62 VC12 Command Accommdate Mercury 3630E B Purpose a Setup vcg VC12 cross connection B Syntax o VC12 Nx SQ startSQ endSQ BH Params o Nx Ethernet port
50. ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 70 The sub menu of Warm Start menu Du 29 2 Cold Start The Cold Start will reboot the system as if you powering off the system then back on again After you upgrade the firmware you may execute this command This is available in the Device Control Cold Start menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Reboot Module T reboot 4 YES NO TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 71 The sub menu of Cold Start menu 321 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 5 3 Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory parameters This is available in the Device Control Restore Default menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restore Parameters to Factory Default restore lt YES gt NO TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 72 The sub menu of Restore Default menu 5 7 5 4 Firmware Upgrade This Ch r module runs the download program and downloads the updated code to the FLASH To start the download process the process must begin by first erasing the program code already in the FLASH Please closely follow the instructions This command is available in the Device Control Firmware Upgrade menu Also please refer to secti
51. Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Frame Alignment oynchronization Loss Transmit Elastic Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified module 3 Replace the module Problem at unstable Store Slip Detected clock source Tx clock slip on indicated port Major Major Major Major Minor Alarm Minor ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Minor 232 Chapter 4 Maintenance report has been message no action switch off at specified required port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative State Minor OFF Alarm report and message no action DAC function has required been switch off at specified port Table 4 11 4P V24 module alarm message 4 1 12 4 POTS FXO Voice Module Table 4 12 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4 POTS FXO voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning 15 ES Error Seconds Informative alert P M Major Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert
52. IP Filter find it under Configuration Security Filter There is a filter table for each incoming and outgoing filter this allows you to configure specific IP traffic permitted to access your LAN Filter MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14t Incoming Filter Outgoing Filter Incoming Filter Config Enter select ESC previous menu lt left right TAB next item Figure 5 44 The sub menu of Incoming Filter settings There are two kinds of Filters incoming and outgoing Incoming Filter controls the access of IP packets incoming from WAN to LAN Outgoing Filter controls the IP packets outgoing from LAN to WAN 295 Chapter 5 Router Configuration depor Ope Enable or Disable the specify access No list Enter the Source IP Address of the Leave 0 0 0 0 if don t packet you wish to filter care Enter the Destination IP Address of Leave 0 0 0 0 if don t the packet you wish to filter care Enter the IP subnet mask Octet E g 255 255 255 0 Prefix to apply destination or source equal 24 IP address Protocol refers to the upper layer protocol Enter the destination port of the Leave O if don t care packet that you wish to filter 1 655535 Table 5 15 Filter rule menu fields Filter MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14t Incoming Filter Outgoing Filter Incoming Filter Config Enter select ESC previous menu lt left right TAB next item Type Source IP MASK Bit Desti
53. LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL ee r Pe Pe Pe Pe FTF FT FTP ko o d oo eo LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL ee ee p pe m m pM mMm pep ge pem ge ope ge pee yep ge ko o d oo LL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LL LL LLLI r Pe Pe Pe PF FTF m ra ra ra ra rr ko ia d eo LLL LLL LLL oo oo LLL LLL LL LLLI Figure 5 37 The sub menu of setting the Static routes Chapter 5 Router Configuration 9 6 5 4 Static routes are those routes that you define in the Router Module manually Static routes exist permanently unless you change them You may use static routes to establish fixed connections and to augment the RIP routing table The maximum capacity of Router Module routing index list can number up to 15 LT TEENS Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Net Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination ext Hop Enter the IP address of the next hop router This is an immediate neighbor of your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the next hop must be a router on the same segment as your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product over WAN the next hop must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Metric The metric represent
54. Mercury 800 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot version Flash Version SDSL card V1 03 V1 03 Supported Table 1 30 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3820 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot version Flash Version SDSL card Table 1 31 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Boot version Flash Version SDSL card Table 1 32 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3630 3630E 47 Chapter 1 Overview 2 Caution For Mercury 3600 3820 3630 3630E all released versions will support the SDSL card B Fiber Optical card Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber B o General Description e 3 types of Fiber Optical cards are provided for the uplink trunk These cards can aggregate all the tributary data with electrical characteristic and convert them through the optical trunk link e he FOM card Fiber B can provide automatic protection switching function for optical link when Optical signal fails switching is completed in less than 30ms e he FOM can provide alarm and status indicators on Front panel including Fiber fail Frame Sync loss Fiber Optical Frame error Code Violation o Electrical Characteristic e The FOM Output power 6 dbm e he FOM Sensitivity is 32 dbm e he transfer distance up to 55Km e he FOM provide error rate 1 10 10 transmission e The FOM can be use as clock sou
55. Nx64k bps o 1P SHDSL V card also provide voice signaling information transmission function lt is included a mode Signaling mode to transmit voice signaling information ABCD bits Therefore it can be a trunk for voice application o In signaling mode Timeslot O is used to transmit signaling bits ABCD bits Therefore it only could be able to transmit signaling bits in Frame mode 1P SHDSL V card provides 31 channels in Frame mode And it can support 30 channels voice data at most o Electrical Characteristic o Standard e Meet ITU T G 991 2 relative requirements e Loop performance and performance test meet ITU T G 991 2 requirements e EOC embedded operation channel supporting e Power back off supporting e Line code Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation TC PAM e LTU and NTU mode Chapter 1 Overview O O Wetting current source sub module Line protection ITU T K 20 Port Number One port per card Line Speed Multi rate 200 2064 Kbps increment step 64K bps Date rate 64K to 2 048M bps increment step 64K bps Connector RJ 45 135 ohm balanced via 2 wire twisted pair Temperature Operation 0 C 50 C Storage 10 C 70C Relative Humidity Operation 0 9096 non condensing Storage 0 95 non condensing Wetting Current 4 6 mA constant current provide LTU Side Power Consumption The maximum power consumption of 1P SHDSL V card is 3 5 Walt Voice channels 30 voic
56. P M Major Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Informative alert P M Major Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert P M Major Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert P M Major Seconds Counting 233 Chapter 4 Maintenance Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold ALM Alarm Off Alarm Informative otate Minor OF report has been message no action switch off at port required ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative otate Minor OFF Alarm report and message no action DAC function has required been switch off at specified port Table 4 12 4 POTS FXO voice module alarm message 4 1 13 4 POTS FXS Voice Module Chapter 4 Maintenance Table 4 13 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4 POTS FXS voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their mean
57. Router Module Configuration Monitoring Device Control Diagnosis Figure 5 9 The main menu tree in router module There are four categories in Main Menu B Configuration a This menu includes all configuration of WAN and LAN and some advanced management The detailed settings of this menu will be discussed in later sections B Monitoring o To view system status interface statistics and routing table B Device Control o The device control menu allows you to restore the default parameter upgrade Mercury s firmware or warm start your Router Module to running the current parameters B Diagnosis a In the diagnosis menu you can use ICMP ping echo to perform diagnostic checks on your network or view current software version of BOOT ROM and FLASH 0 6 3 2 Configuration Menu Configuration FR RIP Route Table Security NAT SNMP DHCP Filter Static Routing Table X Default Gateway Outgoing Filter Incoming Filter Figure 5 10 The sub menu tree of Configuration menu 266 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration Menu includes most general settings and features for your Router Module you will find more detailed settings in a later session B System o This field includes the Ethernet IP and AUX interface setup and also allows you to choose the WAN interface encapsulation and traffic type o You can activate the DHCP server and SNMP agent in this field m PPP o Setup your PPP encapsulation for WAN interface i
58. Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable oecond Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error Seconds Counting Severey Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable oecond Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Chapter 4 Maintenance Informative alert P M lt lt lt lt lt lt U AY v Ay U RCL A Problem at unstable Alarm 213 Class Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Minor Chapter 4 Maintenance Corrective Actions Class Message RCL B Frame Err R LOS 4 1 4 High Speed on Primary link clock source Receive carrier data loss from the remote FOM module For Fiber B module only Receive Carrier Loss Problem at unstable Alarm Minor on Backup link clock source Receive carrier data loss from the remote FOM module For Fiber B module only Frame Error Have the fiber link Alarm Minor Detected the checked particular framing error occurs on the Rx Remote fiber LOS Problem at the remote Alarm Minor mimm pe pr Tab
59. Serial No Please describe 1 Testing Network Structure 2 Configuration 3 Testing Network Equipment 4 Trouble Description ignature TAINET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CORP FAX 886 2 2658 3232 E MAIL sales tainet net 391 Appendix D Trouble Shooting Appendix D Trouble Shooting Trouble Shooting Table 1 Configured parameter values are lost after equipment restart When user modifies or changes the parameters the user should save the configurations in the flash memory by entering the Save Configuration menu and then reboot the system by entering the Reboot menu Console Telnet Web User Name and Password When accessing the device through Telnet or the Web the user will be prompted to enter the password User can try the default user name root and password root to log in Access denied There are several conditions that will disable user s access to the device via Console Telnet or the Web Message oolution Incorrect user The password entered is incorrect Check the user name and password again Table D 1 Trouble Shooting Table 393 Appendix E Glossary Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION Part of the original IEEE 802 3 standard 10 Base T is the Ethernet specification of 10 Mbps base band that uses two pair of 10 Base T twisted pair Category 3 4 or 5 cabling using one pair to send data and the other to receive 10 Base T has a distant limit
60. Store Slip Detected Tx clock slip on port 218 alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified X 50 module 3 Replace the X 50 module Problem at unstable clock source Problem at unstable clock source Alarm Alarm Alarm Class Major Major Major Major Minor Minor Minor Chapter 4 Maintenance AS Transmit Elastic Problem at unstable Alarm Minor Store Slip Detected clock source Tx clock slip on port 3 Transmit Elastic Problem at unstable Alarm Minor Store Slip Detected clock source Tx clock slip on port 4 TXS5 Transmit Elastic Problem at unstable Alarm Minor Store Slip Detected clock source Tx clock slip on port 9 ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor report has been no action required switch off at specified port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message State Minor OFF Alarm report and no action required DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 5 X 50 module alarm message Channelized Router amp Non Channelized Router Module Table 4 6 lists the alarm messages generated by the Router module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and e
61. System Reboot Syntax BOOT S H Params S software reset H hardware reset Mercury boot s Software reseting Figure 3 10 Boot Command Screen CIk Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Define the system clock to be internal or received from the designated ports When set to INT the internal oscillator of Mercury Series Product will generate the clock as system clock and all the tributary cards will follow it Here you can also select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the indicated ports In case the port providing the Master clock fails the alternative port for Secondary clock will be activated as backup clock Only ports A and C for some specified modules can be locked onto external clock B Syntax a CLK INT port port B Param o None View current clock settings if no parameter a INT Internal clock a port The indicated ports to receive the external clock First port identifier is used for Master clock source the second one is used for Secondary clock source B Example o CLK e View current clock settings o CLKINT Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Select the Internal oscillator as the Internal timing reference of Mercury o CLK 3A 1C e Select the third slot portA 3A as the Master clock and first slot portC 1C as the Secondary clock Mercury gt clk Master 3A Secondary invalid Active holdover Mercury gt clk int M
62. UO m m NM 272 Example of PPP settings 1 ocococccccccconncocccconnconnncccnononononncnnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnanonons 217 EXaMple or PPP SCLINOS 2 ereire aer era 278 IP unnumbered configuration occooccccocccccncconococnnnoncnonnonannonnnonanonnnnnnnnnonaninanonos 279 Example of AUX port PPP setting 1 errar 280 Example of AUX port PPP setting 2 cooocccocccoccccccnccccccocnconnncncnonancnncnonanonons 281 RIP Setup Menu Handle Routing Protocol configuration 288 Descriptions the parameter of Static Routes ooccocconncocccocncnnconiconconconncnnnnnnnanononos 290 Most often used port NUMDEETS occoocccccccncconccocncocncocnconocononononononnnnnnnonnncnnncnnnconononos 294 miuus i a Bio mm 296 Descriptions of System paramMeters ccoocconncconconncocnconoconoconocononannonnnnnnonnncnnocanononos 308 Descriptions of AUX port parameters ooccoocccnnccooncocncocnconoconoconononnonnnnonononcnnnnnnnnnnos 309 Descriptions of WAN port parameters cooocccocconccocncoccconoconoconoconononconnnnnncnnononononos 311 Descriptions Of TSA parameters errar ener nnns 313 Descriptions of Routing Table parameters oocconnconcconnconiconiconocoonconnnonnnonnconononos 314 Descriptions of SNMP parameters oocccocccccccnnconcconncococonoconononnonnnonnnonnnnnncnnncnnnnnnos 315 Descriptions of Interface status of Monitoring menu
63. XV fp View the indicated port for fp function 165 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help xv Usage Syntax XV port View Connection Table fp Params port port identifier fp Mercury gt xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC xxxxxx 1A 001 XXXXXX XXXXXX 4A 026 4A 027 XXXXXX XXXXXX low latency o loopback x Mercury xv la ACTIVE ALM amp DAC TS000 xxxxxx 3A 001 low latency o loopback x Mercury xv 4a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 3A 015 low latency idle o loopback x Mercury gt xv fp low latency loopback x Figure 3 59 idle idle idle front panel 1A 002 XXXXXX 4A 028 XXXXXX frame integrity DACS ch loss 3A 002 frame integrity DACS ch loss XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX frame integrity Vogts Port 3A XXXXXX 4A 021 4A 029 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 3A 017 frame integrity DACS ch loss XXXXXX 4A 022 4A 030 XXXXXX Y Y bx XXXXXX 4A 023 XXXXXX XXXXXX RT S E XXXXXX 4A 024 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXE XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 3A 011 3A 012 3A 018 3A 019 3A 020 DACS ch loss Y Y E E s Ets XV Command Screen XXXXXX 4A 025 XXXXXX FP 000 voice conversion combined channel voice conversion combined channel XXXXXX XXXXXX 3A 013 XXXXXX voice conversion combined channel vo
64. an adjacent multicast router Internet Protocol The IP currently IP version 4 is the underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks IP Pool Internet Protocol Pool refers to the collective group of IP address locates in any particular place ISP Internet Service Provide connections into the Internet for home users and businesses There are local regional national and global ISPs You can think of local ISPs as the gatekeepers into Internet Jack Type Different type of jacks RJ 11 RJ 45 or RJ 48 can be used for an ISDN line The RJ 11 is the most common in the world and is most often used for analog phones modems and fax machines RJ 48 and RJ 45 are essentially the same as they both have the same 8 pin configuration An RJ 11 jack can fit into an RJ 45 RJ 48 connector however an RJ 45 RJ 48 cannot fit into an RJ 11 connector LAN Local Area Network is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN as its mane implies is limited to a local area This has to do more with the electrical characteristics 398 Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION of the medium than the fact that many early LANs LED Light Emitting Diode LED are visual indicators that relay information about the status of specific Scorpio 1401 02 functions to user by lighting up turning off or blinking LED slugs are usually found on
65. cable and connectors which connects to the remote user equipment o act O disable1 enable o S1 Identification S1 byte o byte one byte value between O and FF o EXC BIP 2 excessive bit error rate for threshold o DEG BIP 2 degrade bit error rate for threshold o ber O disable1 10e 3 2 10e 4 3 10e 5 4 10e 6 5 10e 7 6 10e 8 7 10e 9 o RTIM Set Report RS TIM Insert MS AIS for alarm o HTIM Set Report HP TIM Insert TU AIS for alarm o tim O Disable Disable 1 Report Disable 2 Report Insert o EJO Expected JO o JO Transmit JO o EJ1 Expected J1 o J1 Transmit JO o str A input string and length less 15 character 176 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Note e 1 EXC can set ber 0 3 only e 2 DEG can set ber 0 3 7 only B Example o sdhL1 ejO mercury3630 o sdh L1 ej1 Mercury3630 Ol sdh L1 tjO MercurY 3630 Ol sdh L1 tjf mercurY 3630 Hercury gt sdh L1 ej mercury3636 Hercury gt sdh L1 ej1 Hercury3638 Hercury gt sdh L1 tjB HercurY3638 Hercury sdh L1 ejB mercur 3638 TYPE STH 1 CLK YES RCTIUE RLH DRE R Layer Performance Honitor Elapsed 0000 34 37 15 min 40058 BBBHE BBBHE 4000464111 40 80 58 1 0E 06 6 4E 06 B BE BH 4277 HAHAA HAGA 4016647614 06 34 37 1 8E 8B B BE BBHB 6 BE BH 4277 BBBHEB BBBHE 4016647614 HB 354 37 1 DE 06 B BE BB 6 BE BH Alarm HAJ RS LOS HIH Configuration LL no RL no S1 00 HEX ExCodisable DEG disable RS TIH HS RIS Report Insert HP TIH
66. connector is necessary By using X 50 multiplexing it supports low speed data rate for data service so that 5 ports use for one 64 K time slot e X50 MUX 5C For Each port 5 port Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync only e X50 MUX 4C For each port 4 port Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync mode for each port Async mode only use in 1 2 port e X50 DACS 2C For each port 2 port can be set to different time slot Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync Async mode o Electrical Characteristic e Data Transmission Interface Physical V 24 V 28 5 ports DCE external Null modem is necessary when actin DTE mode e Electrical specification X 50 Division 3 multiplexing 39 Chapter 1 Overview e Sync mode Bit stream transparent e DIE speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 only the first two ports support 19200 e RS232 interface IN TD RTS DTR OUT RD CTS TC RC DCD DSR Network DTE Function Mode Mode Force off mark when not in sync Data out Data input CTS Follow RTS state Force on ON when network OK Connect to DTR input pin On when Synchronization established RTS DCD signaling Force on Clock of Transmission rate Data terminal ready Table 1 21 RS232 Network mode e Maintenance Access Interfaces FAS error count e Test Access interfaces Loop on Network side LL Loop on tributary side RL Interface signaling Selectable to send the RTS to remote DCD Performance Requ
67. device on the network otatic Routing otatic routers tell the Scorpio routing information that it cannot learn 400 Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION automatically through other means The need for Static Routing can arise in cases their RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node VC base multiplexing Each ATM VC carries PDU s of exactly one protocol type When multiple protocols need to be transported there is a separate VC for each protocol WAN Wide Area Networks link geographically dispersed offices in other cities or around the globe Just about any long distance communication medium can serve as a WAN link including switched and permanent telephone circuits terrestrial radio systems and satellite system Table E 1 Glossary
68. enable sig value between O and 15 ABCD bit 0 0 rrl 0 remote loopback stop 1 remote loopback start 0 0 Notes RRL is used to notify remote device to start stop remote loopback operation Mercury gt t1 2b co 0 fr 0 11 2 Mercury gt stat 2b TYPE 2T1 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration LL no RL yes RRL CODE b8zs FRAME esf LINE 133 ft DRL on AIS off SIDLE 09h DET 00h CHG 00h Figure 3 46 T1 Command Screen 146 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 44 Thre Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setup PM Performance Monitoring alarm threshold e Default value is O to disable the PM alarm threshold reporting o 15 min UA ES SES CV threshold 1 900 sec O disable a 1 hour UA ES SES CV threshold 1 3600 sec O disable a 1 day UA ES SES CV threshold 1 86400 sec O disable o All CV threshold 1 2E 9 bit O disable B Syntax o THRE type UA ua ES es SES ses CV cv BH Param o None Display current PM threshold if no parameter o Type Choose which of the PM type you want to change its threshold There are 3 periods of types 0 15min 1 1hour 2 1day o UA Unavailable seconds is any second in which a failed signal exists A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive Severely Error Seconds SES occur and is cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES o ua Current 15min 1hour 1day UA threshold
69. for Mercury 3630 3630E 34 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 36 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 36 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 36 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 36 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E 37 ROL NEWOK MODOS cacaos SAS essa 40 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 42 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 43 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 43 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 43 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E 43 IDSL Port time slot assignment occcoccccccnccccnccocnconnncncnononononnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnss 46 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Lseseuesse 4T Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 800 eeeeeeeeess 4T Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3820 eeseeseesse 4T Compatible hardware and softwa
70. fr CAS cas CRC act AlS act EXC ber DEG ber TIM tim EJ2 str TJ2 str SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig 171 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Param O O Port Setup the assigned port FrConfigure the indicated E1 port to FAS Frame Alignment Signal or Unframed mode When in FAS mode it allows to select which of the available time slots can be used for data transmission When in Unframed mode E1 data uses the 2 048 Mbps bit rate E1 signal with no synchronization signal and needs to assign 32 time slots fr O fas default 1 unframe CAS Select CAS Channel Associated Signaling or CCS Common Channel Signaling under the FAS framing mode In both CAS and CCS mode time slot O is always indicated to a fixed synchronization pattern and frame alignment word But in CAS mode time slot 16 is usually indicated to channel signaling So in CAS mode time slot O and 16 are not used for data transmission totally 30 time slots In CCS mode only time slot O can not used totally 31 time slots cas O ccs default 1 cas CRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check act 0 Off 1 On AIS A Alarm Indication Signal AIS If the signal is cut off between two terminals loss of port signal or there is a local loss of synchronization to remote port signal red alarm condition this AIS is sent to inform the next terminal that data is not valid The AIS signal is always an all ones unframed signal This function is always used for who
71. frame over El transmission Facilities The Mercury system allows the transport of a T1 frame across E1 transmission facilities This function can be performed as shown in Figure 1 3 In the transport application it is necessary to transfer the T1 trunk data including the F bit transparently without any conversion from end to end therefore the T1 11 Chapter 1 Overview frames must be processed in accordance with ITU T Rec 6 802 1 2 3 Channel Relocation Digital Access and Cross Connect Application Channel Relocation amp Digital Cross Connect Application Mercury Series cr Figure 1 4 Channel relocation and Digital Cross Connect Application In Channel relocation and digital access cross connect system for both voice and data applications the channels of a T1 and or E1 trunk are moved from one time slot to another in accordance with user s programming These capabilities are available in addition to the other capabilities described in the previous sections The channel relocation and digital cross connect services can be performed between dissimilar trunks e g between E1 and T1 trunks or between similar links e g between two E1 trunks or between two T1 trunks The Mercury system will also perform when required the conversion of the signaling formats i e will convert robbed bit signaling to CEPT channel associated signaling and will move the channel signaling information to the appropriate location i
72. function of IP filter NAT Setting We can classify IP addresses in two kinds local private and global public Local IP addresses cannot be used on the Internet and are mostly used on Local Area Networks LANs Public addresses are valid on the Internet and must be properly registered so information can be sent to them Configuration of NAT can be found under the Configuration Menu NAT Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 0 0 0 0 Netmask 0 0 0 0 Porxy Port List Protocol PORT IP Protocol PORT IP TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 Static Network Address Translation static NAT Public IP lt gt Private IP Public IP lt gt Private IP 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 39 The sub menu of NAT configuration menu 291 Chapter 5 Router Configuration NAT described in RFC 3022 allows local IP addresses on the LAN to be conver
73. in Timeout in seconds to wait for each reply Seconds Table 5 28 Descriptions of Ping parameters of Information menu Ping measures the round trip time to the destination Round trip time is useful for understanding bandwidth and load conditions on the network If the network has slower links or heavier traffic load the round trip time will be longer Heavy network loads can result in ping failures Information of Ch r module This menu shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware and can get the real time firmware code version in ROM or FLASH memory If the FLASH code version shows this means the code is invalid This usually occurs when user runs the Firmware Update function but does not complete it You must contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for help to resolve this condition 326 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Information Board Information ROM code version FLASH code version ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 78 The sub menu of Information menu 327 Appendix A Introduction Appendix A Introduction A 1 Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 Craft port Interface RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter with Null modem inside Mercury 800 3630 3820 3630 s Craft port uses the RJ 45 connector and pin descriptions for the RJ 45 to DB 9 are as shown
74. link to multiplexer 21 E1 or 4 10 100 ethereal ports It comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack 2 Chapter 1 Overview Zi M3600 hi Processor Radio tower M3600 M3600 a a M3630 SDH L 3a Fiber optic transmitter pp Public switch M a E ni M800 Telephon Telephone IBM PS 2 Figure 1 1 System Architecture of Mercury series B Command line setup mode Its user friendly operation mode in special command line Any emulated terminal software such as VT100 ANSI can be used to configure it B Craft port For Mercury 800 3600 3630 3630E and 3820 the supervised port can also be defined to PPP port by pressing front panel button It is designed in DTE mode with a RJ 45 connector The RJ 45 to DB9 adapter with null modem crossed inside is required for craft port setting The speeds support 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps asynchronous with data format 8 N 1 and non flow control For Mercury 3600 the craft port can work in DCE mode using DBO9 type connector and support asynchronous speeds at 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps data format 8 N 1 and none flow control It can be directly connected to PC COM port without Null modem B IFIP firmware upgrading Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E
75. make up the host part A one 1 in a mask bit location means the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network value a zero 0 means the corresponding bit is part of the host value Default The Default Gateway IP address also 32 bits written in dotted Gateway decimal notation When Channelize Router Module receives a packet for an unknown destination it forwards that packet to the default gateway as long as has been defined SNMP Simple Network management protocol Enable or Disable Agent SNMP V1 agent Support ISO standard MIB Il Enable or Disable the TELNET management of the Module Front Panel Enable or Disable user change the setting from LCD display In some Device Platform not supply Front Panel function like Mercury 3600 etc Console Type your password The password can be up to eight Telnet Type your TELNET username The username can be up to Telnet Type your TELNET password The password can be up to eight Table 5 17 Descriptions of System parameters 308 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 9 1 3 2 AUX port Setup The built in Ch Router for Mercury 3600 3820 and 3630 are supports AUX port The AUX port works by PPP encapsulation User may press the front panel button Craft PPP to switch between these two modes Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 System AUX Port Interface AUX Port Configuration AUX Port Parameters AUX Port AUX Speed AUX Local IP Address AU
76. master s slaver last last port identifier next next port identifier ts clock transmission timeslot O disable or T1 1 24 E1 1 31 FIBER 0 127 Notes 1 view current setup if no parameter 2 for T1 E1 and FIBER card only Mercury rp 1 m 3a 4a MODE master CLOCK MODE manual LAST PORT 3A NEXT PORT 4A CLOCK TIMESLOT 31 RING PROTECT on Figure 3 38 RP Command Screen 3 6 36 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Caution There are some limitations associated with Ring Protection Ring Protection requires the equipment to operate under frame mode We suggest the user choose one time slot to carry the clock source This will guide all of the ring nodes to follow the same clock source coming from the Master node This function robs one time slot from the system E1 therefore has only 30 time slots available on CCS mode and 29 time slots available on CAS mode while T1 has 23 time slots available So far the Ring Protection system is limited to only one ring in the entire network and only ports A and C on the Mercury in Salve Mode can be the Ring nodes RS530 Command B Accommodate Mercury 3600 B Purpose O Define RS530 port parameters The DTE transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the sts starting time slot and ets end time slot For 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps it may start from time slot 1 to time slot 8 So the parameter sts is 1 and ets is 8 The valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 B S
77. mod O sync default 1 async 2 async8 3 async9 o SPD Channel speed for the indicated channel o spd O stop default 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 o DCD Channel DCD signal o dcd 0 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS default 3 off 156 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Channel CTS signal O force on 1 local RTS default Select this channel to be DCE or DTE type O DTE default 1 DCE TxC and RxC clock polarity 0 normal default 1 inverted oignaling action 0 0 default 1 1 2 RTS state Local loopback Remote loopback 0 disable default 1 enable Hook channel hcO no hook default 1 2 channel o CTS Oo cts o DEV a dev o INV o inv o SIG a sig a LL o RL Oo act o HC O o PH o ph Example O O Phase number 0 4 default O X50 1A 1 MOD 0 SPD 3 X50 1A 2 MOD 0 SPD 4 e Setup X50 5C card that located on slot 1A channel 1 to Sync mode with speed 9600bps and channel 2 to Sync mode with speed 19200bps for this example X50 5C only supports Sync mode and when channel 2 is set to 19200bps then channel 4 cannot be used and must be disabled 157 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury help x50 Usage Setup X 50 MUX parameters Syntax X50 port chan MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts DEV dev INV inv SIG sig LL act RL act HC hc PH ph Params port port identifier chan channel number MOD channel mode SPD channel speed DCD channe
78. of about 100 meters per segment Based on the IEEE 802 3u standard 100BaseT is the Fast Ethernet specification of 100 Mbps base band that uses UTP wiring 100BaseT sends link pulse over the network when no traffic is present 100 Base T The address mask for an IP address is used to identify the boundary Address Mask between the network portion of the address and host portion Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line An evolving high speed transmission technology originally developed by Bell core and mow standardized by ANSI as T1 413 Uses existing UTP copper wires from Telephone Company s central office to subscriber s premises ADSL Involves electronic equipment in the form of ADSL modems at central office and subscriber s premises Sends digital signal up and down these copper wires and sends more information one way than the other hence the term asymmetric Address Resolution Protocol is a method to find a host s physical address from its IP address An ARP request is sent to the network naming the IP address then machine with that IP address returns its physical address so it can receive the transmission ARP Asynchronous Transfer Mode International standard for cell relay in which multiple service types such as voice video or data are conveyed in fixed length 53 byte cells Fixed length cells allow cell processing to occur in hardware thereby reducing transit delays ATM 395 Append
79. oi A 228 AIL PSY NOUO 2 05 0052805525422995805909920 6000999002965 9 929395 800 000 0000 0009 58 95 090885009200 0 20 iiaManiraBad PIENE 231 41 12 4 POTS EXO Voice Module oscars ou daN da 233 41 13 4 POTS FXS Voice MOU pi cccsz2icescssesnexsandestandienededssdocdicieesndnanidastanddecosedesdoedaabensadauatdactaadicaeees 235 AM TA SS IS OQUE c T c 236 TLD SDE RS OU RR RR SRD ED DR CRU UR PR RD RR te 238 4 2 PERFORMANCE MONITORING DIAGNOSTICS ccccccccccccecccceeecccecccececccececececcceeeceeeeeeeeeees 240 4 3 DIAGNOSTIC WITH LOOP TEST FUNCTION cesta tci 241 LAN DOWCI A NO 24 SN Loopback o A E ns autarca T me 241 4 4 VERIFYING THE MERCURY OPERATION cccccccccecceccecceceececcceeeccccececccccececececcceeeceeeeeeeeeees 244 Mercury Series User s Manual AA Quick Vere y he EQUIP resinas 244 zm SEN ANA II 245 20 5 Uso BERT A COU SCE sas aa cora E SA DS IUE DO 245 CHAPTER 5 ROUTER CONFIGURATION eee e eee ee eere eene e eee ee eeeeeee ZA 5 1 SPECIICA TON tn 247 ILL SOVA E n 247 Dl ARO E RR 249 3 2 REATURE OF ROUTER MODULE aparatito 251 5 3 APPLICATION OF ROUTER MODULE tania 253 S5 M I m 253 SI ERI 254 5 4 CONFIGURE ROUTER MODULE FROM A PC casas 256 54 1 Access via OUT Idtm 256 EZ Acess via Le met ModE sastre lali iric eee 237 5 5 NAVIGATING THE TCS INTERFACE ani 259 5 6 CONFIGURATION OF ROUTER MODULE N R
80. on 2 sec off 1 17 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off 2 22 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 3 22 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off 4 25 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off default 5 25 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off 6 30 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 7 30 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off Tgain Tx direction relative gain tgain O OdBr default 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 AdBr 5 5dBr Rgain Rx direction relative gain rgain O OdBr default 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 AdBr o odBr 6 6dBr TSA TSA loopback reserved for factory testing TONE 1KHz tone injection act 0 off default 1 on 115 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Note Param TSA and TONE are only for 4 POTS FXS card And Param R and TTX are only for 4 FXS 4 FXS D card 4 POTS FXS card support selection 2 amp 3 for Param RING only and 4 FXS 4 FXS D card support all selections from O to B Example o FXS la law 0 r 1 start 0 ring 4 tbc2 tgain 0 rgain 2 e Setup 1A FXS card to 900 Ohm line impedance 25 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 16KHx ttx on Tx direction gain to OdBr and Rx direction gain to 2dBr Mercury gt help fxs Usage Setup FXS Parameters Syntax FXS port R r DL dl TTX ttx RING ring Tgain tgain Rgain rgain Params port port identifier RING ring frequency amp cadency R impedance Tgain Tx direction relative gain DL digital loopback Rgain Rx direction relative gain teltex tone r 0 600 ohm 1 900 ohm disable 1 enable ttx off 1 12KHz ttx
81. ooccccccccocncccnccocnoconoconnncanonanocnnnocannnnnnonanonos 298 Descriptions of DHCP parameters coocccoccccncccncocnconnconoconoconoconoconnonnnonnonnncncncnnnnnnos 298 The sub menu of SNMP settings ereta aee 300 TFTP Server settings tasses neas elecciones 301 Mercury Series User s Manual Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 Figure A 8 Figure A 9 Figure A 10 Firmware aUe clio E TO OO OTT OON 302 TFTP Server settings esses nennen nnne nnne neni nnns nn nns sn nn as 302 Restan ROULET eredi E 303 Main menu tree of Ch R module errar aerea 304 Access username and password ese nennen nennen nnns 305 The main menu tree in Ch r MONul occccccccccnccccncocnconnnccnnnnonnnnonnnonnnnnnnnonnnnncnnos 306 The sub menu tree of Configuration menu occcoccccccnccccccncncocnnonnnnonnnonnnoncncnnninnnonos 307 System configuration acaso iran latencia 307 AUX port Configuration RR ostia cias 309 WAN Interface Configuration
82. over 1 day threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold SPIKE Detected fail on reading amp writing with PEB 3265 chipset over two times system still working after initialization FRAME Frame Interrupt Have the clock source Alarm 225 Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Re boot system Check any unsettled voltage on the phone line Chapter 4 Maintenance Type Class lt Major lt Major lt U Ay U AY v U lt lt Major Major Major lt Major Alarm Minor Minor Chapter 4 Maintenance INT Detected frame and link checked interrupt during operation 3265 3265 Retry Access Re boot system Alarm Minor RETRY 3265 chipset timeout re try effort is taken ALM Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor OFF report has been no action required switch off at port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message State Minor OFF Alarm report and no action required DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 8 FXS voice module alarm message 4 1 9 SDSL Module Table 4 9 lists the alarm messages generated by the SDSL module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Corrective Act
83. path through the DXC data pump This loopback is used for constructing the loop to verify if the modules are currently working in the Mercury ro Pei xod Interface Unit DCX Equipment Figure 4 3 Payload Loop back This loopback test is activated by the XC command B Syntax XC port a port a Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 4 4 4 1 Verifying the Mercury Operation To trouble shoot the system more easily user needs to know the exact configuration of the network Standard network troubleshooting procedures involving sectionalizing the network and performing loopback tests on each section of the network should be followed This helps the user to determine whether the Mercury is defective The procedures outlined here will depend on the test equipment and other equipment the user may have on hand The list of these procedures starts from the simple to more complicated procedures Once all the procedures have been done we may conclude that the Mercury equipment is at fault To check if the Mercury is defective or not specialized equipment such as a BERT bit error rate test set is needed Quick Verify the Equipment Check if the text displayed on LCD of the Mercury shows up normally If not then the Mercury has failed Secondly remove all the line connections to Mercury Disconnect the power and re apply the power a few seconds later Observe the power up self test sequence If this fails then Mercury is defective Che
84. port change to Craft mode Press Alarm Cut Off button press to clear the alarm RST Press Reset the hardware by pressing this button Table 2 5 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3820 Note The LED PWR 1 2 will light on while the power module is plugged into the rear panel power supply socket 1 2 with the power turned on The LED 48V lights on when power supply socket 3 on the rear panel is connected to the external 48VDC power source The 48VDC is for voice application and generates the ring tone if there is any voice card plugged into Mercury B ALM o The ALARM relay contact is to extend the major and minor alarm of Mercury 3820 to the office audible and visual alarm system Refer to Appendix A for its pin assignment 65 Chapter 2 Installation B LAN a The front panel LAN connector with RJ 45 type is for Mercury 3820 s built in router module The10BaseT Ethernet port follows IEEE 802 3 protocol and supports SNMP protocol B PPP CRAFT o The Front panel PPP Craft button can be selected to switch the PPP Craft port on the front panel to serve as a normal Craft port or an Auxiliary PPP port Auxiliary PPP serial interface operates in standard RS 232 V 24 DTE mode and there should be a RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB25M adapter when you unpack it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format It can be connected to the remote site Router and build up a WAN with PPP protocol This f
85. save a specified profile name with the different commands with regard to different applications By using LOGB and LOGE commands supervisor can create their own profiles easily When performing command LOGB system will start memorizing and saving the subsequently entered commands into the memory stop and save into the specified profile number and profile name after command LOGE It also allows supervisor to arrange any of the profiles as the initial profiles by commands LOGI when powering on or rebooting the system Mercury will load the selected profiles and execute all commands following the power on sequence Refer to Section 3 6 20 3 6 21 3 6 22 for more detailed description and examples Supervisor may also create a text file such as Windows Notepad to edit all commands in it Optimize your commands copy all commands in this text file and paste them when operating in craft terminal 82 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Craft port speed 4 19200 Clock settings of alarm and DAC digital access cross connect Idle signal code Setup and Confirm the PW VET NN NE For Mercury 3820 TAINET 3820 For Mercury 3630 3630E TAINET 3630 3630E Thre type UA ua Setup PM threshold UA ES SES and CA all ES es SES ses CV cv Including UA ES SES CV 0 disable Table 3 2 System Command of Mercury V 35 Card V35 port CTS act V 35 card Clear to Send Signal act 1 signal active V35 port V 35 card Data S
86. scheme Class C networks have only 24 bits for defining networks and 8 bits for defining hosts on each network CLI Command Line Interface Allow you to configure TAINET s products with maximum flexibility CO Central Office A CO is a facility that serves local telephone subscribers In the CO subscriber s lines are joined to switching equipment that allows them to connect to each other for both local and long distance calls CPE Customer Premise Equipment is privately owned telecommunication equipment at an organization s site that is attached to the telecommunication network CPE equipment includes routers modem PBX telephones and video communication equipment Crossover A cable that wires a pin to its opposite pin for example RX is wired 396 Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD Ethernet Cable EXPLANATION to TX This cable connects two similar device for example two data terminal equipment DTE or data communication equipment DCE devices DCE Data Communication Equipment is typically a modem or other type of communication device The DCE sits between the DET data terminal equipment and a transmission circuit such as a phone line DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP address to clients when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on the central computers that run the DHCP server program DNS Domain Name System A databas
87. such to change any of the modules for Mercury 800 and 3600 please remove the power adapter first loosen the screws on the rear panel and remove the old module before finally plugging in the new interface Make sure each plug in module is seated firmly then tighten the lock in screw Finally connect the power adapter to power on the system Mercury 3820 3600 3630 3630E supports hot swappable function Therefore plugging or unplugging the modules without turning off the power is permitted Figure 2 10 Installing New cards for Mercury 800 Caution Tum off the power then remove the top cover before changing or installing any module on the Mercury 800 base unit For Mercury 3600 be sure to turn off the power before replacing any module otherwise the device mav be damaaed 272 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring This Chapter describes in detail the installation and operation instructions for how to configure Mercury Series Product by means of VT 100 terminal and IP host using the Telnet connection after initial configuration of LAN IP setting is done via the emulated terminal program at the beginning B Use the terminal emulation software to perform all the operations of Mercury Series product B Use the Telnet protocol to connect to the IP hosts of Mercury Series products this offers the same functionality as the supervised craft port 3 1 Hardware Requirements 3 1 1 O
88. support upgrading Flash firmware via TFTP server and the upgrading procedures can be performed more easily flexibly with time saving during the upgrade 3 Chapter 1 Overview B Support NMS agent Support for SNMP protocol or graphic interface management system B Non channelized channelized router Built in Non channelized for Mercury 800 channelized 16 channels 32 timeslots total for Mercury 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E router as an SNMP agent with 10BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 connector B Real time clock generator and Y2K compliant Date and time can be set by command line B Security protection Prevent unauthorized access into this device the login ID and PW are necessary for operator to enter into the access mode for advanced system operation Otherwise an operator can only monitor system status B Twenty user profiles Operators can create their personal profiles or loaded a default power up profile when system is being initialized The total capacity of those 20 profiles syntax is 2K B System clock source oystem clock source can be defined to be Internal or received from the designated ports User can select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the designated ports If the Master clock is lost the internal PLL will activate then auto switch to the Secondary clock System also supports Holdover if both the Master and Secondary clocks are lost B Performance monitor Errors Seconds ES Severely
89. the Auxiliary PPP link Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select ESC previous menu left right TAB next item Traffic Types IP Routing LAN IP Address 172 16 14 254 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 WAN Protocol PPP AUX Port Speed Enable Sync External AUX Local IP Address 100 0 0 1 AUX IP NetMask 255 255 255 0 AUX Remote IP Address 100 0 0 2 SNMP Disable DHCP Daemon Disable Figure 5 25 PPP configure for AUX interface Auxiliary serial interface operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DTE You should find the RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to RS 232M adapter when you unpack it 279 Chapter 5 Router Configuration supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format Asynchronous selectable data rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control Synchronous data transmission supports up to 128 Kbps Caution Upon pressing the front panel PPP Craft button to change to normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode please remember to enable the setting by removing and re connecting the power adapter to reset the system All settings for Mercury 800 and 3820 mav be lost if thev are not stored into profile in advance Ethernet Ethernet
90. type A power adapter and or a power cord A RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter with null modem crossed inside and a 24 AWG RJ 45 cable for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E craft port operation for Mercury 3600 a DB 9 adapter cable is included A RJ 45 to DB25 adapter is for Mercury 800 3600 3820 and 3630 3630E PPP port operations Optional modules and cables 56 2 2 Chapter 2 Installation Site Selection The AC power for the power adapter of Mercury Series Product must be installed into an easily accessible grounded AC outlet with a range of 100 to 240 VAC as described in National Electrical Code NEC handbook The Mercury Series Product must be grounded during operation at all times and must remain grounded whenever connected to power In addition Mercury Series Product provides grounding screw located on the rear panel of the product Caution It s strongly recommended that you should connect the PG Protective Ground screw on your AC Power to the earth ground system of your building Locate the Mercury Series Product no further than 50 feet 15 24 meters from your data terminal equipment and within 6 feet 1 83 meters of a grounded AC outlet furnishing the required power Install the Mercury in a clean area that is free from extreme environmental changes Keep enough space in the front and rear for operator access and cable clearance A Caution To avoid overheating the Mercury Series Product do not place anyt
91. user of a craft terminal For Mercury 3600 one of the Channelize or Non channelize Router modules is requiring to provide this function 9 Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 General Application This section presents typical Mercury applications and explains special application considerations 1 2 1 T1 E1 Converter The Mercury systems can be used as programmable T1 E1 converters A typical system configuration is shown in Figure 1 2 To perform the required conversion the Mercury system must include both T1 module and E1 modules and the time slots must be routed as required between a T1 port and an E1 port T1 to E1 Converter Mercury Series T1 Equipment Figure 1 2 T1 E1 converters The user in accordance with the specific requirements of each system can select the conversion services below B Transparent full duplex transfer of data from all the T1 time slots to the corresponding E1 time slots and vice versa and the addition of the appropriate frame synchronization and housekeeping signals as specified by the applicable standards The user can define the channels time slots to be transferred from trunk to trunk to instruct the Mercury system to transfer transparently the information carried in these time slots they are defined as data time slots The Mercury system inserts a user selectable idle code in empty time slots 10 1 2 2 Chapter 1 Overview B When the equipment that generates the T1 or E1 line signal is
92. value is 86400 24 hrs Gateway Those fields specify an IP default gateway DNS server DNS Server and WINS server to Windows 95 98 Windows NT and WINS Server other systems that support the DHCP client The default value for Gateway is the LAN IP address of this device IP address pool for Setup the dynamic IP scope in this field IP will be Dynamic Leases assigned to client machines in this range IP Ethernet Address Assign the fixed IP to special clients or other server Mapping for Fixed machines e g servers for mail FTP telnet web etc that Leases you may have to their known Ethernet address Table 5 16 Descriptions of DHCP parameters 5 6 8 5 6 8 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Note There aren t any configurations about Network Mask for clients because Router Module will use the Network Mask value from configuration item of the LAN encapsulation The fix IP address should not be include inside the IP address pool range of dynamic leases else there will be an IP conflict in your network B The Default Lease Time suggestion If you have some hosts move in and move out frequently a short lease time is preferred If hosts in your network are stable a long lease time can also reduce the packet exchange between server amp clients SNMP Your Router Module supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent functionality which allows a manager station to monitor the Router Module throug
93. with AIS only available for LL command the internal system will send a AIS all ones signal to the line when active Oo ACT Provide the functionality to enable disable the alarm or DAC service and this command is only invalid for A u law conversion card o act O enable alarm and DAC default 1 disable alarm 2 disable alarm and DAC out of service B Example a LINK 1b act2 e Disable the alarm and DAC function and move into out of service mode of port 1B o LINK 3a ll 1 o Enable the local loopback for port 3A Mercury gt help link Usage Setup Link Parameters Syntax LINK port LL sw RL sw ACT act Params port port identifier LL local loopback RL remote loopback ACT setup alarm amp DAC switch sw O disable 1 enable 2 enable with AIS act O alarm DAC on 1 alarm off 2 alarm DAC on Notes 1 sw 2 only valid for LL 2 ACT option is only invalid for A u conversion card Mercury link 1b act 2 Mercury stat 1b TYPE 4IDSL CLK NO ACTIVE NONE Mercury gt link 3a 11 1 Mercury gt stat 3a TYPE 1E1 75 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration LL yes RL no RCRC yes TCRC yes SIGNAL CCS FRAME FAS CV CV HAUL short Figure 3 25 LINK Command Screen 3 6 22 Logb Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose 120 3 6 23 3 6 24 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring a When performing this command system will start to memorize and save the follow
94. xc 3a 4a Mercury xv 3a ALM amp DAC Port 3A 4A 000 4A 001 4A 002 4A 003 4A 004 4A 005 4A 006 4A 007 4A 008 4A 009 4A 010 4A 011 4A 012 4A 013 4A 014 4A 015 4A 016 4A 017 4A 018 4A 019 4A 020 4A 021 4A 022 4A 023 4A 024 4A 025 4A 026 4A 027 4A 028 4A 029 4A 030 4A 031 low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Mercury gt xc i 3a 4a Figure 3 54 XC Command Screen 159 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring m Example For 3630 3630E only o XC 1af1 Port 1A cross connect to Framer 1 o XV la View port 1A time slot assignment table o XCifaff Clear the cross connection between port 1A and Framer 1 O Hercury xc da F1 Hercury xu da ACTIVE ALH amp DAC Port BA 15808 FH1 BBB F01 001 FH1 HB2 FH1 B8H3 FH1 HBh FH1 BB5 FH1 HB6 F01 007 15808 FH1 BBB FH1 HB9 FH1 H1B FH1 H11 FH1 H12 FH1 H13 FH1 H1h FH1 H15 15816 FH1 H16 FH1 H17 FH1 H18 F01 019 FH1 H2B8 FH1 B21 FH1 H22 FH1 B23 15824 FH1 H2 FH1 H25 FH1 H26 FH1 H 7 FH1 H28 F01 029 FH1 H3B FH1 B31 lou latency z i frame integrity unice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Harked timeslot is unidirection Hercury gt xc i 1a f1 Figure 3 55 XC Command Screen For 3630 3630E 3 6 51 XSLT Command Accommodate Mercury 3600 B Purpose o Enable the extension slot 5 for Mercury 3600 When enabling this command channel 5A will occupy the whole
95. 0 data terminal and all those 5 channels will occupy 1 time slot 64 Kbps According to the definition of ITU T standards X 50 division 3 it allows 8 bit envelope to be a phase frame for the 12 8 Kbps channels to repeat every 5 8 bit envelope in a 64 Kbps data rate Due to some of the bits are used for phase frame information and signaling resident in these 12 8 Kbps channels these bearer channel rates are for 2400 to 9600 bps only However if the data rate is selected to be19200 bps this will 155 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring occupy 2 phases and only channels 1 amp 2 can be set to speed of 19200 If channel 1 is selected to run at 19200 bps channel 3 must be disabled If channel 2 is selected then channel 4 must be disabled o MUX 5C 5 channels and supports Sync mode only o MUX 4C 4 channels Sync mode for all channels and Async mode only support channel 1 amp 2 o DAC 2C 2 channels and both support Sync and Async mode Only this card supports TS PH DACS functions Figure 3 52 X 50 Concept diagram BH Syntax o X50 port chan MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts DEV dev INV inv SIG sig LL act RL act HC hc PH ph B Param a port port identifier for the indicated X 50 port o chan the selected channel for the indicated port o MOD the channel format for the selected channel Synchronous and Asynchronous are both supported For Async mode data bits can be selected to 7 8 or 9 bits o
96. 0 00006 DB25 M gt FIBER B 00008 40025 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP FIBER 1 00008 40026 SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER FIBER 2 00008 40027 DAULPORTFIBER XCODE 00008 40028 MERCURYXCODE 2P SHDSL 00008 40051 DAULPORTGSHDSL T1 2CB 00008 40029 MERCURY 2T1 FOR PTT BOARD 1000 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 4P V24 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 BOARD 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem 4 POTS FX 00008 40033 MERCURY 4P FXO O CARD 2P DATA 00008 40034 MERCURY 2P DATA CARD TTT T 375 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option Annex Option Product Part Number Description Code Equipment Equipment CABE 33010 00006 DB25 M mmo Emm 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 M 33010 00023 opi gt DB15 33010 00004 ZI gt DB37 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE SYNC EB ond PR al 4 FXS D 00010 20005 MERCURY 3820 dl mo RN DO sois PHONEBOXRUM ROUTER 0007 70002 ROUTER MODULE 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY J BP8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F DO 50150000 rias PHONE BOX ROUTER C 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F Power 00059 DC POWER 00001 PO
97. 00 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Mercury Series Product supports 4 port IDSL card which always works in LT mode and connects to remote TAINET IDSL product such as Jupiter 2560 or DT 128 in NT mode With 2 wire lines connection and 117 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 2B1Q modulation technology it can extend the operation distance up to 7 8Km under 24 AWG 0 5mm and provides up to 128 Kbps data transmission rate The 4 port IDSL card also provides the AL DL and RDL loopback testing for diagnostic When the loopback testing activates the front panel LED indicator will keep blinking IDSL port time slot assignment table is as follows mesa p B p os Bi B2 Reserve D 07 5 Table 3 13 IDSL port time slot assignment table B Syntax o IDSL port OP op RDL rdl B Param o port Port identifier o OP Setup the operation mode such as a op O link default 1 al 2 ssp 3 dt 4 dl 5 quiet o link Connect to the remote NTU o al Enable the analog loopback testing o Quiet Disconnect the line and make modem quiet o dl Enable the digital loopback testing o ssp dt Reserved for factory used o RDL Request remote NTU to enable the digital loopback the link should be connected when performing the RDL testing o rdl O normal 1 2B D 2 B1 3 B2 B Example O O O IDSL 1a op 0 e Setup IDSL port 1A to link mode IDSL 1b op 1 Activate the AL loopback on IDSL port 1B 118 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury g
98. 00013 DB25 M V 35 M cable 33010 00023 DB25 M DB15 F 20cm 26AW FOR X 21 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F FOR dioe 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem 4P V24 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 BOARD 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem abd 00008 40033 MERCURY 4P FXO CARD 2P DATA 00008 40034 MERCURY 2P DATA CARD 33010 00002 DB25 M 2V 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M V 35 M cable 33010 00023 DB25 M DB15 F 20cm 26AW FOR X 21 369 Appendix B Ordering Information Product Mai i A roduc Bat Number Description ain Option AMA ENO Code Equipment Equipment AAA Ps wu 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem R530 3A 00006 50226 INx64K N 1 31 to 2 Mbps 33010 00003 DB25 M gt DB15 F cable pr 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null T ww V35 3A 00006 50227 Nx64K N 1 31 to 2 it id IO IRA 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V 35 M cable V36 3A 00006 50228 Nx64K N 1 31 to 2 i NI 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem X21 3A 00006 50229 Nx64K N 1 31 to 2 A oo LL 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F PO ii IO O d 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem ROUTER 00007 70002 ROUTERMODULE 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P 370
99. 1 128 time slots capacity Fiber 1 Signal port fiber card totally 128 time slots Fiber 2 Dual ports fiber card totally 256 time slots 128 ts port Fiber b 1 1 fiber for backup totally 128 time slots B Structure LA Router W E In Fiber 1 mA TM M z Rotuer Mercury 800 xs E E1 Fiber 2 IP Network Phone Fiber Link mA gt Router E Fiber 1 LO EE I Equipment Mercury 800 Equipment Figure 3 71 Fiber 2 Application Diagram 185 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring IP Network Rotuer Working E1 Fiber B NFiber B vA FXO Fiber Link E y lt x sae me 1 N SDSL Mercury 3600 d j U UJ X Protection Equipment Equipment Figure 3 72 Fiber B Application Diagram B Configurations o There is no necessary to setup the parameters of fiber module Just cross connect the dedicated port to fiber module by using XT or XC command 3 7 3 Built in Ch router for Mercury 3820 B Description a Build up the IP network from the built in Ch router of Mercury 3820 at CO site to the router of Mercury 3600 at CPE site and to provide the IP network for VoIP application with Venus 2804 gateway At CPE site connect the voice port of Venus 2804 to Mercury 3600 FXO card Extend the distance through the E1 network established by ADM 7500 then pass the voice signa
100. 1 Protection pun High Priority Path Protection Figure 1 10 T1 E1 Fiber Path Protected Application With the ring protection facility described in section 1 2 8 above Mercury also has the 1 1 1 1 N 1 functionality as indicated in Figure 1 10 that provides an always alive path to ensure that your data transmission work properly Currently this function is available for the trunk link module such as El T1 Fiber SDSL card and G SHDSL card 17 Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 10 1 2 11 Broadcast Multicast Application Figure 1 11 Broadcast Multicast Application The broadcast multicast feature enables a user at a central location to send data to multiple users connected to remote units and still maintain a normal communication with another user This capability is achieved by separating the handling of the receive and transmit paths in the time slot switching matrix of Mercury system this mode is called uni directional mode in contrast to the normal bi directional mode the system connects the transmit and receive paths between the same pair of ports Need for SDH oynchronous Digital Hierarchy SDH has provided transmission networks with an independent terminals and traditional signal structure This has resulted in new network applications and the deployment of new equipment types in varied network topologies The introduction of SDH creates a backbone network that can respond to the increasing b
101. 1 Router C Module Interface Appendix A Introduction A 19 4 FXS 4 FXS D Interface Table A 22 FXS interface PIN assignment Four 6 pin RJ 11 connectors or one 8 pin Terminal block per card Power consumption Max power consumption 9 watts 4 channels are FXS mode and all active off hook LS fi SS MN A 2 NY gt A NY UA E Nu V IP RING TIP RING TIP RING TIP RING Figure A 12 4 FXS rear panel terminal block P RED RING GREEN Figure A 13 4 FXS rear panel RJ 11 AppendixA Introduction A 20 2 4P Data Interface The 2 AP Data Module uses a 2 SCSI Il D sub50 connector The pin descriptions are shown as follows scsi pns 7I8zI5TI82 7 SG B fSigmaigoumd 5 80 55 80 5 CTS D CeaToSend 6315681 6 DSR E ataSetReady 8 33 5883 B DCD F Data Carrier Detect 2247297 22 R Ringideatr 372815378 3 RD R Receive Data a Muust 6 ROG T Receive Data b 0 Receive Tig X Receive Timing 9 2275277 2 TOU Po fransmitedDan meses h froe S frransmited Data e Ext Transmit ms W Ext Transmit Timing b 15 40 65 90 45 Txe A Y Transmit Timing a 12 37 62 87 e AA Transmit Timing b 18 43 68 93 Tec A DCE timing a 21 46 71 96 o DCE timing b E Table A 23 SCSI II DB 25 CABLE PIN assignment Appendix A Introduction A 21 A 22 4P V24 Interface The 4P V24 interface uses
102. 1 Sigidl Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setup idle signaling code ABCD bit for FXS and FXO only BH Syntax Oo SIGIDL code BH Param o None View current idle signal setting if no parameter o code Hexadecimal value between O and F 0000ABCD bit Mercury gt help sigidl Usage Setup idle signal Syntax SIGIDL code Params code hexadecimal value between O and F 0000ABCD bit NOTE 1 view idle signal code if no parameter 2 idle signal code for t1 and el only Mercury gt sigidl idle signal code 09 Figure 3 43 SIGIDL Command Screen Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 42 Stat Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Display the current status information that is stored in the alarm buffer including the configuration and cross connect table for a selected port B Syntax o STAT port BH Param o None Show the status for all ports o port Port identifier for the selected port B Example Oo STAT View status for all plugged in ports in Mercury o STAT 3a View port 3A status Mercury gt stat 0001 0000 OFF OFF 0001 0000 0002 0000 0003 0000 0000 0000 Mercury gt stat 3a TYPE 1E1 75 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp Cross Connect Table TS000 1A 000 1A 001 1A 002 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TS008 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TS016 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TS024 xxxxxx X
103. 1C Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm off gt on on 2 off off gt on on 2 off Run profile 1 Run profile 2 Run profile 3 Run profile 4 Table 3 18 Alarm status for CP Command B Configurations o Mercury A e Clk int 195 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring O O Setup to internal clock Mercury B e Clk 1a 1c Setup the master clock received from port 1A the slave clock is from port 1C Mercury A amp B e Xc 1b 1a Cross port 1B to 1A e Xc 1d 1c Cross port 1D to 1C e Cp 1a off 2 on 1 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port 1A If Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 1 and change the traffic from Main Loop1 to Protect Loop If the alarm is detected on port 1A system will execute profile 2 to change the traffic back to Main Loop e Cp 1c off 4 on 3 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port 1C If Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 3 and change the traffic from Main Loop2 to Protect Loop If the alarm is detected on port 1C system will execute profile 4 to change the traffic back to Main Loop2 B Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B O O Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc 1b 2b Cross port 1B to 2B switch to Protect Loop Cp 1c sw 0 Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1C Loge 1 ML1toPL e Stop and save the above commands into the 1 profile with the name ML 1toPL 196 Chapter 3 Configurat
104. 1KHz tone injection o LAW setup PCM CODING mode a Tgain Tx direction relative gain o Rgain Rx direction relative gain o mod O 2 wire 600 ohm default 1 2 wire 900 ohm 2 4 wire 600 ohm o act O off 1 on o law O A law default 1 u law o tgain 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 2 5dBr 6 6dBr 7dBr 8 8dBr 9 9dBr 10 10dBr 11 11dBr 12 12dBr 13 13dBr 14 14dBr 15 1dBr 16 2dBr 17 3dBr 111 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring a rgain 0 2dBr 1 3dBr 2 4dBr 3 5dBr 4 6dBr 5 7dBr 6 8dBr 7 9dBr 8 10dBr 9 11dBr 10 12dBr 11 13dBr 12 1dBr 13 0dBr 14 1dBr 15 2dBr 16 3dBr 17 4dBr B Notes o Parameter of tgain 6 17 amp rgain 7 17 are for 4 wire 6000hm mode only o E amp M don t support cross connect with FXS or FXO 3 6 16 Fiber Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setup FIBER Parameters B Syntax FIBER port LL act RL act SIG act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig B Parameters o port port identifier o LL local loopback o RL remote loopback o SIG Signaling mode Oo SIDLE Signal Idle o DET Signal Detect Number a CHG Signal Change Number o act O off 1 on o sig value between 0 and 15 ABCD bit Notes SIG SIDLE DET and CHG options are for FiberV card only B Example 112 O Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring FIBER 1a DET 1 CHG 2 e Setup 1A Fiber card to detect signal Number 1 and change signal number to 2
105. 200 Ko Pe 242 Remote LOOP DOCK sara 242 miele LOOD ACI MR 243 Internet Access with Mercury 3600 ccoccocccoccnoccncoccconocononononononononanocanonancnnnnanonons 253 AUXINATY PPP CONANECUON unu tuo ctdi nione co nde eu aste asini ea iae scent eds dn gras dn es iuter tes 253 LAN to LAN Connectivity via PPP eres nnns 254 LAN to LAN Connectivity via Frame Relay eee 254 Access via Telnet functionality ooocccocccconccocnococcconnocanocnnnonanoconononcnonanonanonos 258 Describe the operation window when access into Router module 259 N R Jumper GCONTMOUTATON estarian olaaa 261 The sub menu to change the system password ocooccoccccccccccoccccnocnconnonncononcnnanonoos 265 The main menu tree in router module occcoccoccconcoccoccconiccnonnnonocancnnnnnnonnnonos 266 XIV Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Table 5 16 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Mercury Series User s Manual The sub menu tree of Configuration menu
106. 25 M 0 mem 0 o aem h isn 4P V24 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 sill ented ail E ARG 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable PL o hm 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem 4 POTS FX 00008 40033 MERCURY 4P FXO NEM MONI 381 Appendix B Ordering Information Main Option Annex Option Equipment Equipment 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V35 F 33010 00006 DB25 M gt 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 M 33010 00023 DB25 M gt DB15 F 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE SYNC AAA didi 4 FXS D 00010 20005 MERCURY 3820 ee ao OO 85015 00002 PHONE BOX RJ 11 m a I ENS 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 65000 RIAS PHONE BOX ROUTER C 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem DB25P A F 382 Appendix B Ordering Information Product Mai i A roduc Part Number Description ain pan Anexo Pon Code Equipment Equipment Power 1 d S 90001 00059 AC DC POWER 33001 00001 AC POWER CORD 1 P 110 230V 3 PIN 10A 125V 6 O P 5V 6A FEET 50001 00060 DC DC POWER I P 48V O P 5V 6A Table B 4 Mercury 3820 Ordering Information Appendix B Ordering Information B 5 Mercury 3630 3630E Ordering Information p Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description Buon x pron A A u
107. 26 a LOGI1014 e Select profile 10 1 and 4 as the initialized profile o LOGL e List all saved profiles inside the System currently this command also shows which profile is selected for loading when system reboots o LOGI e Remove the initialized profiles if no parameter Mercury help logi Usage Select Profiles for Reboot Syntax LOGI profile 1 profile 2 Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Notes clear previous setting if no parameter Mercury gt logi 10 1 4 Mercury gt logl Profile List 01 test chamber 02 test 03 demo 04 test 10 M800 LOGI ITEM 10 01 04 Mercury gt logi initial profile list cleared Figure 3 28 LOGI Command Screen Login Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose The protection of Mercury Series System the Login ID and Password are required for supervisor starting in the Access mode to control all sessions When enter into Access mode supervisor has full authority to operate the Mercury unit The default ID and PW are listed in the following table and they are also case sensitive 124 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring BE Login ID Login Password Mercury 800 TAINET Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 Mercury 3820 TAINET 3820 Mercury 3630 TAINET 3630 Table 3 14 Login ID and Password for Mercury series B Syntax o LOGIN ID P W B Param o IDThe identification for logging into Access mode o PAN The password for the cor
108. 27 MERCURY 800 add ni de TT 33010 00002 M gt 33010 00006 n M 2 F o uM O FE mem 33010 00013 DB25 M gt 362 Appendix B Ordering Information Annex Option Product Main Option Part Number Description Code Equipment Equipment DB25 M 2 DB15 F 20cm FOR X 21 DB25 M 2 pe mE DB37 F FOR 4P V24 L 00010 00028 MERCURY 800 4P V24 DCE gt DCE lt lt NOTE VERIFICATION NEEDED FROM R amp D AND TECH SUPPORT FOR PARTS 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS ROUTER C 00007 70006 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 33010 00004 RS 449 33010 00011 DCE gt DCE SYNC NULL MODEM 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F CABLE 1 8M 33010 00011 SYNC NULL MODEM LISTED BELOW gt gt ROUTER L 00007 7000 ROUTER MODULE J 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 RJ 45 PHONE BOX 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 363 Appendix B Ordering Information Mai A t re Bari Number Description ain pron Dnex Option Equipment Equipment Table B 1 Mercury 800 Order Information Appendix B Ordering Information B 2 Mercury 3600 Order Information Product Main Opti A Opti e Part Number Description am prom NNSA ption Code A Baeu 3600 00008 40001 IMERCURY 3600 oo O 00008 40009 AC 2 secondary COM em RS IESO O O s 3600 00008 40010 MERCURY 3600 ASSEMBLY WITH DC 00008 40008 DC 2 se
109. 2P V35 Interface The 2P V35 interface uses a SCSI II D sub50 connector Pin descriptions are listed in the following table SCSI Il pin number i Pin A Chassis ground DSR E pop IF 2247 p2 3 28 3 Receive Data a Receive Data b 17 42 Receive Timing a Receive Timing b Transmitted Data a Transmitted Data b Terminal Timing a Transmit Timing a Transmit Timing b DCE Timing a DCE Timing b 2 27 we a 24 49 24 EXC un D 15 40 15 mr h 18 43 18 mes n xig clo vx lt 4 3 lt G Figure A 1 SCSI II 337 AppendixA Introduction A 10 1P V35 Interface The V 35 single port interface for Mercury 3600 uses a 34 pin standard connector Pin descriptions are shown in the following table a AO ity CeO A Chassis ground E Sgnagowd C Remestosed D foeartosed E Datasetready F Data carrier detect H Dataterminalready J Ring indicator ON ans M eau annie deta Reever dail Terminal inet Transmitting ZF Tensmt mngb BB DD Fo TN Lo NN Table A 11 Single port V 35 PIN definition for Mercury series 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ooooooooo o ooo UE QE Que COT UT 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 2 DB25 338 Appendix A Introduction A 11 RS530 Interface Figure A 3 RS 530 Data Interface module for Mercury series except M800 The RS 530 interface for Mercury series uses a 25 pin standard connector The pin descriptions
110. 3 6 17 FXO Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a The 4 port FXO telephone card can connect to your local PABX to extend the voice channel to remote FXS card in Mercury B Syntax o FXO port DL act TSA act TONE act Tgain tgain Rgain rgain Roff time BH Param o port Setup the assigned port o DL Digital loopback o TSA TSA loopback reserved for factory testing o TONE 1KHz tone injection o act 0 off default 1 on a Tgain Tx direction relative gain o Tgain O O dBr default 1 1 dBr 2 2 dBr 3 3 dBr 4 4 dBr 5 5 dBr o Rgain Rx direction relative gain a rgain O OdBr default 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 AdBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr o Roff Ring off time o time 1 10 second s default is 6 seconds B Example O FXO 2a tone 1 tgain 3 rgain 4 roff 5 113 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Setup 2A FXO card to Tx direction gain to 3dBr and Rx direction gain to AdBr Roff time to 5 seconds and enable the 1 KHz tone injection Mercury gt help fxo Usage Setup FXO Parameters Syntax FXO port DL act TSA act TONE act Tgain tgain Rgain rgain Roff time Params port identifier digital loopback TSA loopback 1KHz tone injection Tx direction relative gain Rx direction relative gain Ring off time 0 off 1 on 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr 1 10 second s
111. 3630 3630E all released versions will support the 4P V24 card 1P V24 DS card o General Description e One 1P V24 DS Card can connects one master DTE device which supports V 24 amp V 28 interface The master can connect remote DTE devices through 1P V24 DS amp 4P V24 cards which plug in Mercury 3820 amp Mercury 800 e he 1P V24 DS card support V 24 V 28 interface One port per card and it can connect with one DTE device 1P V24 DS card 43 Chapter 1 Overview provide Data Sharing function If it connects with a host DTE device the host can communicate with other eight servant device via 1P V24 DS card at most o Electrical Characteristic e Five data rate can be selected 1 2Kbps 2 4kbps 4 8kbps 9 6kbps and 19 2kbps e t provides synchronous mode and asynchronous mode In synchronous mode the clock of DTE device follows Mercury s clock In asynchronous mode it supports 7 data bits with 1 stop bit mode and 8 data bits with 1 stop bit mode It only supports none parity and none flow control mode o Test Function e t provides LL local loopback and RL remote loopback function o Environmental Conditions e Temperature Operation OC 50C Storage 10C 70C e Relative Humidity Operation O 90 non condensing Storage 0 95 non condensing o Power Consumption e 0 93 Walt B IDSL card 4 IDSL o General Description e 4 ports IDSL card that works in LT mode is using 2B1Q modulation techno
112. 3630E and 3820 provides a built in LAN connector in 10BaseT interface that can be directly connected using straight cable to the local LAN Ethernet hub port To perform the telnet functionality on Mercury 3600 an additional router module is necessary Therefore a PC or UNIX workstation that wants to access Mercury Series Product must have its Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card and acts with TCP IP protocol When the IP settings of Mercury Series product are performed by the supervised craft port in advance and the communication between Mercury and PC workstation is established the administrator can directly access Mercury by telnet with additional parameter UDP port 2000 This option offers the same functionality to operate Mercury Series Product in command line as the supervised craft port The Mercury is assigned a default IP address when delivered 172 16 5 111 with Network Mask 255 255 240 0 B Characteristics of Telnet Functionality a syntax e telnet Mercury s IP access into Router Module e telnet Mercury s IP 2000 access into Mercury via UDP port 2000 3 2 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Communicated Language The language that can be accepted and executed by Mercury Series Product is entered into the command line with correct syntax Using the simple and easily understood commands will allow the Mercury equipment to perform the specified actions The commands can be entered after the prompt Mercury gt in either up
113. 4 Chapter 1 Overview B 4 POTS Voice card 4 POTS FXO o General Description 4 ports FXO voice card The 4P POTS Voice card provide 3 different sub modules that can support FXS FXO and 2 4 wire E amp M with changing the sub modules only The voice signal can be multiplexed as a 64 Kbps signal then transfer into a digital network 4 ports FXO voice card o Electrical Characteristic Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM coding specified in ITU T G 711 Analog interface FXO 2 wires POTS interface Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T G 712 Nominal level 10 dbm Impedance 600 ohms Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 db Relative levels Input level O to 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 1db Output level 2 to 7 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 1db Total distortion Comply with Figure 11 of ITU T G 712 Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dbmO Single frequency noise Not exceed 73 dbmoO in voice band oignaling loop start Ring generation Chapter 1 Overview 235 VRMS reference at 25Hz e DC impedance Off hook 2300 Ohms at 25mA feed e Diagnostics test Full Digital loopback TSA loopback 1 KHz tone injection o Timeslot Allocation e Each channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot O o Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only o Compatibility ompatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Flash Version
114. 4095 AROMA aci SE q ELM MM T 174 20 9 RS A o a e A en rare amar oe 175 240 90 SP GO Mn ereraa N E E E 178 SO OL EOS Command e EEEE E E E E TE 179 CARLA C Oman a A 182 200 VES C O t NE A 183 L APE ATT N ANDO E TINO Seti 184 SA 0 1 o o DS C O IP A nn AEE EE E ET 184 dd A Om 185 3 7 3 Built in Ch router for Mercury 3820 enne eene een nn nnne enses nnn nennen nnns 186 SW MEE NE un d wi reu m Gsi pic 187 3 42 131 Non Reyertivo Protec Mesas iii iia 190 3406 161 Revertiveo Protection with Priority iii ias ra arise Hera erario xU RS Po occ Ie Us Sa duds 192 Sl Nil Rever vo Protected ciar ME 195 3 7 8 Basic SDH P to P protection for Mercury 3630 nnne nennen 198 CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE siccssssscevsssoccsscsivescecesexsssevasccesssvescessesice E 4 1 STATUS OF ALARM MESSAGE DESCRIPTION eese eene eene eene eene eene eene eene eene 201 LAN MEE CU ETT A A AA 201 S XN AAA O E ser nem eer er mee mr rTC Neer nor ment NTT ery erm Tree 207 4 1 3 Fiber Optical Module Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber B 212 4 1 4 High Speed Data Module 2 V 39 usina talas 214 4 1 5 X 50 Low Speed Sync and Async Data Module oooooooooonoccnccononononnnononononononanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 216 4 1 6 Channelized Router amp Non Channelized Router Module cccccccccccccnnccnonoooonononcncnnnnnnnnnnoss 219 AL DS LE Module tanda E ple 221 AID T 224 Ao SDS DI E aora aliadas 226 AO ZA Da Modo cds atos pi ill
115. 5 Clear to Send signal default act 1 o DSR V 35 Data Set Ready signal default act 1 o DCD V 35 Data Carrier Detect signal default act 1 a RIV 35 Ring Indicator signal default act 0 o act Osignalinactive 1 signal active o DEV The clock type for which device connected to and illustrated as following and only valid for 2V35 card o dev O DTE without clock default 1 DTE with clock 2 DCE without clock 3 DTE with clock and TxC RxC ExC 4 DCE with clock and TxC RxC ExC o INV TxC and RxC clock polarity 153 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o Inv O TxC normal amp RxC normal default 1 TxC normal amp RxC inverted 2 TxC inverted amp RxC normal 3 TxC inverted amp RxC inverted B Example pu V35 1a 1 10 dev 3 e Setup the speed for V 35 card on port 1A to 640 Kbps start from time slot 1 and end with time slot 10 Set the clock mode to dev 3 DTE with clock and TxC RxC ExC DEV O DEV 1 TxC ExC Mercury DPC y DEV Mercury DPC y DEV 2V35 RxC DTE 2V35 RxC DCE P without DCE EG Eds mode clock mode qo DEV 2 DEV 3 DEV 4 TxC ExC TxC RxC ExC TxC RxC ExC Mercury DEV Mercury DRC y DEV Mercury DEV 2V35 EXC a XC DCE 2V35 RxC 2V35 EXC gg RxC DCE o Without DCE pr DCE n E o mode Rx EXC clock mode Xe mode RxGy Ex NULL NULL Modem Modem 154 Chap
116. 6 dE 60 BHBHH 60008 GANHA B BE BH B BE BB B BE BH BRAGA 60008 GANA B BE BH B BECBB B BECBB H amp J TU RIS HIN Configuration FRAME FAS SIGNAL CAS CRC no AIS no EXC disable DEG disable SIDLE 89 DET BB CHG 06 LP TIH ZH RIS Report Insert EJ2 Tainet3638 TJ2 Tainet3636 RJ2 receive non printing char Figure 3 63 XTS Command Screen 173 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 58 XP Command Accommodate Mercury 3630 3630E Purpose O XP command is a usage for framer cross connect to SDH user can first execute XT XC command for grouping 64k data become 2M F1 F21 then execute XP command for transfer 2M data into the time interval of SDH The exchange between Line1 and line2 is also use XP command Default value will mapping F1 F21 to 111 371 of SDH channel 1 Syntax O XP mode porta portb Param O mode e There are 4 modes for selection e low lagency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e F frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode e V voice conversion o Porta The indicated source porta can assign F1 F21 o Portb The indicated destination portb can assign TU Example o XPf1L1 111 o XP f2 L1 121 o XP f3
117. A E qs n ana nan ia no ora E Sd tin US Ne ODC Anta nana ana 112 CO E Goin j o NOE T UR 113 lop do reni M O SI AP a eae 114 Call oat Qe TERCIO MT o E TE A 117 DSL Conan AAA uE 959 0980 05 90020009 0 00080000 8008002009098 E 117 Lok Roto II PR Uu m 119 PP snes issdeeatadosees lt sseeateodensoesaataeusecodeancsaesonctacaeesstee 120 Io COMMIT aie css sae sete PS A 121 Lore Command TU o 121 Ee KET e AO O o 0905099080910 05509000900 2 000 0 009800350 080 800669500000 EPE SUR MIS ada 123 Losi Se IP ERE uu A EN E 124 EOL OTT ubl NET n 125 Ea ERE A tbe E 126 a Io O T Tm 126 a ea Ren TT UU 127 IBS E COMANDO NR A A mmm 128 DNC ONA ds 128 INMIS Gr EET UT ULL 131 PMC ORIHDOP AAA A MR EU bass S 131 RE Command ae rays ETT 133 Rea Comin sessenta asas a orae sunor ebd AE E EEA outs diana EAEE EEE 135 DCIS PNIS 136 SECCO IHREN E OTT 138 vet sd Mei T T 139 viui BS Ma ET T Tr 141 AAA O PO RR PR d ed er Unde EE 142 Side Gro rei AA E A O 143 IN GI ERE c UU T RR A S 144 Tit SO IP asas ERU Tm 147 Dei E Geer 010 012 n o PE EE E SE NA E 148 User OTA EQ 149 M24 C OMAN PNR PD q En PI 150 A S O onu T Tm 153 A TR UU m 155 ROO OMANDO NUNT 158 Ce JB SNC EET T m 160 COMO sao uc 161 Peg onc AAA T Tm 165 PR E Gr MER T T ET 168 A m 169 Mercury Series User s Manual 2000 DOE COM dai m 170 DOS DAME COMANDO ostia T uu 171 2
118. ABOUT Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring m Example ABOUT Mercury about E for Mercury 800 Cc Gopuright TAIMET Communication System Corp Headquarters No 25 Alley 15 Lane 12H Sec 1 Mei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http www tainet net TEL 86 2 2658 3668 FAH 885 2 26583232 E mail sales tainet net support tainet net Release Time Mon Nov 28 26 56 19 2005 Softuare 2 80 Hardware 2 00 Figure 3 5 About Command Screen for 800 Mercury gt about E for Mercury 3600 c gt Copyright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters No 25 Alley 15 Lane 12H Sec 1 Nei Hu Hd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http ww tainet net TEL 86 2 265 83000 FAR B86 2 265683232 E mail salesBtainet net supportlitainet net Release Time Tue Nov 29 11 32 56 2005 POWER 1 Power 1 5U Power 2 SU External Power 48U LHe S W Front Panel 04 00 Mercury 36BbB cchannelize gt Ui1 B4T DACS Card DACS17 Middle Board W1 81 Figure 3 6 About Command Screen for 3600 Mercury gt about for Mercury 3630 c Copyright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters Ho 25 Alley 15 Lane 128 Sec 1 Hei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http wwu tainet net TEL 886 2 265 83006 FAX 886 2 26583232 E mail saleststainet net support tainet net Release Time Tue Har 21 11 13 88 2886 POWER Power 1 SU Power 2 SU External Power Hone HZU S W Front Panel U1 68 Mercury 36348 cha
119. ABOUT About Mercury 100 700 800 ALM View Clear Alarm History CLS Clear Screen HELP Help Message LOGIN Enter Access Mode LOGOUT Enter Monitor Mode PM Performance Monitor STAT View Port Status NOTE 1 HELP command for command table or syntax 2 port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 4A 5A Figure 3 2 Mercury Monitoring Mode Screen Mercury 800 Access Mode To ensure the system works normally the Login ID and Password are required for operator with supervisor status to control all sessions in Access mode After entering into the Access mode supervisor has full authority to operate Mercury The default Login ID TAINET and Password can be changed using internal commands The Help message under Access mode is shown below 77 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Note The default Login ID and Password for Mercury Family Login ID Login Password ALM CLK CLS DATE FXS IDLE LINK LOGE LOGIN LOGOUT LOGV PM SECE STAT THRE USER X50 XT DROP RS530 XSLT NMS Mercury 800 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 Mercury 3630 3630 TAINET 3600 TAINET 3820 TAINET Mercury 3630E TAINET 13630 Mercury login TAINET enter access mode Mercury gt help Help Message Help Message View Clear Alarm History Setup Clear Setup Setup Setup Setup Clock Source Screen Date FXS Parameters Idle Code Link Parameters Stop amp Save Append Profile Enter En
120. AT Filter SNMP DHCP Edit Console amp Telnet Password Enter select ESC previous menu lt left right TAB next item Console Port Password root Telnet Enable Telnet Username root Telnet Password root Front Panel Config Disable Figure 5 8 The sub menu to change the system password Step 1 Enter your new Console password up to 10 characters and press ENTER The cursor will now move down to Telnet selection Step 2 At Telnet selection press SPACE BAR to enable or disable this field to change the Telnet username and password please select enable If you don t want to activate the Telnet connection select disable Step 3 Change Telnet Username and Password Step 4 Enable or disable the front panel control select disable to lock the front panel This will allow user to only view front panel display status Step 5 After you have changed the password properly the confirm menu will pop up select YES for confirmation If you have changed any parameter in this menu the TCS will require you to restart the Router Module to make the new setting effective Organization of TCS menu tree The TCS Terminal Configuration System is user friendly configuration interface To use TCS you can configure and monitor the Router Module for advanced management The following diagram will help you easily understand the TCS Organization menu 265 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 3 1 Main Menu
121. Alarm 227 Chapter 4 Maintenance error detected in the AA SDSL link receive signal Disconnect SDSL Check the operating Alarm Minor card persisted on the mode on the network handshake situation equipment NTU LTU or connect with Xstream 1300 Have the remote equipment check ALM Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor report has been no action required switch off at specified port ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Informative message State Minor C OFF Alarm report and no action required DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 9 SDSL alarm message 4 1 10 2 4P Data Module Table 4 10 lists the alarm messages generated by the 2 4P Data module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Loss of Synchronous 1 Check cable Alarm Major Local lost of connections to the link synchronization alarm connector on the specified link 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified 228 Chapter 4 Maintenance data module 3 Replace the data module No CLK No clock source input 1 Check cable Alarm Major from the indicated port connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module PM 15 ES Error Seconds
122. Buffer description B DHCP Table Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Dynamic Leases Currently in Use Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item IP Address Currently Used in The Dynamic Leases IP Address Ethernet Address Lease Time Remaining Lease Time Press any key to return Figure 5 17 The sub menu for DHCP table The DHCP table shows the IP lease situation and you can view the remaining time for the IP address which has been dynamically and statically leased It also shows the corresponding MAC address and IP assigned lease time 272 2 6 3 4 5 6 3 5 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Device Control Device Control Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Figure 5 18 The sub menu tree of Device Control menu Device Control menu allows you to restore the default parameters and update the firmware B Warm Start This command will cause the system to restart and reload the new parameters it also interprets the WAN and LAN connection B Cold Start Cold start will reboot the Router Module this command can be used if and only if you have updated the firmware B Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory default parameters B Firmware Upgrade This function allows you to update the Router software using a TFTP Server r
123. CB U E1 2CB U o General Description o 20r4 ports E1 card with Balance or Unbalance interface o Electrical Characteristic e Line Rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm e Line Code HDB3 e Input Signal ITU T G 703 e Coding ITU T G 704 e Jitter ITU T G 823 e Framing CCS CAS Unframed o Timeslot Allocation o User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping o Clock Source o Can be set to derived external clock from received port A or C B E amp M Interface 4P POTS E amp M Oo General Description o The 4P POTS E amp M Card can provides four analog voice interfaces Either 2 wire or 4 wire can selected by Dip Switch the impedance of the 2 wire can select 600ohm or 900ohm by Dip Switch and the 4 wire impedance is 600ohm its supported Signaling Type is E amp M Signaling Type I V and Jumper selectable The configuration of its driver mode is E Lead Originated or called Side B Signaling Unit Side o The analog signals can converted to 64Kbps PCM digital signals with A law or u law which selected by software and can only cross connected to El T1 Fiber1V or 1PSHDSL card now o KEY FUNCTION 24 Chapter 1 Overview Four voice ports operate in 2 Wire 600 900 Ohm amp 4 Wire 600 Ohm interfaces Supports E amp M Signaling type I Il III IV V Dip Switch Setting Line Interface Impedance Jumper Setting to select E amp M type Trunk interface to PBX or key system Supports loopback path in analog or digital Software Confi
124. E without clock TxC ExC e 4 DCE with clock TxC RxC ExC e 5 DTE without clock TxC TCC e 6 DTE with clock TxC ExC TCC 103 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring DEV 0 DEV 1 TxC RxC TxC ExC Mercury RE y DEV Mercury XC y DEV 4PrRata RxC DTE 4P Rata RxC gt DTE with m d without med i ExC clock clock DEV 2 DEV 3 DEV 4 TxC ExC RxC TxC RxC TxC ExC RxC Mercury E gt DEV Mercury DO EL DEV Mercury X ea DEV 4Pprata RxC y DTE with teia EL gRXC EU Aata EXC EXC DCE with med i ExC clock med RxG ExC mod RxQ EXC clock e E Rx p clock E _RxG gt NULL NULL Modem Modem DEV 5 DEV 6 TxC TCC TxC RxC TCC Mercury RC y DEV Mercury RC y DEV 4P Pata RxC DCE 4Pppata RxC DCE with without clock med i Exc Apa mod Exc e e MC o INV TxC and RxC clock polarity e O TxC normal amp RxC normal default e 1 TxC normal 4 RxC inverted e 2 TxCinverted amp RxC normal e 3 TxCinverted amp RxC inverted B Example o DATA 4a 10 type 2 dev 4 e Setup 4P Data card on port 4A to RS 530 type speed 640 Kbps count number is 10 start from time slot O and end to time slot 9 And set the clock mode to dev 4 DCE with clock and TxC RxC ExC o DATA 4b 20 type 4
125. Error Seconds SES Unavailable Second UAS are supported by Mercury s performance monitoring features The historical performance data include 15 min 1 hour 1 day report that complies with ITU T G 826 G 821 B Alarm table history Displays the latest 100 alarms status for easy system monitoring 4 Chapter 1 Overview General Features B 3 different sized Mercury Series Product for different requirements B Data port slots can be inserted with the various optional modules B 2 buil in E1 ports for Mercury 800 with software selectable balance unbalance interface B Built in Ethernet control interface for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E following IEEE 802 3 protocol and based on 10baseT with RJ 45 connector and support SNMP protocol m Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E PPP port supports asynchronous mode speed from 2400 to 115200bps in sync mode supports external clock up to 128 Kbps lts V 24 Interface in RJ 45 connector can be selected as a craft port alternative B Alarm contact connector is used to indicate when an alarm is generated with external buzzer and external LED The following Table 1 1 lists main characteristics of Mercury Series product M800 M3600 3600 M3630 3630E Mercury 3820 Jp to 10180001 Ue to 21 T1 E1 Up to 32 T1 E1 16 3600 T1 E1 j P 1024 x 1024 1024 x 1024 2048 x 2048 3600 Craft port Craft port Craft port VT 100 terminal VT 100 VT 100 terminal termi
126. Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Mercury Series User s Manual CLK Command Screen for 3630 3630E occoocccocccocccocncoccconccocnconnonnnonnnoncnonnconnconnnons 96 CLR Command Screen er eeeereee re sni nse nee sse rsen senseri ena is 97 QUEE Sedi SC CON NET TT AP eee ene ere ere 97 CRAFT Command SCS M m TT 98 EF COMMand oc esparto 101 DATA Command SOLO aaa diria inss E ad AS aa 105 Date Command SClESN uunc cnsedvxsxbencoxdutaxiicai iud EC deg near nda a asia asia 106 DROP Command Screen eni Er rnr eE era er NEEE ns 108 Eo A 110 FXO Command SC y acessa saiam E E IA 114 FXS COmmana Ch OC ea TRU TET 116 IDEE Command Screens 117 IDSL Command SCIEN cocoocccncccncncncccnccconconnconnnonnnoronornnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnicanonono 119 LINK Command Screen occoccccccccocccoccconcconcocncncnnnnnnnnnonnocononanonononnnoncnonnnnnrncnrinannnnnns 120 LOGB Command Screen eee reee nennen nsn er erre an re anne anna 121 LOGE Command Scars sis OR UI RAS ES 123 LOS Command cree listan aiii 124 EOGI O CO PP a 125 EOOLCommana SCTE O NE E E 126 LOGOUT Command SCLC sacacasa ii 126 LOGR Command Screen cccecessecesecececeeeceeeeneeeeeeseeeeeteeeteeeseeeseeesseseneeaeesseees 127 LOGY Command oc ee ssa rita io tant dia dea 128 NET Command Screens EU MN RUN DEF M de added 129 NET Comitalg Sel Gell sig a bat Erud Da 130 NMS Command S ChE parra ta 131 PM Command Screen occocccncccncncocicococonoconnnonnncnnnn
127. First character Status U The route is valid up and in use D The route is invalid down and has a metric of 16 RIP infinity Second character Source The route is a direct connection R the route is established from RIP information S The route is a static route The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes Table 5 5 Descriptions of the Field E ARP Table Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current_Config Routing Table ARP_Table Statistics NAT_Buffer DHCP View Current ARP Table Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item IP MAC Addr 172 16 5 74 0080c8469a5f 172 16 5 41 00d05926d6el 172 16 5 106 0080c8e95c78 Press any key to return Figure 5 14 The sub menu to view the ARP table The ARP table lists the LAN MAC addresses which are learned by the Router Module The Router Module learns a device MAC address when IP traffic is generated between the router and other devices 270 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B Statistics Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Device Statistics Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item LAN WAN AUX Rx Octets 11265415 201421296 0 Rx Right Packets 75398 179206 0 Rx Broadcast Packets 82521 0 0 Rx Discarded Packets 0 0 0 Rx Error Packets 1 0 0 Rx Unknow
128. Front Panel Appendix A Introduction A 17 SDSL Interface The SDSL line interface is using a RJ 45 connector The pin out descriptions are shown as follows Table A 18 SDSL Interface PIN assignment AppendixA Introduction A 18 Router Interface LED Message B ACT The Router Module is active and ready B AUX The protocol layer link status for AUX port m LAN LAN port active and ready When transmitting data on LAN port the LED will flash B WAN The protocol layer link status for WAN port Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10 Base T interface Pin definitions are listed in Table A 19 mem e TT NN TPTX TP Driver Output 8 E ES To Ne Bo Ne Table A 19 Ethernet interface for router module PPP port is located on the back plane of the router card It s a RJ 45 connector with RS 232 V 28 electric signal interface The pin definition is listed in the following Table Appendix A Introduction SIGNAL SOURCE Panel socket Adaptor nput Output FUNCTION RJ 45 DB 25 Male Signal Ground COMMON E RT 5 mu B input LAN ACT AUX WAN O O e 9 O Figure A 10 Router C Interface Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10 Base T interface Pin definition is listed in Table A 21 COIN TPTX TP Driver Output CO pe E To Ne E 8 Ne E Table A 21 Pin definition of Ethernet interface of Router C AppendixA Introduction WAN IX RX LAN ACT Figure A 1
129. IP Network through its Auxiliary PPP port when there is no local LAN at the installation site Asynchronous selectable data rate are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control Synchronous data transmission supports up to 128 Kbps Caution Upon pressing the PPP Craft button to switch between normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode action will be in effect when system is restarted Please remember to press the RST reset button to initialize system All the settings for Mercury 800 will be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance Chapter 2 Installation 2 4 Mercury 800 Rear Panel Description Mercury 800 supports 2 selectable O modules and 2 built in E1 balance unbalanced interface LAN port PPP Craft port and power supply socket the ground screw in the rear panel of Mercury 800 Figure 2 2 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 800 each slot is marked with a label to designate the slot type and definition Table 2 2 describes the function of each port Please refer to Chapter 1 4 about the compatible O modules for Mercury 800 Figure 2 2 Rear Panel view of Mercury 800 Data port 1 amp 2 are user Plug in cards Data port 3 amp 4 are built in E1 cards while ordered the Balance 1200hm or Unbalanced 75Ohm connector is software configurable Built in router module located on port5A LAN connector with RJ 45 type for built in Rou
130. L 3630 00010 70001 MERCURY 3600 O qM UNIT WITH AC 70002 3600 BASE UNIT WITH DC 3630E 000 107 0003 Mercury 3630E Ethernet over STM 1 base unit with two 100 240VAC auto range AC power module 3630E 000 107 0004 Mercury 3630E Ethernet over STM 1 base unit with two 36 72VDC DC power Sa Card 00008 40002 MERCURY 4E1 d EN E1 4CB 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 33010 00006 DB25 M L CRT 1 p 00008 40002 MERCURY 4T1 BOARD e T1 4CB 33010 00025 DB25 M O4 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment A Ree 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE pe 1 EE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt 35015 00001 00001 SS 45 RJ 45 PHONE BOX BOX 00008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 Bo A E E1 4CU 33010 00024 DB25 Pe aa me 33010 00026 DB25 ee ee 09100 60047 BNC F gt connector 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 00008 40005 MERCURY 2E1 pene c E1 2CU 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M gt SBNC cable F 09100 60047 BNC F gt F 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 cable 1 8m 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 A E1 2CB 33010 00025 DB25 M 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE ee 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m EN o LLL 35015 00001 o RS 45 PHONE BOX Appendix B Ordering Information is Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description peony X4 prion Equipment Equipment fe 40007 MERCURY 2T1 BOARD 1000 T1 m
131. L2 111 o XP f4 L2 121 o XVL1 174 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o XPS1L1 1115 Cross connect first TU to L1 111 o XP SA L1 1 VC3A Cross connect first TUG to L1 111 fi 11 111 F2 11 121 Hercury gt xp Hercury gt xp Hercury gt xp 3 12 111 Hercury gt xp 4 12 121 Hercury gt xu L1 ACTIVE ALH 3 6 59 111 F00061 131 F 00007 151 F00013 171 F00019 XXXXEXXXEXEE HXEXXEEXEE HXEXXXEXEE HXXXXXEXEE KARMA XXXEXXXEXEXEE DEDE DEM DE DEM DD XXEXXXEXEE 231 F 00008 251 666814 2 1 F 00020 XXXXXXEXXE HXEXXXEXEE HXEXXXEXEE HXXEXXXEXXE HXEXXXEXEE XXEXXXEXXE RR DEM DE DEM DD low latency loopback x idle Port Ln1 XXEXXEXXEE 331 F 00009 351 F00015 371 F00021 XXXXXXEXXE XXEXXEXXEE XXEXXEXXEE XXXXXXEXXE HXEXXXEXXE XXEXXEXEXME XXXEXXXEXXME 121 F 66682 141 F 6680168 161 F 66616 EHXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXXE EXXXXEXXMEE EHXEXXXEXNXE EXEXXXEXXE EXEXXXEXNXE EXEXXXEXXE frame integrity z DACS ch loss Marked timeslot is unidirection Hercury xu 12 ACTIVEZALH amp DAC 111 F 66683 KARMA HXXXXXEXEE KARAN XXXXXXEXXEE DEDE DEM DE DEM DE XXXXXXEXER XXXXXXEXXE HXEXXXEXEE HXEXXXEXEE HXEXXXEXEE AAAAAKANARM ARAXAKMANARM AAARAKANARM AAAAAKANARM ARA A Nana ARANAMANANM AAAAAKANARM AAANAKANARM ARANAKANARM AAARAKANAR AAANAKANANM low latency o loopback Figure 3 64 SDH Command x idle Port Ln2 SO AEARARAARA AAARAKMANARN ARARARAARA ARARA PA A ARANAMANAN
132. LECTIOR It used a DIP Switch to configure a 2 Wire mode or 4 Wire mode in this circuit And connected into 6000hm or 900ohm in 2 Wire mode or into 6000hm in 4 wire mode 357 AppendixA Introduction 2 Wire 6000 2 Wire 9000 4 Wire 6000 Figure A 18 2W AW AND IMPEDANCE SELECTIOR Appendix B Ordering Information Appendix B Ordering Information B 1 Mercury 800 Order Information Code Equipment Equipment BASE IN 800 00010 00003 MERCURY 800 BASE A muy 00 oo 00010 00023 MERCURY 800 BASE TA QNNM Card E1 4CB L 00010 00004 MERCURY 800 ror paros 33010 00025 DB25 M 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE MN s IS 4 33010 00006 DB25 M gt 35015 00001 RJ 45 PHONE pep o mv E1 4CU L 00010 00005 abel 800 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 8BNC 33010 00026 us M 8BNC 09100 60047 BNC P gt F Low Pp 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F 359 Appendix B Ordering Information Product Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description Code P Equipment Equipment T1 Mon for 00010 00006 MERCURY 800 4T1 1000 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE O O O nemo 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F 35015 00001 RJ 45 PHONE ommo o Pia E1 2CB L 00010 00007 MERCURY 800 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE EE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F mw g E1 2CU L 00010 00008 MERCURY800 75Q 33010 00026 DB25 M 8BNC F cable 33010 00024 DB25 M 8BNC cable
133. M3630 3630E 198 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Configurations o Site A e Clk int Setup the clock source from Mercury 3630 3630E itself e El 1a fr 0 cas 0 tcrc O rcrc O Setup E1 card on port 1A of slot 1 e XC 1A F1 Setup all time slots of 1A port connect to the framer 1 e Fame fr 0 Setup framer is frame mode e XP F1L1 111 Assign framer 1 to label 111 of SDH channel 1 Labels state as figure 3 77 user can assign any framer to any label of SDH channel e SP 1 Setup the protection mechanism is auto o Site B e Clik L1 L2 Setup the clock source received priority from channel 1 first and then channel 2 e El 1a fr 0 cas 0 tcrc O rcrc O Setup E1 card on port 1A of slot 1 e XC 1A F1 Setup all time slots of 1A port connect to the framer 1 e Fame fr 0 Setup framer is frame mode e XP F1L1 111 Assign framer 1 to label 111 of SDH channel 1 199 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e SP 1 Setup the protection mechanism is auto Port Ln1 Tuga 111 F 00001 211 FB8BBH2 311 FB8B8HH3 121 F06604 221 F00065 321 F00066 TUBB 131 FBHB8HH 231 FHB8HH8 331 FB8HB8HB9 141 FABBIA 241 F 5600141 31 FBBHT12 TUG1S 151 F 000153 257 F 66814 351 F 66615 161 F06616 261 F00017 361 F00018 TUG1T9 171 FHB8gi9 271 FB8BHB28 371 F 66821 Figure 3 79 Label state table Chapter 4 Maintenance Chapter 4 Maintenance This Chapter describes the alarm message performance monitoring and loop testing function for
134. MERCURY X 50 O Leaps 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem X50 MUX 4 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 ssa E leaps 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem X50 DACS 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 JANI NNI 33010 00022 SCSI Il gt 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F DR o Beet 367 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null o mmo o elm o 4IDSL 00008 40019 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD TB 4 FXS 00008 40021 MERCURY 4VOICE BOARD RJ 11 DO iso A HONE BOX RUTH T1 ACB 00008 40024 MERCURY 4T1 mem somem 33010 00025 DB25 M 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE SE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt FIBER B 00008 40025 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP FIBER 1 00008 40026 SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER FIBER 2 00008 40027 DAULPORTFIBER XCODE 00008 40028 IMERCURY XCODE BOARD T1 2CB 00008 40029 MERCURY 271 FOR PTT BOARD 1000 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F Rank 1 8m SDSL 00008 40030 MERCURY SDSL BOARD 368 Appendix B Ordering Information Product Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description pion m promn Code Equipment Equipment Doo Doo TO TWSTPAR DO 4P DATA 00008 40031 MERCURY 4P DATA BOARD 33010 00002 DB25 M 2 V 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M cable 1 p 33010
135. Mercury gt fxo 2a tone 1 tgain 3 rgain 4 roff 5 Mercury gt stat 2a TYPE 4FXO CLK NO ACTIVE ALM DAC Cross Connect Table TS000 xxxxxxx Configuration MODE terminate STATUS idle PCM CODING A law DL off TSA LOOPBACK off TONE INJECTION on TX GAIN 3dBr RX GAIN 4dBr RING OFF 3 6 18 FXS Command TIME 5second s Figure 3 21 FXO Command Screen Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The 4 port FXS telephone card can provide point to point Hot Line application by cross connecting time slots to the specified voice channel When the connection is established make one site s hand set go off hook will provide ring tone to the distant site handset Establish the Hot Line connection via E1 CAS Common Associate Signaling R2 mode voice channel can be integrated to the E1 network in this application the Hot Line voice channel can be created and extended to the far end remote branch This FXS card only supports A law PCM coding and loop start signaling B Syntax o FXS port R r DL dl TTX ttx RING ring Tgain tgain Rgain rgain TSA act TONE act B Param 114 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring port setup the assigned port R setup the line impedanc r 0 600 Ohm default 1 900 Ohm DL digital loopback dl 0 disable default 1 enable TTX teltex tone ttxO ttx off default 1 12KHz ttxon 2 16KHz ttx on RING ring frequency and cadency rng 0 17 Hz 1 sec
136. Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No Figure 3 53 X 50 Command Screen 3 6 50 XC Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a This port assignment performs the cross connections of all the time slots between two ports B Syntax o XC mode porta portb 158 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Param o Mode There are 4 modes for selection e low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e F frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data Default e V voice conversion is to convert the voice signal and its signaling while the A u card is inserted e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode o porta the indicated source porta o portb the indicated destination portb B Example o XC3a4a Port 3A cross connect to port 4A o XV3a View port 3A time slot assignment table o XCi3a4a Clear the cross connection between port 3A and 4A Mercury gt help xc Usage Setup Connection Port Syntax XC mode porta portb Params mode L low latency F frame integrity V voice conversion I idle porta port identifier portb port identifier Notes 1 default mode is frame integrity if not specified 2 make sure you have installed A u conversion card if voice conversion mode is selected Mercury
137. Notes 1 in VCI mode the sequence number range is 1 63 TUs 2 in VC3 mode the sequence number range is 1 3 TUGs Figure 3 69 VC3 Command Screen 183 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 7 Applications and Settings 3 7 1 FXO FXS SDSL card B Description o Extend the Voice card to remote site via SDSL connection B Structure Site A E1 Tx to Rx 3 FA 3a 1s FXO A V ASES E Mercury3600 ASIFOBIESUD Mercury3600 Figure 3 70 Voice Card Application Diagram B Configurations o Site A e Clk int Setup to internal clock E13a cas 1 E1 card that crossed to FXO card should be set to CAS mode E1 3b cas 0 The physical connection of E1 port must to set to CCS mode Xt v 1a 0 3a 1 Cross connect FXO to E1 with mode v Sdsl 4a mod 2 31 Setup SDSL card to mod 2 to 1300 frame mode and end of time slot is 31 e Xt 3b 1 4a 1 Cross connect E1 to SDSL card treat as data 184 O 3 7 2 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Xt 3b 16 4a 16 Cross connect the signaling time slot 16 to SDSL card and send to remote site B Site B Xstream 1300 modem load profile 8 NTU E1 Fr Rcv e Clk 3a Setup the clock received from port3A e El 3a cas E1 card that crossed to FXS card should be set to CAS mode e Xtv 1a0 3a 1 Cross connect FXS to E1 with mode v Fiber Applications B Description O O O O Extend the operation distance through the fiber optical card which can carry 4E
138. O port TSA loop back testing reserved for act 0 disable TSA act factory FXO port 1KHz tone injection act 0 disable FXO port Tx direction relative gain tgain 0 O dBr FXO port Tx direction relative gain tgain 0 O dBr FXO port Ring off time time 6 6 sec Table 3 11 FXO Command 88 3 6 3 6 1 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Command Set Description This Section describes the detail description and parameters of Mercury Series Command Set The following is all Command Set of Mercury Series Help Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Display the Help message for the index of all the command sets in Help message of Mercury Series Product and also show the detailed format for each command B Syntax o HELP cmd B Param o cmd valid command text B Example o HELP o HELP clk View the detailed format of clk command 89 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help Es ALM CLK CLS DATE FXS IDLE LINK LOGE LOGIN LOGOUT LOGV Help Message Help Message View Clear Alarm History Setup Clock Source Clear Screen Setup Date Setup FXS Parameters Setup Idle Code Setup Link Parameters Stop Save Append Profile Enter Access Mode Enter Monitor Mode View Contents of a Profile ABOUT BOOT CLR CRAFT El HELP IDSL LOGB LOGI LOGL LOGR About Mercury System Reboot Clear Port Status Setup Craft Speed Setup El Para
139. Operation 0 50 C Storage 10 70 C e Relative Humidity Operation 0 90 non condensing otorage O 95 non condensing e Power Consumption 0 93 Watt when 4 ports A B C D are used simultaneously a Timeslot Allocation e All 4 ports can select individual 64K time slot that located on time slot 0 or combined few of them in 1 time slot for saving the bandwidth a Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only o Compatibility Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot version Flash Version 4P V24 card V1 03 V1 16 Supported Table 1 22 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 42 Chapter 1 Overview Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Hardware version Compatible Software Flash ROM 4P V24 card Table 1 23 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot version Flash Version 4P V24 card V1 03 vio Isu pported Table 1 24 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot version Flash Version 4P V24 card vo VI 04 Supported Table 1 25 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E ut Version 4P V24 card Table 1 26 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Caution A For Mercury 3820 3600
140. P advertises subnets Available with active RIP only YES RIP advertises subnets 287 Chapter 5 Router Configuration NO RIP does not advertise subnets Note A denotes the default value of RP parameter Table 5 12 RIP Setup Menu Handle Routing Protocol configuration B Router Module firmware version before and include 2 13 Router Module sends both of RIP 1 and RIP 2 in broadcasting mode if you have third party router connected with Router Module in the same network segment or remote node please configure the third party router RIP 2 to broadcasting mode therefore the third party router can receive the RIP 2 form Route Module because it does not support RIP 2 with multicasting mode Generally if RIP 2 operates in multicasting mode it does not listen to the RIP 2 broadcasting and so will not receive the RIP 2 packets However if one router uses broadcasting then all routers on your network must use broadcasting B For Router Module Firmware version after 2 13 RIP 2 protocol supports multicasting so be sure you have turned off Next Hop Advertise example on CISCO Router needs to configure Neighbor Houte so routing protocol can be built up in between 5 6 5 3 Configuring Static Routes amp Default Routes Routes between network segments sometimes have to be added manually There are several advantages that static routes have over dynamic routes One advantage is that there are fewer overheads for the route
141. P which starts running after the old firmware code is erased Operating on the opposite side of the client will be a TFTP server connected to the LAN or WAN interface via an IP network 323 Chapter 5 Router Configuration CAWINN Tieystem 22md exe telnet 172 16 5 250 Bi x Mercury Ghannelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Firmware Upgrade TFIP Server IP Address 172 16 2 52 TFTP Server File Name ful 88 hin Download Code to Flash Memory Writing Data 5H x ENTER select TAB next amp left gt right ESCi previous menu Figure 5 74 The Firmware Upgrade menu eC WINN Teystem22 cmd exe telnet 172 16 5 250 lOl x P evice Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade 1 Firmware Upgrade from IFTE Server The new code is Version 1 88 i 1 Download process has replace flash memory with new code i 2 You can power cycle or cold start to activate new code 3 Press ENTER to continue ENTER select T B next left 5 right ESC previous menu Figure 5 75 Success to upgrade the Firmware After file transfer is complete follow the instructions and Cold Start the Ch r module 5 7 6 5 7 6 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Diagnosis Menu There are two submenus included in the Diagnos
142. Protocols 12725 0 0 Tx Octets 201682346 5207276 0 Tx Packets 135856 117713 0 Tx Broadcast Packets 2 0 0 Tx Discarded Packets 0 0 0 Rx Throughput Octets 286 24 0 Tx Throughput Octets 400 25 0 Press any key to return Figure 5 15 The sub menu for current statistics The Statistics provides a snapshot view of interface packets flow count the screen will automatically refresh to provide the current status B NAT Buffer Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View NAT s Free Buffers Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item TCP Free IP 300 TCP Free Connection 1500 UDP Free IP 200 UDP Free Connection 500 ICMP Free IP 20 ICMP Free Connection 50 Press any key to return Figure 5 16 The sub menu to show current NAT Buffer 271 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Fed Desenpton TCP Free IP The remaining IP address available for NAT process with TCP UT oc mama Palos TOP 00 i TCP Free The remaining connections available for NAT process with UDP Free IP The remaining IP address available for NAT process with UDP PPM so mmu as tr Pazo UDP Free The remaining connections available for NAT process with ICMP Free IP The remaining IP address available for NAT process with CP Ci potas ae tee 20 o ICMP The remaining connections available for NAT process with Table 5 6 NAT
143. RJ 45 PIN assignment Appendix A Introduction A 24 4P POTS E amp M interface The 4P POTS E amp M interface uses RJ 45 connector as interface the detail pin assignment as described bellow SG Pin 8 E Pin 7 4 ITIPDA TIP 4 Pin 6 BENET L TIFn RINGn RING Pin 4 IRINGnA RING 1 Pin 3 Mal M Pin 2 Mn SB Pin 1 Figure A 17 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Conncetor E amp M SIGNALINT TYPE CONFIGURE The 4P POTS E amp M Card can support E amp M I V type signaling The signaling type selected by Jumper and the configuration of any type is illustrate as below TYPE jump pin x fiz B2 x ump Pin x fiz fiz x e A 1 PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT16 JT1 355 AppendixA Introduction TYPE Il Camel 1 frame NENNEN A PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT16 JT1 TYPE Ill O NENNEN NN NN jump Pin ps o fiz ps umen ps jo fio oo Gere 3 men jump pin ps 2 fiz ps umon 23 jo fio so PIN ASSIGNMENT i 2 3 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT16 JT13 JT1 JT4 JT3 Appendix A Introduction TYPE IV Channel 1 Chame 2 Channel 3 Chama 4 o PIN ASSIGNMENT TYPE V Gems 10 a 2 Channel s rama A PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT7 JT6 JT2 JT16 JT13 JT12 JT9 JT8 JT5 JT1 JT4 B 2W 4W AND IMPEDANCE SE
144. SCSI Il D sub50 connector The pin out descriptions areas follows 1111 21 31 Receiver data port A B C D 2 12 22 32 Transmitted data port A B C D 3 13 23 33 Receiver timing and Terminal timing 17 15 DCE port A B C D 4 14 24 34 Data set ready port A B C D 6 5 15 25 35 Terminal timing DTE port A B C D 6 16 26 36 Data carrier detect port A BICID 8 8 18 28 38 Table A 24 4P V24 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment Figure A 14 SCSI II 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1011 12 13 ooooooooo o ooo O00000000000 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 15 DB25 351 AppendixA Introduction A 22 4 POTS Voice FXO FXS Interface The 4 POTS FXO FXS interface uses DBAA connector and are described bellow The marked symbol is reserved for future use Pr pmo e me pe Ne NO ll N C mz poo fu hs fue EM ro Ez o Pirincaa o RG2 ga mea n No Nc gs jo Be NC 8 es a f mpsa 86 PRINGGA 15 ines po fui o Table A 25 4 POTS FXO FXS Interface DB44 PIN assignment CONNECT DB44 PIN RJ 11 PIN mo a Channel TpRig Table A 26 Adaptor cable DB44 to RJ 11 x 4 PIN assignment 352 Appendix A Introduction Figure A 16 4 POTS FXO FXS DB44 to 4 x RJ 11 adaptor 353 AppendixA Introduction A 23 1P SHDSL V interface The 1P SHDSL V interface uses RJ 45 connector as interface the detail pin assignment as described bellow Table A 27 1P SHDSL V
145. TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Traffic Types IP Routing LAN IP Address 172 16 14 254 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 WAN Protocol Frame Relay Figure 5 27 Frame Relay WAN Encapsulation 281 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 4 5 5 6 4 6 9 6 4 7 Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over Frame Relay Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item LMI Type ANSI T1 617 Annex D DLCI No IP Address IP NetMask Remote IP NAT Filter 1 O 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable Disable Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 28 Frame Relay Encapsulations to setup LMI and DLCI Encapsulation The Router Module supports IP over Frame Relay encapsulation as described in RFC 1490 which is the method for carrying network interconnect traffic over a frame relay backbone It also describes a simple fragmentation procedure for carrying large frames over a frame relay network with a smaller MTU LMI The carrier also gives you the LMI Local Management Interface types The LMI is a set of enhancements to the basic Frame Relay spe
146. TU RIS Report Insert EJ nercury3638 J TJ8 Hercurv3638 J RJG receive non printing char EJ HMercury3638 TJi mercurY3638 RJi receive non printing char Figure 3 65 SDH Command Screen 177 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 60 SP Command Accommodate Mercury 3630 3630E B Purpose O Use for setup system protection the linear 1 1 protection switching mechanism can enhance the survivability of point to point and ring networks these uni direction two trunks shall be protecting each other Syntax SP mode B Param O O Disable protection in this mode when we disconnect any fiber all functions are in normal status 1 Auto protection in this mode when channel 1 was broke system will auto switch to channel 2 Even channel 1 was recovered and channel 2 won t auto switch back to channel 1 until channel 2 was broke then system will auto switch back to channel 1 2 Manual to channel 1 when channel 1 was broke system will auto switch to channel 2 after channel 1 was recovered and then channel 2 will auto switch back to channel 1 3 Manual to channel 2 when channel 1 was broke system will auto switch to channel 2 even channel 1 was recovered and channel 2 won t auto switch back to channel 1 4 Force to channel 1 when channel 1 was broke system will auto switch to channel 2 after channel 1 was recovered and then channel 2 will auto switch back to channel 1 D Force to channel 2
147. Table 5 26 Descriptions of Statistics of Monitoring menu 319 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 5 Device Control Menu Device Control menu allows you to warm cold start the system restore back to default parameter values and update the firmware You will find more detailed descriptions in the following sections B Warm Start This command will cause the system to restart and reload the new parameters It also interprets the WAN and LAN connections B Cold Start Cold start will reboot the Ch r module This command will be used if and only if you have updated the firmware B Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory default parameters B Firmware Upgrade This function allows you to update the Ch r firmware using a TFTP server Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restart Module ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 69 The sub menu tree of Device Control menu 320 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 5 1 Warm Start The Warm Start will restart the system and reload the new settings This command is available in the Device Control Warm Start menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restart Module restart lt YES gt NO TAB next gt forward lt backward
148. UX Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Press any key to return Figure 5 12 The sub menu to view current configuration Using current configuration submenu to diagnosis the type and status of each interface B Routing Table Chapter 5 Router Configuration Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Current Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Destination NetMask NextHop Mtr IF TYPE Protocol IP default 192 168 0 2 1 WAN US 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 O LPBK UI 172 16 0 0 255 255 240 0 172 16 15 254 O LAN UI 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 255 192 168 0 1 O WAN UI Press any key to return Figure 5 13 The sub menu to show the current routing table The Routing table shows all the routing information and it includes Static Routes RIP v1 and RIP v2 The next table will describe the fields KA eee Destination It specifies the IP network address of the final destination If 0 0 0 0 appears in the field this entry specifies the Default Gateway of route information NetMask It represents the IP netmask of the destination IP address NextHop It represents the IP address of the next router for transmission of the IP datagram to the destination network segment IF identify the IP routing to the corresponding interface 269 Chapter 5 Router Configuration E ee
149. WER CORD 1 P 110 230V 3 PIN 10A 125V 6 376 Appendix B Ordering Information Product Mai i A roduc bat Number Description ain Apto ANA ENO Code Equipment Equipment 90001 00060 DC DC POWER I P 48V O P 5V 6A Table B 3 Mercury 3600 Order Information 377 Appendix B Ordering Information B 4 Mercury 3820 Ordering Information p Main Option Annex Option Part Number Description paon sae ption A A TE L 3820 00010 20003 MERCURY 3820 O AS UNIT 20004 3820 BASE UNIT WITH DC ed Bad E1 4CB 00008 40002 MERCURY 4E1 land ENS RN 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 0 mem o sense pai 135015 00001 RJ 45 PHONE BOX T1 4CB 00008 40002 ERU 4T1 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 pep Ree MU N 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 sas PHONE BOX E1 4CU 0008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 ma mo 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 33010 00026 DB25 PP eun 378 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 09100 60047 BNC F gt F 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m E1 2CU 00008 40005 MERCURY 2E1 GENE er R 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M gt SBNC cable F 09100 60047 BNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m E1 2CB 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 33010 00025 DB25 M RJ 48 ih isn T1 2CB 00008 40007 MERCURY 2T1
150. X IP NetMask AUX Remote IP Address Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL gt right ESC abort TAB ENTER next field lt left Figure 5 57 console Sync External 192 168 10 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 2 AUX port Configuration AUX port Current status of AUX port AUX speed Selected the AUX port speed and data format AUX interface is using PPP encapsulation AUX Local IP The IP address of Local AUX interface AUX Netmask IP net mask for AUX port AUX Remote IP The IP address for the AUX port on a remote router Table 5 18 Descriptions of AUX port parameters Chapter 5 Router Configuration Dil Ovo WAN Setup You can setup the WAN parameters for your Ch router module in the Configuration Interface menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Interface Configuration lt WAN 01 gt WAN 02 WAN 03 WAN 05 WAN 06 WAN 07 WAN 09 WAN 10 WAN 11 WAN 14 TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC Figure 5 58 WAN Interface Configuration When selecting WAN interface the menu allows the administrator to configure the network parameters of the Ch r module for each WAN interface Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table Interface Configuration Interface Name WAN 01 Local IP Address 192 168 1 1 Remote IP Address 192 168 1 2 NetMask 255 255 255 0 Jj Con
151. X XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 4A 021 4A 022 4A 023 4A 024 4A 025 4A 026 4A 027 4A 028 4A 029 4A 030 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX xxxxxx FP 000 low latency frame integrity voice conversion loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Figure 3 57 XT Command Screen 162 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Example For 3630 3630E only o XT 1a1f112 e Cross connect port 1A time slot 1 amp 2 to Framer 1 time slot 1 amp 2 so the count is 2 o XT 1b 11 f2 21 10 e Cross connect port 3A time slot 11 20 to port 4A time slot 21 30 sequentially totally 10 time slots for each port so the count is 10 o XV 1a View port 1A time slot assignment table o XV f1 View port Framer 1 slot assignment table 163 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Hercury xt 1b 11 F 22 Hercury xu da ACTIVEZALH amp DAC TSODO xxxxxxx FO1 001 TSHBB XXEXXEX XXXXEXE TSH18 EXXEXXEX XEXXXEXE TSH24 ERXEXXEX XXXXEXE Part Bh FH1 HB EXXXXEX XEXRXEXE XXXXEXX XXEXXEEX XXEXXEX XXXXEXX XXEXXEEX HERENEN XXXXEXX XXEXXEEX EXEXXEX AAA AAA ARARALRA RAARAAA AAA AXAXARAA AARARAR AAA ARARADRA AARARAR i low latency frame integrity x unice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Harked timeslot is unidirection Hercury xt Usage Setup Connection Timeslot syntax AT mode porta tsa fp portb tsb Fp count Pa
152. XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX low latency integrity voice conversion loopback act s Dacs ch loss mark timeslot is one way cross combined channel Figure 3 61 XTS Command Screen 3 6 56 DCC Command Accommodate Mercury 3630 3630E B Purpose o For Setup SDH DCC channel mode network manager system can select E1 in band 21th E1 or SDH Data Communication Channel current channel of usage are D4 D12 512k 170 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Syntax o DCC mode Param Oo Mode e There are 3 modes for selection e O Disable the DCC for forbid the network management Default e 1 Force DCC in channel 1 to execute the network management e 2 Force DCC in channel 2 to execute the network management Example o DCCO o DCC 1 o DCC2S Mercury dcc B Set SDH DCC channel mode to Disable Mercury dcc 1 Set SDH DCC channel mode to Force Line1 Mercury dcc 2 Set SDH DCC channel mode to Force Line Figure 3 62 XTS Command Screen 3 6 57 FAME Command Accommodate Mercury 3630 3630E Purpose a For former DACS and SDH data transform there is an intermediary interface E1 framers that add header of the framer on dataflow to SDH and provide demodulate the dataflow back to 64K for device These 21 framers are F1 F21 and the configuration parameters are approximately same as E1 command Syntax o FAME port FR
153. XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Performance Monitor Elasped 0007 20 52 00666 00000 00000 0000000000 1 0E 00 0 0E 00 00666 00000 00000 0000000000 00 11 06 1 0E 00 0 0E 00 26452 00000 00000 0000000003 07 20 52 1 0E 00 0 0E 00 Alarm MAJ RCL Configuration LL yes RL no RCRC no TCRC no SIGNAL CCS FRAME FAS CV CV HAUL short Figure 3 44 STAT Command Screen 143 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B For 3630 3630E only a syntax o STAT port LAY lay o Param o None Show the status for all ports o Port Port identifier for the selected port o LAY Current RS MS HP Layer PM status for Line1 Line2 only 0 RS Layer 1 MS Layer 2 HP Later B Example a STAT L1 Lay 0 View the RS layer of SDH channel 1 status Hercury stat L1 Lay B TYPE STH 1 CLRITES ACTIVE ALH amp DAC RS Layer Performance Honitor Elapsed BHBB HB b6 00056 All HAHHA 1 HE HH B BE BH B BE BE 00056 04046 BBBH 1 HE B8H B BE BB B BE BB 04056 BBHBH 04008 1 0E 08 B BE BH 6 BE BE HAJ RS LOS HIN Configuration LLino RL no S1 88 HES ExXC disable DEG disable RS TIH HS RIS Report Insert HP TIH TU RIS Report Insert EJO Tainet3630 TJ8 Tainet3638 RJ receive non printing char EJ1 Tainet3638 t Tainet3638 RJt receive non printing char Figure 3 45 STAT Command Screen 3 6 43 T1 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E 144 Chapter 3 Configu
154. a voice multiplexer the Mercury system can perform A law u law conversion in accordance with ITU T Rec G 711 A law u law module requires The conversion can be performed on all the channels or on channels individually selected by the user for this purpose the user defines the time slots for which A law u law conversion is desired as voice time slots In addition to A law u law conversion the Mercury system can also perform conversion of the signaling formats Signaling conversion is performed when robbed bit signaling is used on the T1 trunk the signaling information carried by the robbed bits in the T1 frame is converted in accordance with user s selection to channel associated signaling CAS on the E1 trunk and vice versa The CAS information is inserted in time slot 16 and therefore G 732S framing is always used Since time slot 16 must be reserved for CAS it is not cross connected between the E1 and T1 trunks When CCS signaling is used e g in ISDN PRI access applications the E1 framing mode is G 732N and robbed bit signaling is disabled on the T1 side Thus A law u law conversion can be performed on voice time slots and time slot 16 of the E1 frame must be transferred to the T1 side to continue the signaling path Transport of T1 frame over E1 Transmission Facilities Typical T1 Transport Application Mercury Series L T1 E1 E1 Public Network Mercury Series T1 a LL Figure 1 3 Transport of T1
155. acility is for user to control Mercury Series Product via IP Network through its Auxiliary PPP port when there is no local LAN at the installation site B Asynchronous o Selectable data rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control B Synchronous o Data transmission support up to 128 Kbps Note When pressing the PPP Craft button to switch between normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode action will be in effect immediately when system has been restarted Please remember to press the RST reset button to initialize the system All the settings for Mercury 3820 will be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance 66 2 8 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3820 Rear Panel Description Mercury 3820 enclosure has 10 selectable I O modules and power supply socket in the rear panel Figure 2 7 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 3820 Each slot is marked with a label that designates the slot type and definition The built in router module is located in port11A and will occupy the TDM bus of port10A and share the same bus if E1 card is inserted into port10 Table 2 6 describes the function of each port Please refer to Section 1 4 about the compatible I O modules for Mercury 3820 Pr i ejejeje e 48V T ni E mii E sl E Figure 2 7 Rear panel view of Mercury 3820 Data port 1 to 10 Built in ch router module located on port11A
156. alarm detected or the alarm is cleared with system back to normal on the indicated port the following profile number will be executed automatically Oo ON When alarm is detected on the indicated port the following profile number will be executed automatically a no Profile number that is created by command LOGB LOGE at first Profile no 0 is disables the action when alarm is detected or cleared o SW Profile execution switch to enable or disable the CP command O SW 0 disable 1 enable o MAJ Major alarm code for detection o MIN Minor alarm code for detection o alm alarm code from 0000 FFFF hex refer to the following alarm table B Example 99 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o CP o View all call profiles a CP 1a off 1 on 2 sw 1 maj 0002 min 0080 e Enable the call profile function on port 1A when system detects the E1 major alarm RCL with code 0002 or E1 minor alarm RRA with code 0080 then profile no 2 will be executed On the other hand when the above alarms are cleared the system will run profile no 1 automatically Caution Currently the CP function is only available for T1 E1 Fiber SDSL card The trunk link should be connected to port A or C which can be set to derive the clock coming from another site if another Mercury will be receiving the clock from trunk link The switching time is less than 50 ms depending on the loading of the CPU Mercury supports 20 sets of us
157. andwidth demands of emerging telecommunications and data communication environment Mercury 3630 3630E provides SDH connectivity at the STM 1 rate of 155 52 Mb s Mercury 3630 3630E supports the standard multiplexing structure for mapping C 12 containers into STM 1 frames using the AU 4 structure as defined in the ITU T G 707 recommendation The structure is shown as below 18 Chapter 1 Overview E4 139 264 kbit s ATM 48 384 kbit s DS3 44 736 kbit s E3 34 388 kbit s ATM 6 874 kbit s EE 052 6 312 kbit s ATM 2 144 kbit s LT ATM 1 600 kbit s Ave ps DS1 1 544 kbit s Figure 1 12 Multiplexing structure of SDH standard B Support network topology Mercury 3630 3630E can be configured and deployed in E1 ring protection and point to point network architectures topologies by SDH It supports all standard interfaces such as E1 T1 V35 and POTS etc It enables a wide range of analog and digital services to be transported via SDH interface All communication between devices for OA amp M information is accomplished through the SDH Data Communication Channels DCC The use of DCC and the integrated network management capability of SDH is generation of SDH products implemented with multiplexer The in band management can follow two paths one is through with DACS cross connects to PDH and other is map to DCC channel to remote SDH equipment The path setting is D4 D12 and the data speed is 5 6kbps All timing is synchr
158. aphs The loopback is identified by the designation displayed on a craft terminal and front panel LED of Mercury The loopback supported by I O modules with E1 T1 2P V35 4P Data Fiber 1P V35 and RS530 module are described below Local Loop When activated on a selected port the local loopback connects the port transmit signal to the input of the receive path The test signal is provided by the equipment which is routed by the DXC data pump to that port This equipment must receive its own transmission 241 Chapter 4 Maintenance BER Test Port Ru Port Equipment Interface Unit DCX Interface Figure 4 1 Local Loop back This loopback test is activated by the LINK command B Syntax LINK port LL act 4 3 2 2 REMOTE LOOP When activated on a selected port the remote loopback returns the received signal towards the remote user equipment connected to the same port The remote loopback is performed by connecting the port receiving the signal after regeneration to the transmit path The test signal is provided by user s equipment which is connected to the remote end of the link and it must receive its own transmission Port BER Test Interface Unit DCX Equipment Figure 4 2 Remote Loop back This loopback test is activated by the LINK command B Syntax LINK port RL act Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 3 2 3 PAYLOAD LOOP Payload loopback shows as below diagram The incoming signal is looped back to the receive
159. are shown in the following table CIC 1 Shield 44 Transmitted B 2 Transmitted Data i 45 Transmit Signal Element A m Data A M Data B Request to NIA Receiver Signal Ee Timing A 5 Clear to Send A 48 Local Loopback 6 DCE Ready T 49 Request to Send B 7 Signal Ground 20 DTE Ready A B cdd A indie Signal Element DCE Ready B Received Line Signal Detector 23 DTE Ready vi eee pus Ext lipia Signal Element A Transmit Element Timing a d ue RR B 13 ewtoSedB Table A 12 Single Port RS 530 PIN definition for Mercury series 339 AppendixA Introduction A 12 X21 Interface Figure A 4 RS 530 X 21 Adapting Cable for Mercury series The X 21 interface for Mercury series only uses a 15 pin standard connector The pin descriptions are shown in the following table C RN ee Shield ET CEN EM ce po E O o i nas A ds Table A 13 X 21 PIN definition for Mercury series A 13 AppendixA Introduction V36 RS 449 Interface Figure A 5 RS 530 RS 449 Adapting Cable for Mercury series The V 36 RS 449 interface for Mercury series uses a 37 pin standard connector The pin descriptions are shown in the following table OEI Shield 20 Receive Common 1 6 Receive Data A 25 Requestto Send B 8 Receive Timing A 27 Clearto Send B o Requestto Send A 28 Terminal
160. ass mode with DACs transport capacity of up to 21 E1s And drops or inserts the relevant traffic at the intermediate devices This network structure when protection against failure is not of great concern and also when the devices are provisioned with low traffic density in the network But if with the point to point configuration one port carries the traffic while the other provides protection 22 1 3 1 3 1 Chapter 1 Overview Technical Specification Electrical Characteristic The on board E1 interfaces for Mercury 800 refers to ITU T G 703 Physical electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Line code HDB3 Peak voltage of mark 2 37V 10 75Q 3V 10 1200 Peak voltage of space 0 0 237V 75Q 0 0 3V 120Q Return loss 91 kHz 102 kHz gt 12dB 102 kHz 2048 kHz gt 18db 2048 kHz 3072 kHz gt 14dB Table 1 2 Electrical Characteristic of E1 The on board Ethernet interface for Mercury 800 3600 3820 and 3630 3630E refers to IEEE 802 3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection access method and physical layer specification with RJ 45 connector Output impedance 5 10 MHz 850 1110 Impedance balance 20Mhz 29 17log 5 10 Differential mode output voltage See 802 3 14 1 pulse template Input impedance o 10Mhz 8950 1110 Chapter 1 Overview Ratio Isolated resistor Leakage current At 1 5kv 10ma Table 1 3 Physical Characteristic of E1 B Ef Interface E1 4
161. aster invalid Secondary invalid Active internal Mercury gt clk 3a lc Master 3A Secondary lc Active holdover Figure 3 11 CLK Command Screen B Example for 3630 3630E only o CLK1A L1 o CLK1A L2 MHercury clk da 11 Master 1A Secondary Linet Active holdover Mercury clk 11 12 Haster Line1 Secondary Line2 fictiue holdouer Figure 3 12 CLK Command Screen for 3630 3630E 3 6 7 Clr Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Clear the status of the indicated port B Syntax o CLR port 96 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring BH Param o None Clear all ports status if no parameter o Port Clear the indicated port status B Example o CLR e Clear all status for all ports in Mercury o CLR3A e Clear port status for port 3A Mercury gt help clr Usage Clear Port Status Syntax CLR port Params port port identifier Notes clear all ports if no parameter Mercury clr Mercury clr 3a Figure 3 13 CLR Command Screen 3 6 8 Cis Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Clear the screen B Syntax o CLS B Example o CLS Clear the screen Mercury gt help cls Usage Clear Screen Syntax CLS Mercury gt cls Figure 3 14 CLS Command Screen 97 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 9 Craft Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Define the supervised craft port
162. at can support FXS FXO and 2 4 wire E amp M with changing the sub modules only The voice signal can be multiplexed as a 64 Kbps signal then transfer into a digital network 4 ports FXO voice card The FXS LL type module cannot be used with other normal FXS and FXO module for the Hotline application it can only use LL type to LL type module or use LL type module with E1 or Fiber interface which has the voice signaling Note The LL type voice module can only be used for Mercury 3600 Electrical Characteristic e Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM coding specified in ITU T G 711 e Analog interface FXO 2 wire POTS interface 32 Chapter 1 Overview e Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T 6 712 e Nominal level 10 dbm e Impedance 600 ohms e Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 db e Relative levels Input level O to 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 1db Output level 2 to 7 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 1db e otal distortion Comply with Figure 11 of ITUT G 712 e Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dbmO Single frequency noise Not exceed 73 dBm0O in voice band e Signaling loop start excluding LL type Module e Ring generation 235 VRMS reference at 25Hz excluding LL type Module e DC impedance Off hook 2300 Ohms at 25mA feed excluding LL type Module e Diagnostics test Full Digital loopback TSA loopback 1 KHz tone injection Timeslot Allocation e Each
163. at you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e F frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode o porta The indicated source porta o tsa _ The indicated time slot number in porta 169 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring a portb The indicated destination portb o tsb The indicated time slot number in portb o count Number of time slot should be connected B Example o XTS91a13a55 e Uni directional cross connection from port 1A time slot 1 5 to port 3A time slot 5 9 and the count is 5 So the destination port 3A time slot 5 9 can only receive the data from source port 1A time slot 1 5 but can not transmit the data to 1A o XV3a e View port 3A time slot assignment table Mercury help xts Usage Setup one way DACS time slot Syntax XTS mode portA tsA portB tsB count Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle portA source port identifier tsA ts number at source port portB destination port identifier tsB ts number at destination port count number of ts connected Mercury gt xts la 1 3a 5 5 Mercury gt xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 1A 001 1A 002 1A 003 1A 004 1A 005 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX X
164. ate hosts to be multiplexed into the transport identifiers of a single external address NAPT allows a set of hosts to share a single external address Network Any time you connect 2 or more computers together so that they can share resources you have a computer network Connect 2 or more networks together and you have an internet Node Any single computer connected to a network PAP Password Authentication Protocol PAP is a security protocol that requires users to enter password before accessing a security system The user s name and password are sent over the wire to a 399 Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION server there they are compared with a database of user account names and password This technical is vulnerable to wiretapping eavesdropping because the password can be captured and used by someone to log onto the system Port An Internet port refers to a number that is part of a URL appearing after a colon right after the domain name Every service on an Internet server listens on a particular port number on that server Most services have standard port numbers e g Web servers normally listen on port 80 Port HAN An interface on a computer for connecting peripherals or device to the computer A printer port for example is an interface that is designed to have a printer connected to it Ports can be defined by specific hardware POTS Plain Old Telephone Servi
165. ates this channel is under testing mode Off Alarm and DAC function are disabled Green System is ready oystem is under self testing while initialing Major alarm occurred in the system A TI gt U lt No major alarm Yellow Minor alarm occurred in the system No minor alarm WR Green Power ON Power OFF Press Reset the hardware by pressing this button Z Ol O Al AX O h TD li 0 lt O Q Press Show alarm history on LCD panel ALM o The ALARM relay conta ct is to extend the major and minor alarm of Mercury 3630 to the office audible and visual alarm system Refer to Appendix A for its pin assignment B LAN o The front panel LAN connector with RJ 45 type is for Mercury 3630 3630E s built in router module The 10BaseT Ethernet port follows IEEE 802 3 protocol and supports SNMP protocol B PPP CRAFT Chapter 2 Installation o The Front panel PPP Craft button can be selected to switch the PPP Craft port on the front panel to serve as a normal Craft port or an Auxiliary PPP port Auxiliary PPP serial interface operates in standard RS 232 V 24 DTE mode and there should be a RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB25M adapter when you unpack it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format It can be connected to the remote site Router and build up a WAN with PPP protocol This facility is for user to control Mercury Series Product via IP Network throug
166. ative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 203 Chapter 4 Maintenance Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error Informative alert P M Major Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip RXS Receive Elastic Problem at unstable Alarm Minor Store Slip clock source Detected Rx clock slip 1 day threshold FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable Alarm 1D UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold TXS Transmit Elastic Problem at unstable Store Slip clock source Synchronization connections to the link Loss Detected connector FAS error occur over critical limited 2 Check line and or lt 8 bits sec other communication equipment providing Only on E1 links the link to the specified operating with E1 module 67328 framing 3 Replace the E1 LL LLL LL LLL LL LL chapter4 Maintenance CRC errors Error Have the E1 link Alarm Minor detected in the E1 checked link receive signal lt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on E1 links operating with G7325 frame plus CRC CV BPV Code Have the link checked Alarm Minor Violation Bipolar Violation error Detected error
167. bandwidth of channel 4D B Syntax o XSLT sw B Param Oo SW O disable default 1 enable B Example o xslt1 Enable the extension slot 5 160 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help xslt Usage Setup extended slot slot 5 Syntax XSLT sw Params sw O disable 1 enable Mercury xslt 1 Extended slot is enabled Figure 3 56 XSLT Command Screen 3 6 52 XT Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The time slot assignment performs the cross connection between the specified ports and their time slot B Syntax B XT mode porta tsa fp portb tsb fp count B Param o mode There are 4 modes for selection e low latency Low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e F frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data Default e V voice conversion is to convert the voice signal and its signaling while the A u card is inserted e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode o porta The indicated source porta o tsa The indicated time slot number in porta o portb The indicated destination portb o tsb The indicated time slot number in portb 161 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring O O count Number of time slot should be conn
168. ble 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 1 14 Table 1 15 Table 1 16 Table 1 17 Table 1 18 Table 1 19 Table 1 20 Table 1 21 Table 1 22 Table 1 23 Table 1 24 Table 1 25 Table 1 26 Table 1 27 Table 1 28 Table 1 29 Table 1 30 Table 1 31 Table 1 32 Table 1 33 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 TABLES Electrical Characteristic OP Eleccion robin decile 23 Physical Cnaracterisie of E narra 24 Front Panel LED indicator sasssa 26 Vos Electrical Chidlacteristle eiusd eins Deseo rax a aN idea Dante uius 29 Data module compatibility Table ocoooccocccocncccncocnnccncncncnnnnnconaconanonanonanons 29 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 30 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 30 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 30 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E 30 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 34 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 34 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 34 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 34 Compatible software of Boot and Flash
169. ble this route column in Routing Table Table 5 21 Descriptions of Routing Table parameters 5 7 3 6 SNMP Setup The router module supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to monitor this device through the IP network Enable the SNMP function will activate the Router module as SNMP agent for Mercury Series Product These settings are in the Configuration SNMP menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface Routing Table SNMP SNMP Configuration SNMP Community Read Community public Set Community private Trap Community public Trap Destination IP Address1 IP Address2 IP Address3 IP Address4 IP Address5 Input ASCII SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field lt left right ESC abort Figure 5 63 The sub menu of SNMP settings 314 5 7 4 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Read Community To provide GET function with SNMP and GET am Community has a default of public Set Community To provide SET function with SNMP and SET Community has a default of private Trap Community To provide the TRAP alarm with SNMP and TRAP Community has a default of public Trap Destination To Indicate the specified IP host for alarm trap messages Table 5 22 Descriptions of SNMP parameters Monitoring Menu Monitoring Menu displays the current status for your Ch r module you will find more detail descriptions on later se
170. ce is the analog telephone service that runs over copper twisted pair wires and is based on the original Bell telephone system Twisted pair wires connect homes and businesses to a neighborhood central office This is called the local loop The central loop The central office is connected to other central offices and long distance facilities PPP Point to point PPP encapsulates and transmits IP Internet protocol data gram over serial point to point links PPP works with other protocol such as IPX Internet work Packet Exchange RIP Routing Information Protocol is an interior or intra domain routing protocol that uses the distance vector routing algorithms RIP is used on the Internet and is common in the NetWare environment as a method for exchange routing information between routers Router Server A device that connects two networks together Routers monitor direct and filter information that passes between these networks Because of their location routers are a good place to install traffic or mail filter Routers are also prone to attacks because they contain a great deal of information about a network A computer or a software package that provides a specific kind of service to client software running on the computers SNMP System Network Management Protocol is a popular management protocol defined by the Internet community for TCP IP networks It is a communication protocol for collecting information from
171. ce nies tnc das pisa asi Ear Oera 228 4P Data module alarm message ccoocccocccococcnocononcncnnnnnnnnonnnononanonanonanonaninnnennnnnns 230 4P V24 module alarm message occoocccccccccccncccncconnnonnconnnonnnononnronanonannnnnnnnnnnnnneninons 233 4 POTS FXO voice module alarm message eee 234 4 POTS FXS Voice Module cera S aieiai 236 1P SHDSL V alarm messages cer cerecerae nane a rsen ase annia enada 238 gt SR eee 239 The lists of the emulated terminal software c serrana 256 The craft port settings for Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 256 The operations of router module serras erre eee ren reanea 260 Description of Router Setting eee eeer eee ere erre nnns 264 Descriptions of the Field o coonccoccconcconcconiconcocnconncorononoconocononanonononononnncnnnnnns 270 Mercury Series User s Manual Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table A 8 Table A 9 Table A 10 Table A 11 Table A 12 Table A 13 Table A 14 Table A 15 Table A 16 Table A 17 Table A 18 NAT UMTS FCS SET
172. ceiver Operating Temperature O 70 C 49 Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 o ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS e Temperature Operation O C 50 C Storage 10 C 70 C e Relative Humidity Operation 096 9096 Non Condensing Storage 096 9595 Non Condensing a Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 127 to any time slot mapping a Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A Timing Control B Internal clock B Received for the indicated ports B Hold over B Clock mode switch automatically B STM 1 line clock source For 3630 3630E only Operation Environment B Temperature Humidity B Storage 20 C 70 C 95 B Operation 0 C 50 C 90 Power Requirement B Mercury 800 o DC 36 72V o AC 90 260V 50 60Hz 50 1 3 5 Chapter 1 Overview B Mercury 3600 o DC 36 72V o AC 90 260V 50 60Hz B Mercury 3600 o DC 36 72V o AC 90 260V 47 63Hz B Mercury 3820 o Power module 1 AC e Input voltage AC 90 260V 47 63Hz e Output voltage DC 5V tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A o Power module 2 DC e Input voltage DC 36 72V e Output voltage DC 5V tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A B Mercury 3630 3630E o AC Input voltage AC 90 260V 47 63Hz o AC Output voltage DC 5V tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A o DC Input voltage DC 36 72V o DC Output voltage DC 5V tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A Power Cons
173. cess and Cross Connect ApplicatiON ooooccccnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnnninnnos 12 1 24 Practional TI and El ACCESS Point s ccsscavecccscaseteascconcscssaassaaeedsn cs ysaanataancdancopstasatesoebensseeasanteascortese 13 1 2 5 T1 El Drop Insert and Bypass for Data amp VOICE cccoooooooonnnncncncnonnnnnononononononnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 13 1 2 6 TDM Modular Integrated Access Device occccccccncccccnonononnnoonnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 14 LZ ELA Channelze Roung Application seserian EEEE gehen os oe dava iara pads 15 1 28 TLEElI Fiber Ring Protected Application ssmirciacin rior 16 L29 Dam Protected zippHedllOllusenomersasqisvenisbiessaD EEE GEN MAR COSS arc nad 17 1 2 10 Broadcast Multicast AppliCati0ON cccccooooonoccnonccononnonoccnonccnnnnnononcnnncnnnnonnnnccnnncnnnnonnnnccnnnccnnnnnnns 18 Ed o DE ENTRO roo Ty Ty eC 18 1 2172 Baic SDHAPpP CAO 2 0 9 5959 0900099429995 9 090 0 9598 59 0000099 00 990 208 9 5 9 000900900 08 0 008908 080409 559005 20 LAXIS Topical LUE App QPIO rd andate Poe scan UAR EDU e STO nano 21 1 214 SDH connected ADpICaLOD uoo oe setti ose Pet SEI eda DEI Gre ODE Io sede EORFYE VERE oou RE RENE UNE Iori 22 La TECHNICAL SPECIICATON aa 23 LOFE Teon eCe PRU E UM 23 1 52 as A e o 0900 8 08909050 8000099 00 09 099 0 8 009 9988 50 Ls Operation Baiona nseries 50 Lo ME Poner R gure i e e E o O a try ereer rere Tt 50 1 35 o A 51 13510 ElchomaSnCHO SPC erre io NERm 52 P MODULE INFORMA NTON s
174. channel number for the first port of the 4E1 is 1A and the second port will be 1B and so on Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Time Slot Number O For each channel the data transfer speed can be divided into several time slots and each of the time slots is based on 64 Kbps throughputs Numbers O through 31 are assigned to the time slots such numbers are the time slot number Time slot number 0 means the first time slot and time slot number 31 will be the last one 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Starting Configuration When the connection is established by using terminal emulation or telnet protocol the welcome message will appear on the terminal screen There are two operating modes Monitoring and Access mode in Mercury Series system Press Help or after the prompt Mercury will display the help index of the commands in Mercury Series Product DACS Command Line Environment Version 1 88 Cc26Gopyuright Tainet Communication System Corp Tue Mou 29 11 08 30 2005 Un RHIMG monitor mode only use LOGIN command for access mode tf Mercury gt Figure 3 1 Mercury starts up screen Monitoring Mode Under Monitoring mode it only allows user to view the current alarm history such as port status and performance monitoring for each ports Any modification of the settings is forbiddance in this mode The Help message is shown below Mercury gt help Help Message
175. channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot O Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility Chapter 1 Overview Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot Version Flash Version H W Version 4 POTS FXS V1 03 V2 20 v2 0 Supported Table 1 11 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Flash Version H W Version 4 POTS FXS Table 1 12 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXS Table 1 13 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXS V1 03 V1 00 Supported Table 1 14 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXS V1 00 V1 00 Supported Table 1 15 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Caution If voice card was plugged into Mercury 3820 additional external 48DC power should be connected at PWR3 socket at rear panel of Mercury 3820 for 3600 and 3630 3630E additional external 48DC power should be built in the device inside And for Mercury 800 and 3600 no other external power is required and only support one 4P POTS FXS card 3
176. cification LMI includes support for keepalives a multicast mechanism global addressing and a status mechanism Your Router Module supports three LMI standards ANS T1 617 Annex D CCITT Q 933a Annex A and LMI by Frame Relay Forum DLCI The carrier gives you a specific DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier number for each PVC that is a path number of a portion the DLCI changes for each hop through the network not the address of the destination It is a logical identifier with local significance only Identifiers can range from 16 to 991 282 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 0 6 4 8 Manipulation Frame Relay via WAN Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route_Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over Frame Relay Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item LMI Type ANSI T1 617 Annex D DLCI No IP Address IP NetMask Remote IP NAT Filter 1 110 10 0 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 168 192 0 1 Disable Disable Figure 5 29 An example of manipulation Frame Relay DLCI parameter table allows you to configure the remote IP nodes Information of DLCI parameters should match those of the Frame Relay switch Manipulation Frame Relay ER Frame Relay via xDSL Modem xDSL Modem Router Module Frame Relay Frame Re lay Switch Network si xDSL Modem E 1 48 Frame Relay 2 a a cono le E UN Switch L Pow
177. ck if the LEDs show any abnormal display in order to verify the cables and cards are installed correctly and properly Especially for initial installation excessive errors may be caused due to B Incorrect configuration of either the Mercury or the equipment at the other end of the line B Faulty line installation which results in excessive noise cross talk or impedance mismatch especially under electrically noisy environments such as central offices so the use of shielded cables is mandatory If spare Mercury is available replace the one being used with the spare User must carefully configure the spare one to be exactly the same as the working one 4 4 2 4 4 3 Chapter 4 Maintenance If the substitution clears the problem then the original unit being replaced by the spare may be the culprit A good practice is to reconfigure the original one and swap out the substitute unit once more If both units show problems then the problem could probably be elsewhere Loopback by wiring Without a spare Loopback wiring is handy for diagnosis Thus a set of cable one for each of the interface types is needed for completing the tests These cable are wired so that signals from the Mercury are looped back by hard wire to the receive pin of the interface Replace the line with loopback cable Observe if the line is in sync If not then the Mercury has failed Next perform a PRBS QRSS test towards the line If this fails then the M
178. cnccccccccncoccncncnconcnnnnnnonnnoncncnanonanonos 160 NS COM MM ANG Cree ss np orte utin apesta 161 AT COMMING APTE 162 XT Command Screen For 3630 3030E errar 164 XV Command OCN necia 166 KGS Command SCEE assesseur Yaswktagus ic 169 AT SS OMAN OS CSC anadir 170 ATO COMMING SCI CN sia ti an RS Sa ista 171 KTS Command SCEE sirio 173 XP Command Screen ccccssscssscsssccssecescceescvenusenuscnusccusecurecsreceseceesavenasecurscurecars 175 SDA Command SCl CCN muaa diia 171 SDH Command Screen reter rrenan eee ene rea rna sena sre nne nnne nnne 179 EOS Command gt Msc pia 181 VCI Command SCCM stan iaa 182 YES SOMA WA SCI NT E 183 Voice Card Application DiagraM oocccoocccccccocncocncocnconnnonnnonnnncnnnncnononanonanonnnnononons 184 Fiber 2 Application DIAGE ali csi cias 185 Fiber B Application DiagraM oocooccocccoccoccccnconnconcononcnconnnnnonnnnnonnnnononnnnnnonnnnnncnnnns 186 Router Application Diagram eee eeeere erre ceara nnne 186 HR Lies NN 188 CP Command 1 1 fole COT asiaticas aaa 190 1 1 Revertive Protection with priority occoocccoccconcccncocnconncocnnononaconanonnnconncononons 193 N 1 Revertive Proction ser eer eee erre eee nennen nennen nnne nsns 195 P to P Protection 1 M3630 3630E ocooocccnncccnconccocncococonoconocononononononnnonnncncncnnnnnnos 198 Label state table eee eee era re aerea nnne nnn nnne nnne sre nsns
179. condary BEEN M Gad E1 ACB 00008 40002 MERCURY 4E1 RN RR RN 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE omm o Emm 33010 00006 DB25 M gt T1 ACB 00008 40003 MERCURY 4T1 Ed NEED 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE mU Em 33010 00006 DB25 M 3 F E1 4CU 00008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 750 365 Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 33010 00026 DB25 M gt SBNC cable F 09100 60047 BNC F gt PL S 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 F cable 1 8m E1 2CU 00008 40005 MERCURY 2E1 t e oUm o o 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M gt SBNC cable F 09100 60047 BNC F gt F 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m E1 2CB 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 33010 00025 DB25 M RJ 48 cati 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 5 F cable 1 8m e a PHONE BOX T1 2CB 00008 40007 MERCURY 2T1 ME seta 33010 00025 DB25 M 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE am o 33010 00006 DB25 M mmm LLLI 35015 00001 RJ 45 PHONE BOX Appendix B Ordering Information Code Equipment Equipment A MU 00008 40011 MERCURY A u m Boo o ooo 2P V35 00008 40012 MERCURY 2V35 CE od A 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M cable 1 ed 33010 00013 DB25 M V 35 M cable 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 4IDSL 00008 40013 MERCURY 4IDSL eres Boom o ooo X50 MUX 5 00008 40014
180. ct that TAINET agrees is defective and shall provide satisfactory proof of such destruction to TAINET TAINET is not responsible for Products damaged by misuse neglect accident or improper installation or if repairs or modifications were made by persons other than TAINET s own authorized service personnel unless such repairs by others were made with the written consent of TAINET THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE HEREOF INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL TAINET BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES If DISTRIBUTOR extends to its customers any additional warranty with respect to Products that is broader in scope than the warranty provided by TAINET DISTRIBUTOR shall be solely responsible for any and all liabilities obligations and damages resulting from the extension of such warranty TAINET shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages including but not limited to lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture sale handling repair maintenance or use of the Products and in no event shall TAINET s liability exceed the purchase price of the Products Software Products are provided as is and without warranty of any kind TAINET disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of me
181. ctions B Interface This field allows the user to view the status of each interface of Ch r module B Routing Table Displays current active routes for each interface B ARP Table Shows the ARP list for LAN interface B Statistics Provides a snapshot view of interface performance Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Status ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 64 The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu 315 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 4 1 Interface Status The Interface status shows current link status for each WAN link and this status is in the Monitoring Interface menu Monitoring Interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Iface WAN 01 WAN 02 WAN 03 WAN 04 WAN 05 WAN 06 WAN 07 WAN 08 WAN 09 WAN 10 WAN 11 WAN 12 Iface Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Status Link NetMask Remote up x 255 255 192 168 no prev 2 255 255 192 closed 0 0 255 255 no T s 3 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 down ela 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 closed 0 0 255 255 SPACE refresh page page gt page down Figure 5 65 The sub menu to view the Interface status ace To identify the Network inter
182. d mode T1 port Ll li Line driver Line Built Out LBO li 1 133ft T1 port RRL rr Start Stop remote loopback rrl 0 stop i Enable Disable the RRL function can drl 1 on be requested by remote site T1 port Signal Idle code sig 09h T1 port DET sig Signal Detect Number sig 00h T1 port CHG sig Signal Change Number sig 00h T1 port AlS ais AIS Alarm Indication Signal ais 0 disable Table 3 5 T1 Command ard e den O o o 010 90 oe olo T J D 8d E O O UG TI o mn o O z U E TI O O m O L 9 IDSL Card always in LT mode Description Default Setting IDSL port OP op IDSL card operation mode op 0 link IDSL port RDL rdl Request Remote Loopback rdl 0 normal Table 3 6 IDSL Command 85 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring FXS Card Description Default Setting FXS port R r FXS card line impedence r 0 600 Ohm FXS port DL dl Digital loop back testing dl 0 disable FXS port TTX ttx Teltex tone ttx 0 ttx off FXS port RING ring Ring frequency and cadency ring 4 25Hz 1 sec on E FXS port Tx direction relativc gain tgain 0 O dBr uin FXS port Rx direction relative gain rgain 0 O dBr NN Table 3 7 FXS Command X 50 Card X 50 port chan Setup X 50 card channel mod 0 Sync X 50 port chan SPD spd Setup channel speed 2400 spd 0 stop X 50 port chan Setup channel DCD signal dcd 2 follow Remote X 50 port cha
183. d Monitoring o Nx VCG identifier o FR Encapsulation foramt default is GFP o VC Virtual container Type default is vc12 o LCAS Link capcacity adjustment scheme o DD Differential delay o TIM Enable or disable report LP TIM Insert 2M AIS o FCS Enable or disable Frame check squence a SCRM Enable or disable Srcambling control Eth Port Settings o MOD EOS interface support 5 ethereal types 0 Auto 1 10M FULL 2 10M HALF 3 100M FULL 4 100M HALF o FLOW Enable or disable flow control GFP Settings o DELTA GFP per sync o PTI Payload type identify o UPI User payload identify LAPS Settings o ADD LAPS address field o CTR LAPS control field o SAPI LAPS SAPI field Trace ID amp Signal label o EJ1 Expected J1 For VC3 only o TJ Transmit J1 For VC3 only 180 o EC2 o TC2 n EJ2 o TJ2 o EV5 o TV5 o EK4 o TK4 Example O Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Expected C2 For VC3 only Transmit C2 For VC3 only Expected J2 For VC12 only Transmit J2 For VC12 only Expected V5 For VC12 only Transmit V5 For VC12 only Expected K4 For VC12 only Transmit K4 For VC12 only oetup EOS port1 ethereal capacity to 100 FULL Encapsulation format is GFP VC is VC12 EOS N1 mod 3 fr 0 vc O Mercury eos Usage Setup EOS Parameters Syntax EOS Nx MOD mod FLOW act FR fr VC vc LCAS act DD dd DELTA del PT oti UPI upi ADD bytel CTR byte SAPI word TIM tim FCS act SCRB act EXC ber
184. d save the above commands into the 10 profile with the name M800 o LOGL e List all saved profiles inside the System currently 122 3 6 25 Mercury gt help loge Usage Stop amp Save Append Profile Syntax LOGE profilef proname A profile Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 proname name of profile for identification A appending existed profile Mercury gt logb Start logging command scripts Mercury gt idsl la op 0 Mercury gt idsl 1b op 4 Mercury link 1c act 2 Mercury el 3a fr 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rcrc 0 Mercury clk 3a 4a Profile List Master 3A Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Secondary 4A Active master Mercury gt loge 10 M800 profile 10 save success Mercury gt logl 01 02 03 04 10 test chamber test demo test M800 Logi Command Figure 3 27 LOGE Command Screen Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose o Select the saved profiles while system reboots This allows supervisor to arrange for any of the profiles as the initial profiles using command LOGI when powering on or rebooting the system Mercury will load the indicated profiles and execute all commands following the power on sequence Syntax o LOGI profile 1 profile 2 Param o None Remove the initialized profiles while system rebooting o profile Example Specified profile number between 1 to 20 123 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6
185. d switch all traffic back to the original Loop1 Structure AA SS A A A A A A A ante A A A ene A e ereat i nente cr enner a ee ee Figure 3 75 CP Command 1 1 protection Actions on Port 1A Actions on Port 1C Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm off gt on on gt off off gt on on gt off Run profile 2 No Table 3 16 Alarm statues for CP command Run profile 1 No Configurations 190 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock o Mercury B e Clk 1a 1c oetup the master clock received from port 1A the slave clock is from port 1C a Mercury A amp B e Xc la 1b Cross port 1A to 1B e Xcs 1b 1c Uni directional cross from 1B to 1C e Logr 1 Run profile 1 when following profiles are created Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B o Logb e Starting logging command scripts o Xcs la 1b e Uni directional cross from 1A to 1B o Cp 1a off on 2 sw 1 e Enable the call profile facility on port 1A if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm are detected system will execute profile 2 The traffic will stay in Loop1 even if the alarm on port 1A is cleared Oo Cp 1c off 0 on 1 sw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1C a Loge 1 loop1 e Stop and save the above commands into the 1st profile with the name loop1 o Logb e Starting logging command scripts o Xcs 1c 1b e Uni directional cross from 1C to 1B 191 Chapter 3 Configurat
186. data rate The available speed is 1 2 Kbps 115 2 Kbps for 800 3600 3820 3630 1 2 Kbps 19 2 Kbps for 3600 B Syntax o CRAFT speed B Param o None View current craft port speed Oo Speed Speed identifier 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 default 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 B Example o CRAFT e View current craft port speed o CRAFT 6 e Setup craft port speed to 5 600bps Mercury gt help craft Usage Setup Craft Speed Syntax CRAFT speed Params speed speed identifier 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 Notes view craft speed if no parameter Mercury gt craft Craft speed 19200 bps Mercury gt craft 6 Figure 3 15 CRAFT Command Screen 98 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 10 CP Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Call Profile command allows user to achieve the protection architecture such as 1 1 1 1 N 1 protection When system detects the specified alarm Mercury will automatic execute the pre defined profile which includes the port parameters and the mapping table and switch all the traffic to those ports Now this CP command is available for T1 E1 Fiber SDSL G SHDSL card Please refer to Section 3 7 for example B Syntax o CP port OFF no ON no SW sw MAJ alm MIN alm B Param o None View all call profiles if no parameter o port Port identifier for the indicated port o OFF When there is no
187. dbm e Attenuation Frequency Distortion Figure 4 G 712 e Idle Channel Noise lt 65 dbmOp There are some states shows on Front Panel see below LED Display Description YELLOW ACTIVE M Lead amp E Lead are Active FLASH RED lsENSE M Lead detected current flow from E amp M PBX and send Off Hook Signaling to TDM bus E Lead receive Off Hook Signaling from TDM bus and Drive out to E amp M PBX REEN IDLE M Lead amp E Lead are Idle Table 1 4 Front Panel LED indicator ED SEIZE B 11 Interface 11 4CB T1 2CB o General Description e 20r 4 ports T1 card with 120 Ohm interface o Electrical Characteristic e Line Rate 1 544 Mbps 32 ppm e Line Code AMI B8ZS e Input Signal DSX 1 Jitter AT amp T TR 62411 e Framing D4 ESF Unframed 26 Chapter 1 Overview e Output Signal DSX 1 with O 7 5 15db LBO e Pulse Template AT amp T TR 62411 o Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping a Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A or C 1P SHDSL V o General Description a The 1P SHDSL V card is a signal port Single pair High speed Digital Subscriber Line SHDSL system and a high performance transmission technology is fully conforming to ITU T G 991 2 It supports CPE mode and CO mode application and select with software set lt supports multi rate trunk solution for Mercury 3820 and low cost service The data rate is directly with T1 E1
188. diagnostic 4 1 4 1 1 Status of Alarm Message Description This section provides information on the alarms generated by each module specifies their type and provides instructions for using the module specific diagnostic functions The Mercury maintains an alarm buffer The buffer can store one alarm event of each type and a maximum of 100 alarms can be displayed on the terminal This section will present the alarm messages displayed on the terminal by module and lists the actions required to correct the alarm condition To correct the reported problem perform the corrective actions in the order given in the table until the problem is rectified If problem cannot be corrected by carrying out the listed actions the Mercury has to be checked by qualified technical support personnel E1 Module Table 4 1 lists the alarm messages generated by the E1 module specifies their class major or minor type alarm or performance monitoring and explains their meaning Loss of 1 Check cable Alarm Major Synchronous connections to the link Local lost of connector multi frame synchronization 2 Check line and or alarm on the other communication specified link equipment providing 201 Chapter4Maintenance eee CV BPV Class the link to the specified E1 module 3 Replace the E1 module Receive Carrier Check cable Alarm Major Loss Receive connection to the link carrier data loss connector has been from the re
189. directional cross from source port 1A to destination port 1B o Loge 1 loop1 e Stop and save the above commands into the 1st profile with the name loop1 o Logb e Starting logging command scripts o Xcs 1c 1b e Uni directional cross from source port 1C to destination port 1B o Loge 2 loop2 e Stop and save the above commands into the 2nd profile with the name loop2 Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own criteria 189 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 7 5 1 1 Non Revertive Protection Description O Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Non Revertive protection Same as previous sections the data coming from port 1B will be sent to port 1A and 1C simultaneously but only receive the uni directional data from port 1A during normal stage 1B lt gt 31A 1B31C When Loop1 fails port 1A detects the alarm criteria which can be set by user system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and change the uni directional connection from 1A51B to 1C gt 18B then all the traffic will be transmitted and received though port 1B and 1C 1B 1C 1B gt 31A But the system will keep the traffic through port 1B to 1C and not revert back to original path Loop1 even if the alarm is cleared Only when Loop2 fails and port 1C detects the alarm then the system will execute another profile an
190. e 29 Chapter 1 Overview Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Hardware Compatible Flash 2P Data card 4P Data card version Software ROM v2 0 V5 04 4M Not support Supported V20 M51 0 4M Supported Supported Note Only Hardware version V2 0 and Software V5 04 or above supports 4P Data card and V5 10 or above supports 2P Data card Table 1 7 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot version Flash Version 2P Data card AP Data card Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Boot version Flash Version 2P Data card 4P Data card Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E Boot version Flash Version 2P Data card 4P Data card V1 00 Supported Supported Table 1 10 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3630 3630E B 4 FXS card 4 FXS 4 FXS D o General Description o 4 ports FXS voice card o Electrical Characteristic e Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM coding specified in ITU T G 711 e Analog interface 30 Chapter 1 Overview FXS 2 wires A B signaling bit will be provided Leased line 2 wires no signaling bit provided e Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T 6 712 e Nominal level 10 dom e Impedance 600 ohms e Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 db e Relative levels Input level O to 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 0 5db Output
191. e For Mercury 800 s PCB Hardware version V1 2 and Mercury 3600 Table A 4 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3600 For Mercury 800 s PCB Hardware version V1 3 or above Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 and Mercury 3630 3630E Table A 5 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E 332 A 5 AppendixA Introduction Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E On Board Ethernet port RJ 45 Table A 6 On Board Ethernet port for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 333 AppendixA Introduction A 6 Mercury 800 On Board E1 120 Ohm interface Balance RJ 45 Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Pins Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 9 Signal Ripe Ring Trip Wem Lo Lo o Lo Table A 7 On Board E1 120 Ohm port for Mercury 800 Appendix A Introduction E1 2 4C B U and T1 2 4C B interface The El T1 interface uses a D sub25 connector Pin descriptions are shown in the following table Wesel eem rene Gen SP transmit mom hs A PortD receiver DU o reos Paige 8 po 6 PortCtransmit 19 PorCtramsmit 7 bo ro Po transmita o 8 PortBtransmit 21 po 9 PortBreceiver 22 PonB receiver A potArcever Wm pere O AE a po o l1 Table A 8 4E1 4T1 interface pin assignment 335 AppendixA Introduction A 8 E1 2 4C B and T1 2 4C B RJ 48 pin definition for Interface san ion Receiver 4 nm s ransmit To Lp Table A 9 RJ 48 E1 T1 pin definition 336 Appendix A Introduction A 9
192. e channels per card at most Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source Can be set to derived external clock from received port B 2V 35 card 2P V35 O O General Description e 2 ports V 35 cards with data rate N x 64 Kbps N 1 32 each Electrical Characteristic e Refer to ITU T Recommendation V 35 interface 28 Chapter 1 Overview 35 ohms Rshort lt 165 ohms short circuit terminals to signal ground O O 0 44 V Vta tb lt 0 66V terminated by 100 ohm resistive load Table 1 5 V 35 Electrical Characteristic e Maximum Output Jitter 0 065 UI Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A or C 2 4 Data card 2 AP Data O General Description e Provide 2 4 data ports in DCE mode with software selectable to ITU T V 35 EIA530A X 21 interface Each data rate is N x 64 Kbps N 1 32 Electrical Characteristic e Refer to ITU T Recommendation interface Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A B C or D Compatibility Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot version Flash Version 2P Data card 4P Data card V1 03 V1 16 Supported Not Support Table 1 6 Data module compatibility Tabl
193. e network are physically connected via T1 E1 Fiber interface to a Mercury tributary card Mercury has T1 E1 Fiber connections to connect to the nodes and it also has special connections called Last Port and Next Port to connect to other Mercury units T1 E1 Fiber ring protect require a start node which is designated as Master mode all other nodes connect to the chain act in the Slave mode This mechanism will automatically distinguish all node connections If one of the links fails due to cable faults or problems the Main Ring can be wrapped to the Backup Ring Wrapping is a term that is used to indicate that the Backup Ring is being used in addition to the Main Ring The Backup Ring is connected to the Main Ring The Main Ring or a portion of the Main Ring is still being used Wrapping is only associated with the Last Port and Next Port connectors on the extremity Mercury units Ring will automatic recover when the faults link has fixed 16 1 2 9 Chapter 1 Overview Path Protected Application Path Protected Application X Failed 4 Normal Path 1 I I l I l l l 1 l 1 EN 4 Protected Path 1 1 Protection ER Q VA ys begs 36oc 0000 NNNM 7 444 NN NS oO Ff GRON NN NE d Micro wave Radio for Backup E High Priority NE sem X NA High Priority Y 1
194. e of domain names and their IP address e s DNS is the primary naming system for many distributed networks including the internet Domain Name The unique name that identifies an Internet site Domain Names always have 2 or more parts that are separated by dots Generally speaking the part on the left is the most specific and the part on the right is the most general DSL Digital Subscriber Line technologies enhance the data capacity of the existing twisted pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices There are actually seven types of DSL services ranging in speeds form 16kbits sec to 52 M bits sec The services are either symmetric traffic flows at the same speed in both directions or asymmetrical the downstream capacities higher than the upstream capacities DSL connections are point to point dedicated circuits which means that they are always connected There is no dial up There is also no switching which means that the line is a direct connection into the carrier s frame relay ATM or Internet connect system DSLAM A Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiple x e r is a network device Usually at a telephone company central office that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line connections and puts the signals on the a high speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques Depending on the product DSLAM Multiple x e r connects DSL lines wit
195. e using the current parameters B Diagnosis In the diagnosis menu you can use ICMP ping echo to perform diagnosis on your network Chapter 5 Router Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Configuration Monitoring Device Control Diagnosis System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table ENTER select TAB next left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 54 The main menu tree in Ch r module 5 7 3 Configuration Menu Configuration Menu includes most general settings and features for your Router Module you will find more detailed setting information in the following sections B System This field includes the Ethernet IP and AUX interface setup and also allows you to choose the WAN interface encapsulation and traffic type You can activate the DHCP server and SNMP agent in this field B AUX Port Set up your PPP encapsulation for WAN interface in this field You can activate the NAT and Filter feature here B Interface Setup the PPP local remote IP and its net mask You can activate each WAN interface here B TSA Time Slot Assignment for each WAN port B Routing Table Configure the static routing table and default route for your network in this field BH SNMP Enable the SNMP function in this field Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface System Configuration ENTER select TAB next left gt right ESC previ
196. ected with each other Default value is 1 fp fp is available in T1 E1 Fiber and IDSL card It is for user to assign 1 time slot to transfer and view the remote site Mercury s front panel LED indicators and Alarm status at local site via this assigned time slot B Example O XT 1a13a12 e Cross connect port 1A time slot 1 amp 2 to port 3A time slot 1 amp 2 so the count is 2 XT 3a 11 4a 21 10 e Cross connect port 3A time slot 11 20 to port 4A time slot 21 30 sequentially totally 10 time slots for each port so the count is 10 XT 3a 31 fp e Setup port 3A time slot 31 to transmit the remote site Mercury s front panel status XV 3a e View port 3A time slot assignment table Mercury help xt Usage Syntax Params Setup Connection Timeslot XT mode porta tsa fp portb tsb fp count mode L low latency F frame integrity V voice conversion I idle porta port identifier tsa time slot number portb port identifier tsb time slot number front panel number of timeslot connected default value of count is 1 default mode is frame integrity if not specified make sure you have installed A u conversion card if voice conversion mode is selected press uptright key to see remote front panel fp is available for T1 E1 Fiber and IDSL card Mercury xt la 13a 12 Mercury xt 3a 11 4a 21 10 Mercury xt 3a 31 fp Mercury xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A xxxxxx 1A 001 1A 002 xxxxxx XXXXX
197. ection guides you on how to use the manual effectively The manual contains information needed to install configure and operate the TAINET Mercury Series The summary of this manual is as follows Chapter 1 Overview Introduce the main feature and modularity of Mercury family Chapter 2 Installation Provide installation operation instructions to ensure working properly Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Detail the configuration and operation instructions Chapter 4 Maintenance Alarm message performance monitoring and loop testing function for diagnostic Chapter 5 Router Configuration Describe how to setup the built in Router interface Appendix A Physical Cabling Pin Assignment Describe the port connectors and interface information Appendix B Ordering Information Ordering information of Mercury Product Appendix C Trouble Shooting Provides brief list of trouble shooting tips Appendix D Trouble Report Form Allows user to submit equipment related trouble information back to Tainet Appendix E Glossary Mercury Series User s Manual Symbols Used in This Manual 3 types of symbols are used throughout this manual These symbols are used to advise the users when a special condition arises such as a safety or operational hazard or to present extra information to the users These symbols are explained below Warning This symbol and associated text are used when death or injury to the use
198. eeeeeeeeseeee 317 Descriptions of Routing Table of Monitoring menu 318 Descriptions of ARP Table of Monitoring menu occcoccccccnccccncccnconnncncncnnccnncnonaninoss 318 Descriptions of Statistics of Monitoring menu 319 Descriptions of Firmware Upgrade Table of Device Control menu 323 Descriptions of Ping parameters of Information menu ssese 326 RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter for Mercury 800 3820 Craft port 329 PPP port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3820 occooccccccconcccnconncocncococonoconocononoss 330 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 3600 re 331 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 S600 cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneenees 332 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E 332 On Board Ethernet port for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 333 On Board E1 120 Ohm port for Mercury 800 c oocccccnccccncccncccnccncnconcnoncncnanononononoss 334 4E1 4T1 interface pin assignMeNt occocccccocnccccnnocncccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanonos 335 RJ 48 ET T1 pin definition iie ot ttn ha E Yea tu netta Rh teus k Runs 336 SCSI II DB 25 gt V 35 CABLE PIN definition ooocccooccccocnccoccnccncnccocncconcncnoos 337 Single port V 35 PIN definition for Mercury series coocccocccoccccccnconccconnccanononoss 338 Single Port RS
199. efer to chapter 9 for more detailed procedures Diagnosis Menu Diagnosis Figure 5 19 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis menu 273 Chapter 5 Router Configuration There are two submenus included in diagnosis menu Ping and Information 274 5 6 4 2 6 4 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B Ping Diagnosis MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Ping Information Debug IP Connectivity Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Target IP Address 172 16 5 41 Repeat Count 5 Datagram Size 100 Timeout in seconds 2 5 of 5 0 01 seconds Success 5 5 100 Average Time 0 01 seconds Max 0 01 seconds Min 0 01 seconds Press any key to continue Figure 5 20 The Ping command for Diagnosis in Diagnosis menu When you encounter an IP routing problem such as not being able to communicate with a remote host or if you simply want to verify connectivity you can use the ping command to help you perform diagnosis on it B Information This option shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware LAN and WAN Configuration This chapter will show you how to configure the LAN as well as the WAN of your Router Module with PPP and Frame Relay connection Ethernet Setup You can have TCP IP setup for your Router Module at Configuration System menu 275 Chapter 5 Router Configuration TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP R
200. elected PPP Local IP FR This parameter identifies the IP address for local WAN IP NetMask The IP net mask for WAN when protocol is selected Frame FR Relay Remote IP This parameter identifies the IP address for the WAN port on LMI type FR A management protocol called LMI Local Management Interface provides information about the status of PVC to network access devices It defines management frames for monitoring the integrity of a link and whether a link is active or not Carrier provide DLCI number The specific DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier for each FR PVC which is a path number of a portion of the PVC the DLCI changes for each hop through the network not the address of the destination It is a logical identifier with local significance only Identifiers can range from 16 to 991 AUX Port Enable or Disable the AUX interface Local IP This parameter identifies the IP address for local AUX lt AUX gt interface 262 Chapter 5 Router Configuration IP NetMask The IP net mask for AUX interface lt AUX gt Remote IP This parameter identifies the IP address for the AUX port on a lt AUX gt remote router AUX Port Selected the AUX port speed and data format AUX interface Speed is using PPP encapsulation Routing Table Default In this field enter the IP of the remote node that is the Gateway gateway for the static route Device Control Use this field to reload the
201. ement of Mercury Series Product E g telnet aaa aaa aaa aaa 2000 aaa is the IP address of Router Module 255 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 9 4 9 4 1 Configure Router Module from a PC Access to the TCS can be done by two ways console port session or Telnet session Access to the TCS via Console can be done via using VT 100 compatible terminal connect to Mercury s craft port or via an asynchronous lease line modem If your router has been assigned an IP address access to TCS by establishing a Telnet session onto the assigned IP address of the router telnet IP address Access via Console Mode If you are configuring your router from a PC not a dumb terminal you need a type of communications software called terminal emulation software The PC uses this software to send commands to your Router Modem Table 5 1 lists some common names for this software based on the type of PC you are using PC Operation System 96 HyperTerm included with Windows software Terminal included with Windows software ProComm VersaTerm supplied separately Table 5 1 The lists of the emulated terminal software You can use the terminal emulation to change settings for the type of device that is connected to the PC in this case configure the software to the following settings so your PC can communicate with your Router Module The default password for Console access is root refer to section 5 6 2 to change your
202. er ill xDSL Modem xDSL Modem Router Module Frame Relay Switch Figure 5 30 Manipulation Frame Relay via xDSL Modem Chapter 5 Router Configuration Manipulation Frame Relay po df Frame Relay lal via Mercury 3600 s y di HE CSU DSU or Modem es pi pm Frame Relay Network CSU DSU 3 or z p Modem 8 Frame Relay A Switch Mercury CSU DSU csupsu dm 3600 r Frame Relay E Modem Modem Switch Figure 5 31 Manipulation Frame Relay via Mercury Series Product 5 6 5 Bridging and Routing Access Configuration This section shows you how to configure Router Module to act as Bridge perform Internet routing set up RIP 5 6 5 1 Bridging Ethernet Setup Bridging is based on the forwarding decision using the MAC Media Access Control or hardware address while routing does it on the network layer IP or IPX address Compared to routing bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory For efficiency reasons run bridging mode to support protocols other than IP on your network Chapter 5 Router Configuration Ethernet WAN IP 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 E Remote WAN IP 0 0 0 0 Router on Site A with LAN IP Site B with LAN IP 192 168 0 1 24 192 168 0 2 24 Traffic Type Bridging Traffic Type Bridging Lease Line dd m WO ddd xDSL Modem xDSL Modem Router Module Router Module Ethernet
203. er defined profiles each of them is 2k bytes and can save about 100 command sets 100 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help cp Usage Setup Call Profile Syntax CP port PFF no NO no SW sw MAJ alm MIN alm Params port port identifier no alarm detection alarm detection profile execution switch major alarm code for detection minor alarm code for detection profile number 0 disable 0 disable 1 enable alm 0000 FFFF hex Notes 1 view all call profiles if no parameter 2 available for E1 T1 Fiber SDSL GSDSL only Mercury cp TYPE OFF ON SWITCH STATUS 0002 0080 ENABLE 0002 0080 DISABLE 3A 2Fiber 0002 0010 ENABLE 2Fiber 0002 0010 DISABLE Mercury gt cp la off 1 on 2 sw 1 maj 0002 min 0001 Figure 3 16 CP Command Screen Card Type Major Alarm Minor Alarm Alarm code Alarm type Alarm code Alarm type ios oo me 4E1 120 75 0x0002 RCL 0x0002 RXS 2E1 120 75 oxooo8 oo ooo LOS RCL C X O O O CV BPV 1E1 120 75 C 0x0020 T 0x0004 0x0004 C 0x0008 C CV BPV 0x0010 CV BPV ooo ooo os RCL FAS RC EBT UAI RRA XS RXS FAS RC RBA RYA 1Fiber C R 0x0001 0x0001 RCL A 0x0002 RC 0x0002 RCL B 0x0008 0x0004 Frame Err 101 1FiberCB I OOo O X X x lt OIO O Oo O M Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 0x0010 ec o o o Ala
204. ercury is defective Note that if a far end terminal is available then the first test should be a local line Loopback for us to see if the line is good If all the tests with loopback wiring have been passed then the problem could be elsewhere Using BERT Test Set If a BERT Bit Error Rate Test set such as the WG PFA 35 is available then a comprehensive suite of tests can be performed to examine the conditions of the Mercury With a BERT each port of the Mercury can be tested individually The user must configure the BERT in exactly the same way that the Mercury is configured If all the configurations match for both sides and one of the ports fails then the corresponding module of the Mercury is defective Chapter 5 Router Configuration Chapter 5 Router Configuration This Chapter describes how to setup the Router interface that is already built in on board For free future product updates and information please visit our online web site http www tainet net 5 1 Specification There are two model of Router Module for Mercury Series Products B Channelize Router Module Ch R order number 000077 0003 o The Channelize Router Module makes fractional E1 framing properly and supports multiple WAN applications with up to 32 PPP links It supports PPP function with static routes only B Non Channelize Router Module N R order number 000077 0002 a Non Channelize Router Module it has the same configuration and similar a
205. eries User s Manual A 5 MERCURY 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E ON BOARD ETHERNET PORT RJ 45 333 A 6 MERCURY 800 ON BOARD El 120 OHM INTERFACE BALANCE ccc 334 A El 2 AC B U AND T1 2 AC B INTERFACE eene nennen enne enn nnne eene nnns 335 A 8 EI 2 4C B AND T1 2 4C B RJ 48 PIN DEFINITION FOR INTERFACE ecce 336 AL9 DE VOO INTER Cas 337 WII S Scias Cre pira dns 338 ACI ORSSSDINTERPACE seria dadas da sonhe 339 AZ IZAN TER 340 ASIS VOOS A AT INTERAC cit 341 AI CAUCA IN TERE CE ssl 342 A 15 X50 MUX 5C X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C INTERFACE cnn 343 Alo GAD SE NBR eX 344 ANT PS MINT EBC ccc cess deg cc os sess cae ace casas desea Mua M incon cue bodes MEE MU peas 345 Als ROUTER INTEREACO conato antenas 346 A 19 4 FXS 4 FXS D INTERFACE ccccccssssscccccccessecccccecessecceccecenseccesceeenscccesseceescccssaensesces 349 AD ZIAREDATA EN TERRACE RR DO RR RR ER TUE 350 A21 AZ APV 24 INTERFACE Em 351 5 22 4 POTS VOICE FXO FXS INTERFACE cistitis 352 29 1P SHDSL V INTERFACE soria centenas 354 A2 4P POTS E amp M INTERFACE scssscevennostevasnssacvonine svar oia oeste talca 355 APPENDIX B ORDERING INFORMATION cescccccccccccccccccccscsccees 359 B 1 MERCURY 800 ORDER INFORMATION eene enne nennen nne sse nin esse antes se nae essen nan 359 B 2 MERCURY 3600 ORDER INFORMATION
206. ess o Profile X profile number 1 20 o Proname profile name 3 6 30 Logr Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose Oo Select the profile and execute all commands within this specified profile B Syntax a LOGR profile 1 profile 2 BH Param o profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 B Example o LOGR 10 Run all commands inside profile 10 Mercury gt help logr Usage Run Specified Profiles Syntax LOGR profilefl profile 2 Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Mercury gt logr 10 1 Mercury gt idsl la op 0 Mercury gt idsl 1b op 4 Mercury link 1c act 2 Mercury el 3a fr 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rcrc 0 Mercury clk 3a 4a Master 3A Secondary 4A Active master Figure 3 32 LOGR Command Screen 127 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 31 Logv Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Select the profile and display all commands within this specified profile B Syntax o LOGV profile BH Param o profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 B Example o LOGV 10 Display all commands inside profile 10 Mercury gt help logv Usage View Contents of a Profile Syntax LOGV profile Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Mercury gt logv 10 profile 10 M800 gt idsl la op 0 idsl 1b op 4 link 1c act 2 el 3a fr 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rerc 0 clk 3a 4a gt gt gt gt Figure 3 33 LOGV Command Sc
207. et Ready Signal lact 1 signal active DSR act V35 port V 35 card Data Carrier Detect act 1 signal active DCD act Signal V35 port Rl act V 35 card Ring Indicator Signal act 0 signal inactive V35 port Clock type for the connected dev 0 DTE without clock V35 port INV inv TxC and RxC clock polarity Inv 0 TxC normal and Table 3 3 V 35 Command 83 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring E1 Card E1 port Fr fr Framing mode FAS Frame fr 0 FAS mode Alignment Signal or Unframed mode E1 port CAS cas CCS Common Channel Signaling cas 0 CCS mode or CAS Channel Associated Signaling Cyclic Redundancy Check on tcrc 1 Enable Cyclic Redundancy Check onircrc 1 Enable CV Code Violation or BPV Bipolar cv 0 CV Violation mode inne Balance 120 Ohm or Unbalance bal 0 Unbalance Short haul or Long haul selection ig Signal Idle code Signal Detect Number Signal Change Number AlS Alarm Indication Signal Table 3 4 E1command O O AJ AJ DID m O O o UO r TI EL O TI TI O Oo O O Sg TIM OA O 4 Un ues lira a e O O gt CD o a 84 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring T1 Card Description Default Setting T1 port CO co Line coding B8ZS Bipolar Unframed co 0 B8ZS coding mode or AMI Alternate Mark Inverting T1 port FR fr ESF Extend Super Frame DF also fr 0 ESF called Super Frame SF or Unframe
208. everely Error Informative alert P M oeconds Counting Major 215 Chapter 4 Maintenance Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Transmit Elastic Store Problem at unstable Slip Detected Tx clock source clock slip Receive Elastic Store Problem at unstable Slip Detected Rx clock source clock slip ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message report has been switch no action required off at specified port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message State OFF Alarm report and DAC no action required function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 4 V35 module alarm message 4 1 5 X 50 Low Speed Sync and Async Data Module Table 4 5 lists the alarm messages generated by the X 50 module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Loss of 1 Check cable Alarm Major Synchronous Local connections to the link lost of connector synchronization alarm on the 2 Check line and or specified link other communication equipment providing the 216 Chapter 4 Maintenance Class Message 15 ES 15 SES 15 UA 1H ES 1H SES Frame Alignment oynchronization Loss Detected FAS error occur over critical limited 8 bits sec Error Seconds Co
209. f Phone PBX Figure 5 1 Internet Access with Mercury 3600 m UB Mercury 3600 Router _ LAN I F E1 T1 ae TI ge Multiplixer SE uresa 7 J mi Primary tunnel Switching Analog Modem Network ISDN T A Auxiliary tunnel PSTN ISDN Network Analog Modem ISDN TIA Figure 5 2 Auxiliary PPP connection 253 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 3 2 LAN to LAN You can use the Mercury Series Product with Router Module to connect two or more geographically dispersed networks over the DSL loops future or E1 T1 TDM Time Division Multiplexer network via cross connect Router Module and serial interface Mercury with Router can also operate in Frame Relay network Typical LAN to LAN applications for your Mercury are shown as follows CSU DSU A Ea A Mercury 3600 Mercury 36 s J Router Router Branch Office LAN po LAN Mercury 3600 Router CSU DSU CSU DSU j E pam m 1 Router Router Branch Office cmd Office E Mercury 3600 Router Figure 5 4 LAN to LAN Connectivity via Frame Relay Chapter 5 Router Configuration 9 3 2 1 EMS Collocate Router Module with Mercury Series Product to provide the NMS Network Management System function for the administrator This includes B SNMP network management refer to Section 5 6 8 B Command Line management via TELNET Using UDP port 2000 to access into CLM Command Line Manag
210. face include LAN and WAN interface Link Closed The WAN interface is disabled No T S No access to any Time Slot on the WAN interface No prev Time slot access to the WAN interface is not available on Device Platform Err prev Time slot access to the WAN interface has error on Device Platform Up Link status of protocol in the WAN interface Down Link status of protocol in the WAN interface The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network 316 Chapter 5 Router Configuration NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part Remote The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network Table 5 23 Descriptions of Interface status of Monitoring menu 5 7 4 2 Routing Table Status The routing list shows current routing status and this status is in the Monitoring Routing Table menu Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Routing Table Destination NetMask Nexthop 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 2 172 116 0 0 255 255 240 0 172 16 8 119 SPACE refresh page lt page up gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 66 The sub menu t
211. figuration B Humidity 5 90 non condensing 9 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Feature of Router Module Your Router Module is packed with a number of features that give it the flexibility to provide a complete networking solution for small and medium size businesses or remote offices B Easy to Install o Your Router Module is designed for quick intuitive and easy installation B Frame Relay Support o Frame relay for N R employs a simple form of packet switching that perfectly suits today s powerful PCs workstations and servers Its high throughput and reliability easily copes with bandwidth hungry business applications B Full duplex Ethernet LAN interface o The Router Module with 10 Mbps auto negotiating LAN interface enables fast data transfer in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network B Protocols Supported a TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol a Point to Point Protocol PPP over HDLC RFC1661 RFC1662 o Frame Relay Multi protocol over Frame Relay for N R only RFC1490 o NAT Network Address Translation for N R only B DHCP Support o DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows N R to automatically assign TCP IP settings to workstations on your network Your Router Module can act as a DHCP server B NAT provide Static NAT and NAPT for Internet Access o The NAT feature for N R allows multiple user Internet access for the cost of a
212. firm new ID amp password Mercury secc 5 Test pn new ID amp password is confirmed and changed Mercury user Password User Mode Active Supervisor Normal Figure 3 42 SECE Command Screen Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Caution Once the Login ID and PW are changed please memorize them otherwise the Mercury must be sent back to TAINET for servicing before operation can be restored Forgotten ID and PW will be lost forever 3 6 40 SHDSL Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose Oo Setup SHDSL parameters B Syntax o SHDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr PSD psd TM tm count SlG act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig B Param o Port port identifier o MOD setup LTU NTU mode o TEST test function o FR frame mode o PSD power spectrum density a IM transmission mode Oo SIG signaling mode Oo SIDLE Signal Idle o DET Signal Detect Number a CHG Signal Change Number o Mod O LTU 1 NTU o Test O disable 1 local loopback 2 remote loopback LTU mode only 141 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring a fr O frame 1 unframed o psd O symmetric 1 asymmetric o tm O annex a 1 annex b o count timeslot count 1 31 LTU mode only o act O off 1 on o sig value between O and 15 ABCD bit Note e Remote loopback and time slot count S for LTU mode only e imeslot 0 is used to transmit signaling data in signaling mode 3 6 4
213. formative message report has been no action required switch off at port ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Informative message C OFF Alarm report and no action required DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 6 Router module alarm message 4 1 7 IDSL LT Module Table 4 7 lists the alarm messages generated by the IDSL module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Loss of Signal 1 Check cable Alarm Major Local lost of signal connections to the link on the specified link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data 221 Chapter 4 Maintenance Class Message Corrective Actions 15 ES 15 SES 15 UA 1H ES 1H SES 1H UA 1D ES 1D SES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severel
214. gurable Transmission Level Points TLPs for both Transmit amp Receive paths Note In Type II V the Common Ground must exist between PBX Side A and Line Equipment Side B Electrical Characteristic E amp M DC INTERFACE Physical Interface DB44 Connector Configuration Side B Signaling Unit Side or E Lead Originate oignaling Mode E amp M types I through V M Lead The current detector provides an impedance of approximately 3 3k Q about 14 5mA to signaling ground The On hook and Off hook state depend on the detector circuit SB Lead The battery through a current limiting that limit the current to 30mA E Lead The lead connected to SG Lead in the Type 2 and Type 4 SG Lead The lead connected to E Lead in the Type 2 and Type 4 ANALOG INTERFACE 2W INTERFACE Comply with ITU T G 712 Impedance 600 or 900 Selectable Return Loss 300Hz 600Hz gt 12dB 600Hz 3400Hz gt 15dB Input level O to 5 dbm Software Configurable in steps of 1dB A gt D Default Odbm Chapter 1 Overview e Output level 2 to 8 dbm Software Configurable in steps of 1dB D A Default 2dbm e Attenuation Frequency Distortion Figure 5 G 712 e Idle Channel Noise lt 65 dbmOp e 4W INTERFACE Comply with ITU T G 712 e Impedance 600 e Input level 14 3 dbm Software Configurable in steps of 1db A D Default Odbm e Output level 13 4 dbm Software Configurable in steps of 1db D A Default 2
215. guration can be performed on a per interface basis You can enable or disable RIP for each interface WAN AUX and LAN The following table describes the RIP option of your Router Module Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup RIP Option Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Routed Disable Mode Passive LAN WAN AUX Send Ver RIP 1 RIP 1 RIP 1 Recv Ver RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 Default Route O O O Horizon SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT Next Hop advertise No No No Sub Accept Yes Yes Yes Sub Advertise Yes Yes Yes Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 34 The sub menu of RIP function Routed Enable or Disable the RIP function for all interfaces Disable Disable the RIP routing protocol Enable the RIP routing protocol The interface can execute passive or active RIP When executing passive RIP the interface revises its routing table based on the routing update information it receives but does not advertise self routing information to other routers When configured for active RIP at specific interface that acts as a full router it not only listens for updates but also advertises its routing table information every 30 Enable Passive RIP Receive RIP packet only Enable Active RIP Receive and send RIP table Chapter 5 Router Configuration Se
216. h its Auxiliary PPP port when there is no local LAN at the installation site B Asynchronous o Selectable data rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control B Synchronous o Data transmission support up to 128 Kbps Caution Upon pressing the PPP Craft button to switch between normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode action will be in effect when system is restarted Please remember to press the RST reset button to initialize system All the settings for Mercury 3630 3630E will be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance 2 10 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3630 3630E Rear Panel Description There are 5 slots on the rear panel of Mercury 3630 3630E each slot can be plugged in with all Mercury series I O modules Figure 2 9 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 3630 3630E with 5 slots power supply socket and ground screw Each slot is marked with a label that designates the slot type and definition Table 2 8 describes the function of each port Please refer to Section 1 4 about the compatible I O modules for Mercury 3630 Figure 2 9 Rear panel view of Mercury 3630 3630E Table 2 8 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3630 Chapter 2 Installation 2 11 Installing New Cards Different module cards can be plugged into the Mercury Family units at the rear panel Mercury 800 and 3600 do not support hot swappable function As
217. h some combination of asynchronous transfer mode ATM frame relay or IP networks DTE Originally Data Terminal Equipment meant Dumb Terminal Equipment But today it is a computer bridge or router that interconnects local area network LAN in increasingly more 397 Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION intelligent ways Dynamic route Also known as adaptive routing this technique automatically adapts to traffic or physical network revisions Ethernet A very common method of networking computers in a LAN There are a number of adaptations to the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard including adaptations with data rates of 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps over coaxial cable twisted pair cable and fiber optical cable FTP File transfer protocol The TCP IP protocol used for transmitting files between network nodes it supports a broad range of file types and is defined in RFC 959 Gateway A gateway is a computer system or other device that acts as translator between two systems that do not use the same communication protocols data formatting structures languages and or architecture HITP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol The most common protocol used on the Internet HTTP is the primary protocol used for web sites and web browsers It is also prone to certain kinds of attack IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol Employed by IP hosts the protocol that reports their multicast group membership to
218. h the network Enabling the SNMP function will activate the Router Module as SNMP agent for Mercury Series Product Configuring SNMP The SNMP enabling function can be found in Configuration System Setting up the community and Trap Destination can be performed in Configuration SNMP Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 9 5 6 9 1 9 6 9 2 Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP SNMP Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Read Community public Set Community private Trap Community public Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 47 The sub menu of SNMP settings Router Module provides GET value with SNMP and Get Community has a default setting of public which is the standard SNMP terminology for password The default Community for SET is private Trap Destination provides the Alarm messages of Mercury to the specified IP host System Maintenance This section covers the diagnostic method that helps you maintain your Router Module System Status oystem status can be monitored under Monitoring menu This menu presents all system information to allow easy diagnosis of the problem For details of each field please refers to Section 5 9 3 in this menu Upgrade the Firmware Using TFTP Server Mercury 800 3600 3820 and
219. hat it failed wait for a time out and then start the download process again If the file transfer DOES NOT verify DO NOT power cycle or reboot the unit Go back and start the download process again If the file transfer DOES verify DO power cycle or reboot the unit New program code will be in use Press EMTER to continue download process ENTER select T B next amp left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 49 Firmware update otep 4 Start uploading firmware file Input the IP of TFTP server workstation and the firmware file name Continue to press Enter and begin uploads C AWINN Teystem 2 emd exe telnet 172 16 5 250 Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmuare Upgrade 1 Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IF Address 172 16 2 5Z TFTP Server File Hame fvi amp 88 hin Input ASCII SPACE ES DEL TAB ENTER next field left gt right ESC abort Figure 5 50 TFTP Server settings Step 5 Restart Router Module After file transfer is complete select Cold Start to restart the Router Module 302 Chapter 5 Router Configuration S CO WINN Tievstem 22 cmd exe telnet172 16 5 250 evice Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Reboot Module ENTER select Tf B next lt 3left gt 3iright ESC previous menu Figure 5 51 Restart R
220. hing within 1 inch 2 54 cm of the Mercury unit and do not place multiple Mercury units right next to each other Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 Mercury 800 Front Panel Description The front panel of Mercury 800 enclosure includes the status indicators on each interface module and buttons as shows on Figure 2 1 Table 2 1 describes the function in detailed LED Indicator Buttons Red Major alarm occurred in slot and 4ony Red Majo alarm occurred in this channel EM 2 S Power Power OFF 5 5 ULbLb bj 200 PPP CRAFT Em rear panel EA port change to Auxiliary PPP mode Chapter 2 Installation LED Indicator Buttons Description Release The rear panel PPP Craft port change to Craft mode ACO Press Alarm Cut Off button press to clear the alarm Reset the hardware by pressing this button Table 2 1 Front Panel Description of Mercury 800 The Front panel PPP Craft button can be selected to switch the PPP Craft port on the rear panel to serve as a normal Craft port or an Auxiliary PPP port Auxiliary PPP serial interface operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DTE mode and there should be a RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB25 Male adapter when you unpack It supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format It can be connected to the remote site Router and built up a WAN with PPP protocol This facility is for user to control Mercury Series Product via
221. ical links Mercury can also be connected to the E1 interface which may be dropped from the SDH network and set up to follow the clock coming from the dedicated E1 port 14 1 2 7 Chapter 1 Overview The Mercury has programmable timeslot assignment allowing data from the LAN sub E1 T1 port analog voice ports and data port to be placed into timeslots either consecutively or alternately Mercury also allows flexible timeslot allocation of the data port timeslots Each timeslot of the sub E1 T1 port is placed on the same timeslot of the main E1 T1 link E1 T1 Channelize Routing Application E1 T1 Channelize Routing Application Management O Headquarters Mis Mercury Series i i N SHE i SNMP Agent Figure 1 8 E1 T1 Channelized Routing Application Mercury with Channelize Router Module will provide the IP routing up to a maximum 32 PPP links with 64 Kbps data rate or any combinations with time slots cross connected to the DDN E1 T1 V 35 or RS 530 This will provide a flexible and cost effective solution to the specific requirements of the network management or small branch office routing solution Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 8 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application jessica a ee ee E Ha T1 E1 Fi ber Ring Protected Application i WokingPah A PrololonPah Figure 1 9 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application 11 E1 Fiber ring protection is the physical and logical ring topology Nodes on th
222. ice conversion combined channel Explanation of cross connect symbols The XV command is for displaying the cross connect table for the indicated port And following are the explanations of cross connect symbols that will indicate different actions of each time slots on that port B low latency a he indicated time slot crossed to another time slot under low latency mode when executing the cross connect command with parameter mode L This is in some case that the data transmit with lower delay and does not care about the internal structure of data B frame integrity 166 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring The indicated time slot crossed under frame integrity mode when executing the cross connect command with parameter mode F Therefore this will keep the data with original frame structure and the inegrity of the serial data voice conversion The indicated time slot crossed under the voice conversion mode This symbol will show while executing the cross connect command with parameter mode V for voice application loopback This symbol will show you the indicated channel is under the loopback mode The incoming signal is loopback to the received signal through the DXC data pump by executing the command XC port a port a refer to Section 4 4 2 Loopback function idle The indicated time slot is under idle state and does not connect to any destination Executing the cross connect command wi
223. identifier N1 N4 o SQ VC12 sequence number range is 1 63 TUs o startSQ Start sequence number o endSQ End sequence number B Example o VC12N112 Ethernet port 1 has 2 VC12 cross connection sequence number of EOS from 1 to 2 Oo VC12 N2 3 10 Ethernet port 2 has 8 VC12 cross connection sequence number of EOS from 3 to 10 o VC12 N3 20 25 30 35 40 Ethernet port 3 has 13 VC12 cross connection sequence number of EOS is 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 35 36 37 38 39 40 Marcury vol Usage Setup vcg cross connection syntax VCI2 Nx SQ startSQ endSQ Params Nx ethernet port identifier NI N 54 sequence number starts start sequence number ends end sequence number Notes 1 in VCIZ mode the sequence number range is 1 63 TUs 2 in VC3 mode the sequence number range is 1 4 TUGs Figure 3 68 VC12 Command Screen 182 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 63 VC3 Command Accommdate Mercury 3630E Purpose a Setup vco VC3 cross connection Syntax o VC3 Nx SQ Params o Nx Ethernet port identifier N1 N4 Oo SQ VC3 sequence number range is 1 3 TUGs Example o VC3N1 1 Ethernet port 1 has 1 VC3 cross connection sequence number of EOS is first channel Oo VC3N223 Ethernet port 2 has 2 VC3 cross connection sequence number of EOS is secode and third channel Mercury WC3 Usage Setup vcg cross connection Syntax VC3 Mx S Params Nx ethernet port identifier NT N4 SW sequence number
224. iew current ARP table IP Address The IP address of the learned LAN devices Ethernet This field lists the Media Access Control MAC addresses of MAC the learned LAN devices Table 5 25 Descriptions of ARP Table of Monitoring menu Statistics of Ch r module The Statistics provides a snapshot view of packet flow on all interfaces This table can be viewed from the Monitoring Statistics menu 318 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Statistics Iface RX octets pkts err pkts TX octets pkts WAN 01 1070320 15278 WAN 02 1070320 15278 WAN 03 0 0 WAN 04 1063241 10215 WAN 05 O 0 WAN O 6 WAN 07 WAN 08 WAN 09 WAN 10 WAN 11 WAN 12 1104464 15533 1104464 15533 0 0 1125411 10323 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OOOOOOOOOoOosS OsS SPACE refresh page lt page up gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 68 The sub menu to view the statistics of each interface Ifece To identify the Network interface including LAN and WAN interface RX octets Number of octets received by the LAN or WAN interface RX pkts Number of correct packets received by the LAN or WAN interface RX err pkts Number of error packets received by the LAN or WAN interface TX octets Number of octets received by the LAN or WAN interface TX pkts Number of correct packets transmitted by the LAN or WAN interface
225. in Sevice 3 SignalGround oS Table A 14 V 36 RS 449 PIN definition for Mercury series AppendixA Introduction A 14 A U Law Interface Figure A 6 A U Interface pL a 4 Major alarm indicator common point Major alarm indicator normal open point lt D O Major alarm buzzer common point Buzzer MAJOR ALARM BUZZER COMMON POINT MINOR ALARM INDICATOR COMMON POINT Minor alarm indicator normal open point Minor alarm buzzer common point Buzzer T 7 mo p 6 Bo Minor alarm buzzer common point Table A 15 A U card 8 pin terminal block Appendix A Introduction X50 MUX 5C X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C Interface The X 50 interface uses SCSI II D sub50 connector Pin descriptions are shown in the table bellow enzzz Transmite data a anazaa Receiver timing a SASIZSISS AS Terminal timing 6 16 2696 46 pata carrier detect THWBISIMT Qewtosemd BIB2BGOAS Reqestosend Wi9299949 Datatemmalrendy 10 20 30 40 50 Signal ground EN Table A 16 X 50 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment 6 54 32 1 HBEHEBEBHEWNWBBHEBBHEBSSBHBE HEBHSHBHH HBBHEBHBHEBESBHHEH Figure A 7 SCSHII 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 oooooooo oooooO oooooooo oooo 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 8 DB25 AppendixA Introduction A 16 4 IDSL Interface IDSL can be connected via ISDN U interface using RJ 11 connector Pin definitions are shown below Figure A 9 IDSL
226. in the following table They are RS 232 V 28 electric signal interface RJ 45 pin DB9 pin Female 2 1 7 3 2 5 3 None 4 NC 4 5 None 6 NC 7 6 8 Table A 1 RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter for Mercury 800 3820 Craft port 329 AppendixA Introduction A 2 Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 PPP port Interface RJ 45 to DB 25 Adapter Mercury 800 3630 3820 3630 s PPP port uses the RJ 45 connector and pin descriptions for the RJ 45 to DB 25 are shown in the following table They are RS232 V 28 electric signal interface RJ 45 pin Description DB25 pin male source 1 Transmit clock 15 DCE 2 Request to send 4 DIE 9 Transmitted data 2 DIE 4 Signal ground T Common 5 Received data 3 DCE 6 Carrier detect 8 DCE T Clear to send O DCE 8 Receive clock 17 DCE Table A 2 PPP port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3820 A 3 Appendix A Introduction Mercury 3600 Craft port Interface DB 9 Connector Mercury 3600 s Craft port uses DB 9 connector and pin descriptions for DB 9 lists are shown in the following table They are RS232 V 28 electric signal interface Description DB9 pin male Source Transmitted data 2 DIE Received data 3 DCE Signal ground 5 Common Clear to send 7 DCE Request to send 8 DTE Table A 3 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 3600 331 AppendixA Introduction A 4 Mercury Series Alarm port DB 9 Femal
227. ing Message Description 15 ES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES severely Error seconds Counting severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error seconds Counting 235 Corrective Actions Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Type Class Informative alert Informative alert Class Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Corrective Actions Type Class Class Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert P M Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor report has been no action required switch off at port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message State Minor OFF Alarm report and DAC no action required fu
228. ing Wrapping is a term that is used to indicate that the Backup Ring is being used in addition to the Main Ring The Backup Ring is connected to the Main Ring The Main Ring or a portion of the Main Ring is still being used Wrapping is only associated with the Last Port and Next Port connectors on the extremity Mercury units Ring will automatically recover when the faults have been fixed Syntax o RP no mode last next ts Param a no The number of ring protection 1 4 O mode Identify the role of Mercury acting on the nodes Normal mode will deactivate the ring protection function en normal default e m master 133 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring eS Slave o last Last port identifier for indicated Ring IN port o next Next port identifier for indicated Ring OUT port o ts e dentify the clock operating mode e 0 disable manual clock settings will able to assign the different clock source at slave nodes system by user himself e Or identify which time slot number to be carried with clock source 1 1 24 El 1 31 avoid TS16 if under CAS framing Fiber 0 127 This auto mode will guide the entire ring nodes to follow the same clock source from Master node B Example o RP 1m 3a 4a e Setup Mercury as the Master node in the 1 Ring and port 3a is the last port and port 4a is the next port Mercury gt help rp Usage Setup Ring Protection Syntax RP no mode last next ts Params mode n normal m
229. ing entered commands into the memory Stop and save into the specified profile number and profile name using command LOGE BH Syntax LOGB B Example o LOGB Start logging profile Mercury gt help logb Usage Start Logging Profile Syntax LOGB Mercury gt logb Start logging command scripts Figure 3 26 LOGB Command Screen Logd Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Delete specified profiles BH Syntax o LOGD prodile 1 profile 2 BH Param o Profile profile number between 1 and 20 Loge Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Stop and Save Append the command into the specified profile number and profile name B Syntax o LOGE profile proname A profile 121 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Param o profile X Specified profile number between 1 to 20 o proname The profile name for the indicated profile number o A Appending existed profile B Example o LOGB e Starting logging command scripts o IDSL 1a op 0 e Enable the IDSL port 1A to link mode o IDSL 1bop 4 e Enable the DL loopback testing on port 1B o LINK 1c act2 e Disable the alarm and DAC function and move into out of service mode of port 1C o E13afr 0cas 0 terc 0 rcrc O e Set E1 port 3A to CCS FAS mode disable the CRC on TX and RX port o CLK 3a 4a e Select port 3A as the Master clock and port 4A as the Secondary clock o LOGE 10 M800 e Stop an
230. ion and Monitoring O Cp la off 0 on 2 sw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1A Cp 1c off 0 on 1 sw 1 e Enable the call profile facility on port 1C if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 1 The traffic will stay in Loop2 even if the alarm on port 1C is cleared Loge 2 loop2 e Stop and save the above commands into the 2nd profile with the name loop2 Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own criteria 3 7 6 1 1 Revertive Protection with Priority B Description o Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Revertive protection with Priority which is attached in the following figure The data coming from port 1B through Main Loop has more important data with higher priority than the lower priority data coming from 1D through Protect Loop If the Main Loop fails port 1A detects the alarm criteria which can be set by user and system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and switch the higher priority data to pass through the Protect Loop At that time the lower priority data on 1D will be cut out System will keep detecting the alarm on port 1A if the alarm is cleared profile 1 will be reloaded and all traffic will be reverted back to original status This application will prevent any loss of important data and keep it always alive
231. ion and Monitoring Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc 1b la Cross port 1B to 1A back to Main Loop1 Cp 1c sw 1 Enable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1C Loge 2 PItoML1 e Stop and save the above commands into the 2 profile with the name PLtoML 1 Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc 1d 2b Cross port 1D to 2B switch to Protect Loop Cp la sw 0 Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1A Loge 3 ML2toPL e Stop and save the above commands into the 3 profile with the name ML2toPL Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc 1d 1c Cross port 1D to 1C back to Main Loop2 Cp 1a sw 1 Enable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port 1A Loge 4 PItoML2 e Stop and save the above commands into the 4 profile with the name PLtoML2 197 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to Table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own alarm criteria 3 7 8 Basic SDH P to P protection for Mercury 3630 B Description a Constructing the STM 1 P to P protection feature can provide an always alive transmission to prevent the failure on the specified link It can also provide the time slot drop on the multiple nodes of the P to P protect associated point B Structure Master Y Mercury 3630_A Mercury 3630 B 915 Figure 3 78 P to P Protection 1
232. ions Actions Type Class FAIL Fail System fail on Replace the SDSL Alarm Major register module Lost of Have the link checked Alarm Major Synchronous Local lost of synchronous Check the operaung mode on l the network equipment NTU on SDSL link LTU or connect with Xstream 1300 Replace the SDSL module Error Seconds Informative alert P M Major Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 226 Chapter 4 Maintenance Corrective Actions Actions Type Class Major 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error oeconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error Informative alert oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting lt lt lt lt lt v U AY v Ay U lt lt Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold CRC errors CRC Have the SDSL link
233. ions below to become familiar with Mercury Series Product This section will explain the basic concepts while configuring Mercury System clock Define the system clock to be Internal or externally received from the designated ports Here you can also select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the indicated ports If the port providing the Master clock fails the alternative port for Secondary clock will become active as a backup clock Only ports A and C with certain specified modules could be locked onto the external clock Refer to Section 3 6 6 for more detailed description and examples B Command Set CLK INT port port Tributary cards parameters setup the parameters for each tributary card such as the Line Coding Framing mode for T1 or E1 card physical signal transmission speed start and end time slot for V 35 card Refer to Section 3 6 for more detailed description and examples Cross Connection Establish the internal communication link between two ports This allows user to do the assignment for the indicated ports or its time slots There are two kinds of cross connection commands XC XT and XP XC is the port channel assignment command and is used to do the cross connection between two ports XT is the time slot assignment command it is used for cross connection between the designated ports and their time slot XP command is a usage for framer cross connects to SDH channel refer to Section
234. irement 40 Chapter 1 Overview Full follow X 50 division 3 20 8 bits envelop Structure so provide 48k 64 Kbps affiance e Transmission propagation Delay time lt 50ms e Noise immunity oystem can synchronize the trunk transmission link error rate less than 1x10 4 and keep synchronization when error rate less than 5x10 4 e Protocol ITU T X 50 V 24 V 28 o Timeslot Allocation e All 5 ports occupy 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot 0 o Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only mM 4 V24 card 4P V24 o General Description e 4 Physical ports RS232 I F with SCSI Il cable converter to 5 DB25 female ports but the 5th port is un used All 4 ports can select individual 64K time slot or combined few of them in 1 time slot for saving the bandwidth e Data Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps e Data format support Synchronous and Asynchronous mode e Synchronous Internal clock the outside equipment should follow Mercury s clock e Asynchronous Supports 7 or 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control mode o Electrical Characteristic Chapter 1 Overview e Data Transmission Interface Physical V 24 V 28 4 ports DCE external Null modem is necessary when act in DTE mode e RS232 interface IN TD RTS DTR EC OUT RD CTS TC RC DCD DSR e Test Access interfaces Loop on Network side LL Loop on tributary side RL e Temperature
235. is menu More detailed descriptions are as follows B Ping This command will help you verify the connectivity with remote host B Information This option shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Ping Information IP Connectivity ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 76 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis menu Ping command When you encounter an IP routing problem such as not being able to communicate with a remote host or if you simply want to verify the connectivity you can use the ping command to help you perform diagnosis This command is available from the Diagnosis Ping menu 325 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 6 2 Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Ping Information IP Connectivity Host Reachability Target IP Address 172 16 3 58 Datagram Size 100 Timeout in Seconds 2 PING 172 16 3 58 with 100 bytes of data Reply from 172 3 bytes 100 time 8ms Reply from 172 3 bytes 100 time 8ms Reply from 172 16 3 58 bytes 100 time 8ms Reply from 172 3 bytes 100 time 8ms Reply from 172 3 bytes 100 time 8ms Press any key to continue Figure 5 77 The sub menu of Ping menu Target IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric Address value used to identify a network and a local host on that network Datagram Size The payload size of TCP datagram Timeout
236. ity of the serial data default e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode a porta The indicated source porta a portb The indicated destination portb B Example o XCS 3a 4a e Uni directional cross connection from port 3A to port 4A So the destination port 4A can only receive the data from source port 3A but can not transmit the data to port 3A o XV4a e View port 4A time slot assignment table o XCSi3a4a e Cleared the uni directional crossed from port 3A to port 4A 168 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help xcs Usage Setup one way DACS port Syntax XCS mode portA portB Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle portA source port identifier portB destination port identifier Mercury xcs 3a 4a Mercury xv 4a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 4A 3A 002 3A 003 3A 010 3A 011 3A 018 3A 019 3A 026 3A 027 low latency frame integrity conversion loopback x idle Dacs ch loss mark timeslot is one way cross combined channel Mercury xcs i 3a 4a Figure 3 60 XCS Command Screen 3 6 55 XTS Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose o The one way time slot assignment command to do the uni directional mapping between a specified port and its time slot Syntax o XTS mode porta tsa portb tsb count Param Oo Mode e There are 3 modes for selection e L low latency is for some case th
237. ix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION ATM is designed to take advantage of high speed transmission media such as E3 SONET and T3 Authentication Proof that the information came from the user or location that repeatedly sent it One example of authenticating software is through digital signature Bandwidth This is the capacity on a link usually measured in bits per second bps Bridging Bridging provides LAN to LAN frame forwarding services between two or more LANs Frames from one LAN are forwarded across a bridge to a connected LAN Bridging works is similar to the way repeaters work except that bridges forward frame based on their MAC address CBR Constant Bit Rate An ATM Forum Q o S class created for use in ATM network CBR is used for communications on precision clocking to guarantee trustworthy delivery CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol is an alternative protocol that avoids sending password over the wire by using a challenge response technical Class A network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing scheme Class A networks have only 8 bits for defining networks and 24 bits for defining hosts on each network Class B network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing scheme Class B networks have only 16 bits for defining networks and 16 bits for defining hosts on each network Class C network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing
238. l DCD signal CTS channel CTS signal DEV channel device type INV channel clock polarity SIG signalling action LL local loopback RL remote loopback HC hook channel PH phase number sig 0 0 1 1 2 RTS state j 0 normal 1 inverted cts 0 force on 1 1ocal RTS 0 DTE 1 DCE act 0 disable 1 enable 0 no hook 1 2 channel ph 0 4 0 sync l async7 2 async8 3 async9 0 stop 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 0 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS 3 off X50 5C 5 channels X50 4C 4 channels X50 2C 2 channels ONLY channel 1 2 of X50 4C and X50 2C support async mode speed 19200 ONLY valid for channel 1 2 channel 3 SHOULD be disabled if channel 1 select speed 19200 channel 4 SHOULD be disabled if channel 2 select speed 19200 ONLY X50 2C support HC PH DACS functions Mercury gt x50 la 1 mod 0 spd 3 Mercury gt x50 la 2 mod 0 spd 4 Mercury gt stat la TYPE X5O 5C CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table TS000 XXXXXX Configuration System Status SYNC LOSS REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 LOCAL SIGNALLING RTS Channel Status 1 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync CTS On DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED 9600 LL No RL No 2 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync CTS On DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED 19200 LL No RL No 3 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync CTS On DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No 4 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync CTS On DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No 5 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync CTS On DEVICE DTE CLOCK
239. l clients workstations to obtain the TCP IP configuration at start up from centralized DHCP server The Mercury or Tainet WANpro product has built in DHCP server capability the DHCP function can be found under Configuration System menu Here you can configure the DHCP server settings for IP default gateway DNS server and WINS server Enable Fixed Leases Address Map allows you to assign up to 8 permanent IP leases to clients by entering the client s NIC Network Interface Card Ethernet Address MAC address 297 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP DHCP Daemon Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Default Lease Time in secs 86400 Gateway 172 16 15 254 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 WINS Server 0 0 0 0 IP Address Pool for Dynamic Leases Range from 0 0 0 0 to 0 0 0 0 IP Ethernet Address Mapping for Fixed Leases IP Address Ethernet Address IP Address Ethernet Address 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 Figure 5 46 The sub menu of DHCP settings MIA Default Lease Time This field specifies an IP address lease time for clients Secs It is base on seconds and the default
240. l to FXS card of Mercury 3820 at CO site B Structure CPE site CO site Mercury 3600 ADM 7500 ADM 7500 Mercury 3820 Venus 2804 192 168 12 254 192 168 11 254 02 168 124 10 time slots for Router connection 1 Softswitch 1a rip 52 168 114 DEM 7 Venus 2804 192 168 11 10 time slot carries CPE FXO signal back to CO site FXS po Portf Port2 1001 1002 Figure 3 73 Router Application Diagram B Configurations 186 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o CO site e Clk la Setup to internal clock e El 1a cas 1 E1 card that crossed to FXS cards should be set to CAS mode e Net sw 1 count 10 Enable the TDM bus sharing for built in Ch router with 10 time slots bandwidth to port 10B e Xt v 3a 0 1a 17 Cross connect the FXS ts0 to E1 ts17 e Xt 11a O0 1a 1 10 Cross connect 10 time slots for Ch router o CPE site e Clk 2a Setup the clock received from port2A e E1 2a cas 1 E1 card that crossed to FXS cards should be set to CAS mode e Xt v 3a 02a 17 Cross connect the FXO ts0 to E1 ts17 e Xt 5a 02a 1 10 Cross connect 10 time slots for router used 3 7 4 1 1 Revertive Protection B Description o Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Revertive protection which is shown in the following figure The data coming from port 1B will send to port 1A and 1C simultaneously but only receive the uni directional data from port 1A during normal stage 1B 1A
241. le channel E1 to E1 E1 to T1 T1 to T1 cross connection SIDLE Signal Idle code this is used to setup the digital idle code when connect to E1 PBX DET Signal Detect code this is used to check the ABCD bit code detected by system then convert to required code by parameter CHG CHG Signal Change code this is comes with DET when system detect the ABCD bit code defined by DET command then convert to the code set by CHG sig ABCD bit value between 0 to 15 EXC BIP 2 excessive bit error rate 172 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o DEG BIP 2 degrade bit error rate o ber O disable1 10e 3 2 10e 4 3 10e 5 4 10e 6 9 10e 7 6 10e 8 7 10e 9 a TIM Set Report LP TIM Insert 2M AIS o tim 0O Disable Disable 1 Report Disable 2 Report Insert o EJ2 Expected J2 from channel 1 o TJ2 Expected J2 from channel 2 Oo Str A input string and length less 15 character Example o FAME f1 fr 0 cas 1 crc 0 o Stat f1 o Setup framer fl to FAS CAS mode disable CRC Mercury FRHE F1 Fr B cas 1 crc B Hercury Stat F1 TYPESFRAHER E1 CLK NO RCTIUE RLH amp DAC TU LP Layer Performance Honitor Near End Elapsed 8B882 88 22 Far End Elapsed 8882 88 2 15 min 88221 888088 888008 A AAAAAAA 60000 GBODBOB AAAA AAAAAAAAA 00 03 41 1 06 00 B HE BB B BE BH t hour 62021 88008 AAAA 00 33 11 1 06 00 B BE BB B BE BB 07782 60008 AAAA 02 08 22 1 06 00 B BE BB B BECBB B BE BH 0 0E 00
242. le 4 3 Fiber Optical module alarm message Data Module 2 V35 Table 4 4 lists the alarm messages generated by the 2 V35 module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Loss of Synchronous 1 Check cable Alarm Major Local lost of connections to the link synchronization alarm connector on the specified link 2 Check line and or other communication Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Corrective Actions Class equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error lt U Major lt Major lt Major Major lt Major lt Major lt Major Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES S
243. le ve eue e assum o su Toren iu mere Te 75 3 3 STARTING CONFIGURATION ca T1 Sl OO MOE is EE DO o Nm TI 3 4 THE BASIC CONCEPT IN CONFIGURING MERCURY eee eene nennen nennen 80 DNS SS SUC IM CLOG NITE m 80 341 2 EpDHtdrs Caras A 80 Cr NES iue IMPR EE 80 e e oo o e Sa 81 3 5 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SETTING AND USER STORED PROFILES eene 82 2 6 COMMAND SET DESCRIPTION occooooccnnnnnoncnnnnnononnnnnononnnnnnnonnnnnnrononnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnninoss 89 BO op C Oi ANC aca o229053209259980230 002995588325 93009991820 096422022 09 220 09 900 00 0092000000920 0 08 9909 008 50000090090 88085 55 89 200 ADONLC OMAN een ne EUsiado T Ee 90 SO ME eI Mmm 02 EX MM eT E E ations 93 FOS A A E aan ete beast 94 ADA Pon o A 95 o A Fog G0 16 10 021 01 6 Ee en RR ND UR E EE NAE AE E A EE ERR NR 96 E MB incu Nn ee Sr OP EE ere ee canada rn eee 97 OS O CIE On NETT 98 IA NN 99 AD A E og e EU O EEE EIA 102 E Mo MID Date COn is cda 106 SPINE o APM e o o A A 106 Os Ge CE OM ANG RT 108 A o o er ee A re en eee 111 3 6 16 3 6 17 3 6 18 3 6 19 3 6 20 3 6 21 3 6 22 3 6 23 3 6 24 3 6 25 3 6 26 3 6 27 3 6 28 3 6 29 3 6 30 3 6 31 3 6 32 3 6 33 3 6 34 3 6 35 3 6 36 3 6 37 3 6 38 3 6 39 3 6 40 3 6 41 3 6 42 3 6 43 3 6 44 3 6 45 3 6 46 3 6 47 3 6 48 3 6 49 3 6 50 3 6 51 3 6 52 3 6 53 3 6 54 3 6 55 Mercury Series User s Manual Fiber C ORAR A
244. level 2 to 7 5 dbr adjustable in steps of 0 5db e otal distortion The ratio of signal to total distortion power measured with the proper noise weighting see table 4 ITU T G 223 e Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dbmO Single frequency noise not exceed 50 dbmoO in all hand Not exceed 3 dbmO in voice band e Isolation 1500 Vrms e Signaling loop start e On hook off hook threshold 5 mA between tip and ring in off hook state 0 5 mA between tip and ring in on hook state e Ring generation 38VRMS 10 overload protected 17 22 25 30 Hz 10 1 second ON 2 second OFF or 1 second ON 3 second OFF e Diagnostics test Local digital loopback 404 Hz 1004 Hz tone injection Timeslot Allocation Chapter 1 Overview O Each channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth that allocated on time slot O Clock Source Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility Caution If voice card was plugged into Mercury 3820 additional external 48DC power should be connected at PWR3 socket at rear panel of Mercury 3820 for 3600 and 3630 additional external 48DC power should be built in the device inside And for Mercury 800 and 3600 no other external power is required and only support one voice card B 4 POTS Voice card 4 POTS FXS 4 POTS FXS LL type O O General Description 4 ports FXS voice card The 4P POTS Voice card provide 3 different sub modules th
245. logy to extend the operation distance via 2 wire copper line o Electrical Characteristic e U reference interface according to ANSI T1 601 1992 ETSI TS 102 080 1998 ITU T G 961 standards 44 Chapter 1 Overview Two wire metallic subscriber loops Full duplex data transmission and reception basic rate access at 144K bit s 2B1Q block code 2 binary 1 quaternary at 80 kHz symbol rate Line protection Comply FCC part 68 Line Speed oynchronous 144K BPS Line Requirement 2 wire unconditioned unloaded twisted Line Operating Range Up to 6 0 Km over 26 gauge wire Up to 7 8 Km over 24 gauge wire Pass all the test for ANSI loop 1 15 Line Coding 2B1Q Output Level 13dBm Line Impedance Balanced 1359 Line Interface RJ 11 Connector X 4 Diagnostic Capability DL Local Digital Loopback AL Analog Loopback RDL Remote Digital Loopback Near End and Far End Block Error Count Timing Internal clock fsc 8Khz PCM 2 048Mhz Power consumption Less than 1 5 Watts Operating Temperature O 50 C Storage Temperature 25 C 70 C Relative Humidity up to 95 non condensing Timeslot Allocation 45 Chapter 1 Overview Time Slot 0 1 2 3 Msi Bi 62 Reserve D bis7 5 Table 1 27 IDSL Port time slot assignment o Clock Source Follow the active system clock of Mercury only B SDSL card SDSL o General Description SDSL card is a single port card with CAP modulation that works in LTU and NTU
246. meters Help Message Setup IDSL Parameters Start Logging Profile Select Profiles for Reboot List the Name of Profiles Run Specified Profiles NET Setup Network Device PM Performance Monitor SECC Setup ID amp P W confirm SECE Setup ID amp P W entry SIGIDL Setup Idle Signal STAT View Port Status T1 Setup T1 Parameters THRE Setup PM Threshold TIME Setup Time USER View User Status V35 Setup V 35 Parameters X50 Setup X 50 MUX Parameters XC Setup Connection Port XT Setup Connection Timeslot XV View Connection Table DROP Setup Add Drop Connection TS RP Setup ring protection RS530 Setup RS530 Parameters XSLT Setup extend slot5 for Mercury 3600 only NMS Setup NMS amp SNMP link port for Mercury 3600 only NOTE 1 HELP command for command table or syntax 2 port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A Mercury gt help clk Usage Setup Clock Source Syntax CLK INT port port Params port port identifier INT internal clock l view current setup if no parameter 2 first port identifier used for master clock source 3 second port identifier used for secondary clock source 4 valid port idenntifier are 1A 1C 2A 2C 4A 5A Notes Figure 3 4 HELP Screen 3 6 2 About Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Display the software and hardware version and released time for Mercury 800 3600 3630 and 3820 and the contacting phone number and e mail address of TAINET B Syntax
247. mode via 2 wire copper line o Electrical Characteristic LTU and NTU mode Line Coding CAP Line Speed multi rate 144 2064 Kbps Line Requirement 2 wire unconditioned unloaded twisted Line Operating Range 3 7 Km over 26 gauge wire 2064 Kbps 5 2 Km over 24 gauge wire 2064 Kbps SDSL interface according to ITU T standard G 991 1 Line Interface RJ 45 Connector Line Impedance Balanced 1350 Output Level 13 14dBm Timing PCM side fsc 8KHz clock 2 048MHz Power consumption Less than 1 3 Watis Operating Temperature O 50 C Storage 20 C 70 C Relative Humidity up to 95 non condensing o Timeslot Allocation 46 Chapter 1 Overview e User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping o Clock Source e The SDSL card that acts as NTU mode can receive clock from LTU o Compatibility Hardware version Compatible Software Flash ROM SDSL card 1 The difference between Mercury 3600 hardware version V1 0 with software version V1 xx and V2 0 with software version V5 xx is that only hardware V2 0 supports SDSL card and all other functions are the same 2 Sothe SDSL card is available for Mercury 3600 hardware version V2 0 and software version V5 00 or above Table 1 28 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot version Flash Version SDSL card V1 02 V1 04 Supported Table 1 29 Compatible hardware and software for
248. mote plug properly equipment Frame Alignment 1 Check cable Alarm Major Synchronization connections to the link Loss Detected connector FAS error occur over critical limited 2 Check line and or gt 8 bits sec other communication equipment providing Only on E1 links the link to the specified operating with E1 module 67328 framing 3 Replace the E1 module CRC errors Error Have the E1 link Alarm Major detected in the E1 checked link receive signal gt 2 bits sec Updatedonce per second Only on E1 links operating with G7325 frame plus CRC Code Have the link checked Alarm Major Violation Bipolar Violation error Detected error Occur over critical 202 Chapter 4 Maintenance limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second E Bit error The Problem in network Alarm Major E bit error rate of facilities the link receive signal gt 1000 bits sec Only on E1 links operating with 67328 framing Error Seconds Informative alert P M Counting Error oeconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert PM Major Seconds Counting Severe Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Inform
249. n CTS cts Setup channel CTS signal cts 1 follow Local RTS X 50 port chan SIG sig Signaling action Table 3 8 X 50 Command X 50 port chan DEV dev Setup channel device type dev 0 DTE type X 50 port chan INV inv Channel clock polarity inv 0 Normal type 86 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring SDSL Card Setup the mode of SDSL card mod 1 NTU Enable the loopback testing test O Normal Setup the Framing mode of SDSL fr 0 frame mode card Table 3 9 SDSL Command 2 4P Data Card type Setup the interface type of 0 N A 2 4P Data card it supports RS530A RS530 X21 V35 act Clear to Send Signal act 1 signal active t Data Set Ready Signal act 1 signal active t Data Carrier Detect Signal act 1 signal active Ring Indicator Signal act 0 signal inactive dev 0 DTE without TxC and RxC clock polarity Inv 0 TxC normal and 87 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring AP V24 Card Setup V24 card Sync Async mode mod 2 Async and its data format 8 n 1 data format Setup channel speed 1200 to spd 3 9600bps 19200 Setup channel DCD signal dcd 1 on when sync Channel clock polarity inv 0 Normal type V24 port LL act Enable local loopback act 0 disable V24 port RL act Enable remote loopback act 0 disable V24 port CC cc Enable the port combined function Table 3 10 DATA Command FXO Card FXO port DL act Digital loop back testing act 0 disable FX
250. n the Mercury family supports fractional E1 and T1 applications cross connection of nx64 Kbps channels For these applications user s data is automatically inserted into E1 or T1 frames using the minimum number of time slots Modularity The Mercury family is a series of modularized systems that can be equipped with various types of input output I O modules to provide the required interface for various types of applications For the current module types and their capabilities please refer to Section 1 4 Module Information for more detailed Chassis Types Mercury 3600 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E units use modular 19 chassis Mercury 800 uses a modular 9 5 chassis Each chassis provides various physical slots that can be installed with different modules by the user to obtain the desired configuration The Power Supply system can include redundant power supply module for 3600 3600 and 3820 Mercury 800 uses external power supply Mercury 3630 3630E do not supports redundant power supply on I O slot When redundant power module is installed they share the load current In case one of them fails the other takes over the full load without disruption normal operation User interfacing system consists of I O modules The number of I O modules that can be installed in a chassis depends on the chassis type 8 Chapter 1 Overview Handling of Alarm and Performance Conditions The Mercury Series Product provides indications rega
251. n DCD on RI off Time Slot 0 19 TXC normal RXC normal External Device DTE without clock TXC RXC inv 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 2 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM DAC CLK YES ACTIVE ALM DAC Figure 3 17 DATA Command Screen 105 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 12 Date Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setthe Date for Mercury Internal clock B Syntax Oo DATE yyyy mm dd B Param o None Display the current date for Mercury o yyyy Year 0000 9999 o mm Month 01 12 a dd Date 01 31 B Example o DATE e Display the current date in Mercury o DATE 2005 12 15 e Setup the date to 2005 12 15 Mercury date 2665 12 15 Hercuru date 2405 12 15 16 52 26 Figure 3 18 Date Command Screen 3 6 13 Drop Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The DROP command always comes with command RP refer to section 3 6 35 RP Command and it works in the Ring Protection mode to drop the required time slots to the associated point 106 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Syntax o DROP mode porta tsa portb tsb portd tsd count Param o mode Designate the data cross connect transmit mode omitted for frame integrity as default value Idle for sending idle code on the assign time slots e L low latency e F frame integrity default e V voice conversion e idle o porta Identify the Ring In port last port o tsa Desig
252. n Router rear panel can help you with diagnosis of the WAN port PPP link and see whether it is successfully connected and whether PPP protocol is up You can also check it from Monitoring Menu Current Config to make sure the PPP link is UP If you have set up the physical WAN port connection and configured the PPP encapsulation with proper static but the WAN LED goes out and the Current Config shows WAN status is down then you have to focus on both the setting of PPP encapsulation and the physical connection When WAN LED is lit it means Serial is up and protocol is up The following are the examples of WAN PPP setting Ethernet Site A with WAN IP Site B with WAN IP 10 0 0 1 30 10 0 0 2 30 di uam Router Module Figure 5 23 WAN port Point to Point connection The above diagram is the WAN PPP link configuration of your Router Module could be like follow Site A 10 0 0 1 30 Site B 10 0 0 2 30 Traffic Types IP Routing Traffic Types IP Routing Encapsulate Local IP 10 0 0 1 Encapsulate Local IP 110 0 0 2 PPP address PPP address Net Mask 255 255 255 Net Mask 255 255 255 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 7 Example of PPP settings 1 The standard PPP encapsulate can be set up as above table or you can assign 277 Chapter 5 Router Configuration the IP to the remote site Site A 10 0 0 1 30 Site B 10 0 0 2 30 Traffic Types 5 6 4 2 1 IP Routing
253. n the signaling frame in parallel with the change in channel numbers Table 4 1 lists the alarm message generated by the E1 module specifies their class major or minor type alarm or performance monitoring and explains their meaning The Mercury systems can be used as programmable T1 E1 converters A typical system configuration is shown in Figure 1 4 To perform the required conversion the Mercury system must include both T1 module and E1 modules and the time slots must be routed as required between a T1 port and an E1 port 12 Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 4 Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point Mercury Series 7 6 PP 2 m e Figure 1 5 Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point The Mercury system can be used to provide an access point for fractional T1 and E1 services as a replacement for dedicated fractional CSU DSU units For this service the Mercury system must include a High Speed Data Port RS530 1P V35 2P V35 or 4P Data that connects to the user s equipment Those modules support connection at rates of nx64 Kbps where n 1 to 31 for RS530 and 1P V35 module 64 to 1984 Kbps respectively and n 1 to 32 for 2P V35 and 4P Data module 64 Kbps to 2048 Kbps The user s data stream is then routed to the desired time slots of a selected E1 or T1 port 1 2 5 T1 E1 Drop Insert and Bypass for Data amp Voice Mercury Series 2 c a 5 fia Location A Location C n
254. n this field o You can activate the NAT and Filter feature in here B FR o Setup the Frame Relay encapsulation for WAN interface in this field B HIP o Router Module supports both RIP version 1 and version 2 routing protocol for your LAN WAN and AUX interfaces B Route Table a Configure the static routing table and default route for your network in this field B Security a This field allows you to change the Username and Password for Console and TELNET access B NAT o Setup the Static NAT and NAPT in this field BH SNMP o Enable the SNMP function in this field B DHCP o Setup the DHCP Server in this field B Filter o Generate your Routing Access List in this field 267 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 9 6 3 3 Monitoring menu Monitoring Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP Figure 5 11 The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu Current Config Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Current Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item LAN Status UP LAN IP Address 172 16 15 254 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 Active MAC Address 0090bb910521 WAN Type Status PPP UP WAN Local IP Address 192 168 0 1 WAN IP NetMask 255 255 255 255 WAN Remote IP Address 192 168 0 2 AUX Status PPP DOWN AUX Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 AUX IP NetMask 0 0 0 0 A
255. nal support PPP Support PPP Support PPP mode mode mode Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Telnet Ethernet Telnet Telnet SNMP Telnet SNMP 3600 Optional Router Router C module provides 5 Chapter 1 Overview M800 M3600 3600 M3630 3630E Mercury 3820 Ethernet for NENNEN mise a Built in SNMP 3600 Built in Built in SNMP Built in SNMP Agent SNMP Agent Agent Agent In band In band In band In band management management via management management via DSO DSO upto 16 via DSO upto via DSO up to remote nodes 16 remote 16 remote Out band nodes nodes management Out band via Ethernet management via Out band Out band Ethernet management management via Ethernet via Ethernet 3600 Optional Router Router C module works as SNMP Agent 2 port E1 Interface Long Short haul configurable Not Supported Supported Supported Supported Insert I O Insert I O Insert I O Open case to Modules without Modules without Modules without mount I O open case open case open case modules 6 Not Supported Supported 3600 Modules are Mercury 3600 independent 3600 to others 3820 3630 3630E use same Mercury 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E use same modules Built in AC or DC Built in AC or power adapter power supply Redundant power module optional Power Supply meee Operation Operation temp Operation temp 0 O 50C temp 0 50C 50 C Storage temp
256. nate the start time slot of Ring In port o portb Identify the Ring Out port next port o tsb Designate the start time slot of Ring Out port o portd Identify the drop port whose connect to DTE Drop port could be any module of Mercury o tsd Designate the start time slot of drop port o count Number of continuity time slot omitted will be used as default value of 1 time slot Example o drop1a11c11b130 e drop port1a ts1 30 port1c ts1 30 to port1b ts1 30 107 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 14 Mercury gt help drop Usage Setup Add drop Connection ts Syntax DROP mode porta tsa portb tsb portd tsd count Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle porta porta identifier a gt d tsa porta time slot number portb portb identifier b gt a tsb portb time slot number portd port drop identifier d gt b tsd port drop time slot number count number of time slot connected Notes 1 default value of count is 1 2 default mode is frame integrity if not specified Mercury gt drop la 1 1c 1 1b 1 30 Mercury gt stat la Cross Connect Table TS000 1C 000 1C 001 1C 002 1C 003 1C 004 1C 005 1C 006 1C 007 TS008 1C 008 1C 009 1C 010 1C 011 1C 012 1C 013 1C 014 1C 015 TS016 1C 016 1C 017 1C 018 1C 019 1C 020 1C 021 1C 022 1C 023 TS024 1C 024 1C 025 1C 026 1C 027 1C 028 1C 029 1C 030 RP CLK Figure 3 19 DROP Command Screen E1 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E P
257. nation IP MASK Bit Protocol Port No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALL 0 Permit Any Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 45 The sub menu of Incoming Filter 5 6 7 5 6 7 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The bottom row of filter access list indicates the ac cess mode For example if you have set this field to Permit Any for Incoming Filter then the corresponding serial port WAN will allow everything except IP packets labeled Yes on the list of incoming filter table The same logic applies to the Deny Any command IP Filter table allows you to configure the specified field Leaving the field to the default 0 or 0 0 0 0 means all included or don t care DHCP Configuration This section discusses the DHCP application and SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for network management and monitoring DHCP Configuration Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is used for the dynamic distribution of IP address to client machines which allows the individua
258. ncnrnnnrononononononnnnnnnnnonnncnronnenanenons 132 RP Command SOLO ascii 134 RS530 Command Screen occcncccococococonoconcocncncnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrncnnonanennos 136 SDSL COND SO SON sms NEHME DRM CRIME DI EPI HIM CINE ELI PLE MM EE 138 SECC Command SC Nissan oia 139 SECE Command SGre rca ri 140 SIGIDL Command SCEN sisa sio 142 STAT Command SC Nui 143 STAL Command S CSO e A 144 Command SrCe RUNE UU E 146 THRE Command OCN sapata coisa dinda RU ERR eX pi EEEN Si 148 TIME COMMAND CIC Na sao oasis en 149 USER Command Oceana 149 V24 Command Screen sesssssesssessessseseee ese rea es nsn sse sse sse sn senseri n anis 152 Voo Command Sres enen adas ER SM RCM dE UNE 155 Mercury Series User s Manual Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 X 50 Concept dada nana 156 X 50 Command Screen coccocccncccocccocccoccconcconccnncnnncnonnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnons 158 KE COMMANG SCI E NT TIU 159 XC Command Screen For 3630 3630E coocccco
259. nction has been switch off at specified port Table 4 13 4 POTS FXS Voice Module 4 1 14 1P SHDSL V Module Table 4 14 lists the alarm messages generated by the 1P SHDSL V module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Loss of signal 1 Check cable Alarm Major connections to the link connector 2 Check the operating mode on the network equipment NTU LTU or connect with Scorpio 1400 3 Replace the SHDSL module 236 over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert oeconds Counting oeverely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Error Seconds Informative alert Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Counting Unavailable 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds counting Severely Error Seconds Second over 1 day threshold DIS Disconnect SHDSL Check the operating Alarm card persisted on the mode on the network 237
260. nd Version Controls the version s of RIP advertisements Available with active RIP only OFF Disable the version s of RIP advertisement RIP 1 Enable the RIP version 1 advertisement RIP 2 Enable the RIP version 2 advertisement Reveive Version Controls the version s of RIP updates that are accepted OFF Disable the version s of RIP upgrades that are accepted RIP 1 Enable the version of RIP 1 upgrades that are accepted RIP 2 Enable the version of RIP 2 upgrades that are accepted RIP 1 amp 2 Enable the versions of RIP 1 and RIP 2 upgrades that are accepted Default Route Controls and sets the Mercury or Tainet WANpro product to advertise itself as the default router E 4 15 Enable and specify the number of hops to a destination Horizon Controls the spilt horizon and poison reverse mechanisms Available with active RIP only SPLIT oplit horizon POISON Next Hop Advertise opecify whether or not the next hop value is included in the RIP version 2 advertisements Available with active RIP only YES Next hop value will not be included in the RIP version 2 EE REN Next ius value will not be included in the RIP version 2 O Tamron een RE S Sub Accept Control whether or not subnet routes are accepted in updates Subnet routes will be accepted in updates NO Subnet routes will not be accepted in updates Sub Advertise Controls whether or not the RI
261. nection enable Status err prov Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field lt left right ESC abort Figure 5 59 PPP settings of WAN 1 310 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Local IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network Remote IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part Enable or Disable the WAN interface Status Closed The WAN interface is Disabled No T S No access to any Time Slot on the WAN interface No prev Time slot access to the WAN interface is not available on the Device Platform Err prev Time slot access to the WAN interface has error on the Device Platform Up Link status of protocol on the WAN interface Down Link status of protocol on the WAN interface Table 5 19 Descriptions of WAN port parameters 311 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 3 4 Time Slot Assignment Setup This menu allows administrator to assign the time slots of the Ch r module for the WAN interface in the Configuration TSA menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface
262. nenos 83 A oM mmm 83 HE noo Ae 84 TOMA ING PR ERR CRE SR 85 SL COMO eee ne ne Em 85 FAO COMING MM RERO 86 bessere m 86 DLLO an e E sli TS 87 DATA SOMMadd assa ITE T 88 EXO COMINANO aee eE E E E EE EE E AEE ee ee E EE 88 Alarms are supported by CP COMMANd ooccocccccccccccocccocncoconocconnnonnncnnnnnnononononcnnnnons 102 IDSL port time slot assignment table eee reane 118 Login ID and Password for Mercury series eee 125 UPStates ao Roe ae ERRORS AO E eee 188 Alarm statues for CP COMMANd occcoccncccnccncncccnnnnnnoncnconnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 190 Alarm status Tor CP Command isececeosiesoscutula Dea cue bred Ne ruina Soo ib pen E 193 Alarm status Tor CP Command scsi os 195 El alarm message sessssssssssesseeeeeen ene rena ea ecran aei nae sae ese sese asa asa sanas 206 Taam WY SACS vate essen ior mm 211 Fiber Optical module alarm Message c occccoccccccccccnconcncncnconcnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnanonnns 214 V35 module alarm Mess aduciendo 216 X 50 module alarm MESSAGEC ccccccseccsecceeceeecueeceeccaeccueceaecsecueesseesaeesseeseeenans 219 Router module alarm message ccoocccccncoccccncnoncoconncnnncnnononononononanonnnonnnnnnonaninaninanos 221 IDSL module alarm message error eeeee nnne nnns nnn nnne nans 223 FXS voice module alarm message eee erre nnns 226 SDSLalanni MESSAGG seere Sube Quedam Go
263. new parameter this is requiring when any value in LAN Setup WAN Setup and AUX Setup Warm Start has been modified Restore This field will restart the system and restore the factory Default default parameters LAN Rx The number of received packets from LAN port Packets AAA LAN Tx The number of transferred packets from LAN port Packets A LAN Rx Errors The number of packets that are received from the LAN port with specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc LAN RIP This field shows the current RIP status of LAN interface WAN Rx The number of received packets from WAN port Packets WAN Tx The number of transferred packets from WAN port Packets WAN Rx The number of packets that received from the WAN port with Errors specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc WAN RIP This field shows the current RIP status of WAN interface AUX Rx The number of received packets from AUX port Packets mE AUX Tx The number of transferred packets from AUX port Packets A 263 Chapter 5 Router Configuration AUX Rx Errors The number of packets that received from the AUX port with specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc AUX RIP This field shows the current RIP status of AUX interface DHCP Server This field identifies the DHCP Server function ha
264. nnelize U1 8 DACS Card DACS 33 Middle Board U1 88 Figure 3 7 About Command Screen for 3630 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Hercuru about E for Mercury 3820 Cc26Copuright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters No 25 Alley 15 Lane 12H Sec 1 Nei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taivan URL http www tainet net TEL 88h 2 265 83008 FAR 886 2 26583232 E mail sales tainet net support tainet net Release Time Tue Mov 29 11 08 38 2685 POWER 1 Power 1 SU Power 2 Hone External Power None CH 411 S W Front Panel Ui1 HH Mercury 382HCchannelize U1 88 DACS Card DACS33 Middle Board U1 HBHH Figure 3 8 About Command Screen for 3820 3 6 3 Alm Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Display the current alarm messages with the dates and times that are stored in the alarm buffer B Syntax o ALM CLR port B Param a port Indicated port o CLR Clear alarm history B Example o ALM e Display all alarm messages in buffer o ALM CLR e Clear the alarm saved in buffer o ALM 4A e Display the alarm message with specified port 4A 92 Mercury gt alm Alarm History Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 4A 2001 08 31 14 49 31 MAJ LOS RCL 3A 2001 08 31 14 49 32 MAJ LOS RCL Figure 3 9 Alm Command Screen 3 6 4 Bert Command Accommodate Mercury 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Setup and View DACS BERT B Syntax o BERT er
265. nor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning LOS Loss of 1 Check cable Alarm Major Synchronous connections to the link Local lost of connector multi frame synchronization 2 Check line and or alarm on the other communication specified link equipment providing the link to the specified T1 module 3 Replace the T1 module RCL Receive Carrier Check cable Alarm Major Loss Receive connection to the link carrier data loss connector has been from the remote plug properly equipment Frame Alignment 1 Check cable Alarm Major synchronization connections to the link Loss Detected connector FAS error occur over critical limited 2 Check line and or gt 8 bits sec other communication equipment providing Only on T1 links the link to the specified operating with T1 module DA ESF framing 3 Replace the T1 module CRC errors Error Have the T1 link Alarm Major detected in the T1 checked link receive signal 207 Chapter4Maintenance eee LINDE IE 2 bits sec 1H SES 15 ES 15 SES 15 UA 1H ES Updated once per second Only on T1 links operating with DA ESF frame plus CRC Code Violation error Detected error occur over critical limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes thresh
266. nt unavailable seconds UA a An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive severely error seconds SES occur and is cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES B Current code variation error CV a The code variation will count any error bit detection derived from the data stream transmitted end to end the code variation will only be performed on E1 T1 and FOM module B Displaying the performance data o The performance data can be displayed on the craft terminal by means of the STAT and PM command by using parameter CLR you can reset all the performance diagnostics registers or to the specified port only 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 Chapter 4 Maintenance Diagnostic with Loop Test function Power up Self test When the system is powered up a complete self test routine is performed such as follows B Checking all I O port B ROM BH SRAM B FLASH memory B Cross connect action B Real time clock B Installed Modules The self test helps to validate system s integrity During the system self test Ready LED will be extinguished until the self test has been completed Loopback function The Mercury I O modules support two types of user controlled loopback local analog loopback and remote digital loopback The available test and loopback functions are described in the following paragr
267. o ID P W mode B Param o No The user number from 1 to 5 there are 5 sets of ID and PW can be set in system o IDThe identification for log into Access mode a P AW The password for the corresponding ID o mode e here are two modes for this specified user Supervisor has full authority to operate Mercury including add and modify the newer Login ID and PW When an operator is assigned as Normal user he can also fully operate Mercury but cannot add newer Login ID and PW but can only modify his own ID and PW 138 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e S Supervisor e N Normal User default Mercury gt help secc Usage Setup ID P W confirm Syntax SECC No ID P W mode Params No user number ID identification P W password mode S supervisor N normal user Notes 1 Method of ID amp P W Modification Step 1 use SECE to select new user No ID amp P W Step 2 use SECC to confirm new user No ID amp P W 2 ID amp P W are case sensitive Figure 3 41 SECC Command Screen 3 6 39 Sece Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o To change or add ID and PW for enter into Access mode There are 5 sets of ID and PW and both of them are case sensitive Two classes of privileges are Supervisor and Normal user one of which can be chosen for each set After modifying or adding the new ID and PW using Sece Command please execute SECC command to reconfirm the changes
268. o view current routing status Destination It specifies the IP network address of the final destination If 0 0 0 0 appears in the field this entry specifies the Default Gateway of route information NetMask It represents the IP net mask of the destination IP address Nexthop It represents the IP address of the next router for transmission of the IP datagram to the destination network segment Identifies IP routing to the corresponding interface Type First character Status U The route is valid up and in use D The route is invalid down and has a metric of 16 RIP infinity 317 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 4 Second character Source The route is a direct connection R The route is established from RIP information S The route is a static route Table 5 24 Descriptions of Routing Table of Monitoring menu ARP Table Status The ARP table lists the LAN MAC addresses which are learned by the Ch r module The router module learns a device MAC address when IP traffic is generated between the router and other devices and this table is found in the Monitoring ARP table menu Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View ARP Table IP Address Ethernet MAC 172 16 3 58 00E0181B4E2E 172 16 6 135 00E0192C5EA4 SPACE refresh page lt page up gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 67 The sub menu to v
269. of Diagnosis MenNU ccoccccccncccnccocncocnconninnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnos 325 The sub menu of Ping menu errar aN nnns r nennen nnns 326 The sub menu of Information MenNu oocccoccccccncccnccccnnocnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnonnnnncnnos 321 A oe E E 337 A A 338 RS 530 Data Interface module for Mercury series except M800 339 RS 530 X 21 Adapting Cable for Mercury series item 340 RS 530 RS 449 Adapting Cable for Mercury series iii 341 o e OPI oe E A 342 SP DNS SIRER SIDO RR PD RR sees seeeetesee 343 gi 343 DSE FOM AO NN e A E EE EE E A E 344 ROLLS E MENACE RN NE TT 347 Figure A 11 Figure A 12 Figure A 13 Figure A 14 Figure A 15 Figure A 16 Figure A 17 Figure A 18 Mercury Series User s Manual Router C Module Interface erre nennen nnns 348 4 FXS rear panel terminal DlOCK cooccccocncoccccccnconnonocnconcnonnnnnnnconcncnannnnnnnos 349 Maro heal Dalle Peg ib 349 e 351 pz 351 4 POTS FXO FXS DB44 to 4 x RJ 11 adaptor eee 353 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Conncetor errar 355 2W AW AND IMPEDANCE SELECTIOR occcccccnccncncnccccconcccocccnncncnncnnncncnnncnnnononoss 358 XVii Mercury Series User s Manual Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Ta
270. of synchronization to remote port signal red alarm condition this AIS is sent to inform the next terminal that data is not valid The AIS signal is always an all ones unframed signal This function is always used for whole channel E1 to E1 E1 to 11 T1 to T1 cross connection SIDLE Signal Idle code this is used to setup the digital idel code when connect to E1 PBX DET Signal Detect code this is used to check the ABCD bit code detected by system then convert to required code by parameter CHG CHG Signal Change code this is comes with DET when system detect the ABCD bit code defined by DET command then convert to the code set by CHG sig ABCD bit value between 0 to 15 SA Sa bit Tx switch sa0 disable 1 transparent 2 user definition SAD Sa bit TX difinition val value between 0 and 31 109 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o BAL Mercury 800 supports Balance 120 Ohm or Unbalanced 5Ohm connector and is software configurable for Mercury 800 built in E1 module only o bal O unbalance default 1 balance o HAUL Select Mercury 800 built in E1 to Short haul or Long haul For Short haul there will be 6dB attenuation at 1024KHz And for Long haul there will be 30dB attenuation at 1024KHz for Mercury 800 built in E1 module only o haul O short default 1 long B Example o E13afr 0cas 1 terc 0 rcrc O bal 1 haul 1 e Setup E1 port 3A to FAS CAS mode disable TCRC and RCRC
271. old Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert P M lt lt U U U lt lt Have the link checked Major Major Major Major Major Chapter 4 Maintenance Class Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Transmit Elastic Store Slip Detected Tx clock slip Receive Elastic Store Slip Detected Rx clock slip Frame Alignment oynchronization Loss Detected FAS error occur over critical limited lt 8 bits sec Only on T1 links operating with Informative alert P M Informative alert Major Informative alert Major Informative alert Minor U U U z z z Problem at unstable Minor clock source Alarm Alarm Alarm Problem at unstable Minor clock source 1 Check cable connections to the link connector Minor 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specify T1 module
272. on 17 Hz lsec on 2sec off dl 0 0 2 16KHz ttx on 0 1 17 Hz lsec on 3sec off 2 22 Hz lsec on 2sec off 3 22 Hz lsec on 3sec off 4 25 Hz lsec on 2sec off 5 25 Hz 1lsec on 3sec off 6 30 Hz lsec on 2sec off 7 30 Hz l1sec on 3sec off 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr 1 tgain rgain Mercury gt fxs la r Mercury gt stat la TYPE 4FXS_D CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table TS000 xxxxxxx Configuration MODE terminate STATUS idle PCM CODING A law DL no IMPEDANCE 900o0hm START loop start RING 25Hz lsec on 2sec off TX GAIN OdBr RX GAIN 2dBr TTX 16KHz ttx on ring 4 ttx 2 tgain 0 rgain 2 Figure 3 22 FXS Command Screen 116 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 19 Idle Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a Edit the transmitted idle code when DSO time slot is in idle mode B Syntax o IDLE code B Param o None View the current idle code o code Hexadecimal value between 00 and FF B Example o IDLE e View the current idle code o IDLE ff e The idle time slot will be filled in OxFF code Mercury gt help idle Usage Setup idle code Syntax IDLE code Params code hexadecimal value between 00 and FF NOTE view idle code if no parameter Mercury gt idle idle code 7f Mercury gt idle ff idle code ff Figure 3 23 IDLE Command Screen 3 6 20 IDSL Command Accommodate Mercury 800 36
273. on 5 6 9 2 Before you run this function contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly to seek out additional technical assistance 322 Chapter 5 Router Configuration c5 CAWINN Teste 32wmd exe telnet 172 156 5250 i Bl xj evice Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade 1 Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Download process will ERASE the program code in the device DO NOT interrupt the download process If you suspect that it failed wait for a time out and then start the download process again If the file transfer DOES NOT verify DO HOT power cycle or reboot the unit Go back and start the download process again If the file transfer DOES verify DO power cycle or reboot the unit New program code will be in use Press ENTER to continue download process ENTER select T AB next lt ileft o gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 73 The sub menu of Firmware Upgrade menu The following describes the details of the Firmware Upgrade in the Device Control menu TFTP Server IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric Address value used to identify a TFTP Server TFTP Server File The file name of new program code in the TFTP Name Server Table 5 27 Descriptions of Firmware Upgrade Table of Device Control menu TFTP is an UDP IP client server application The unit is a client TFT
274. onous with optical line Mercury 3630 supports linear 1 1 multiplex section protection for point to point networks with unidirectional switching of operation For point to point networks with two fibers a 1 1 VC 12 protection mechanism in revertible mode is supported Mercury 3630 3630E provides integrated solutions for both CO side base and CPE side based SDH network applications It can be configured and deployed in point to point network topologies Mercury 3630 3630E has four connectors to support two fiber rings or linear add drop structure Two fiber transmit and receive pairs can be used separately to provide channel 1 channel 2 19 Chapter 1 Overview connections in a daisy chain type of structure in a linear add drop configuration It supported the applications of network topology as figure1 13 gt STM 1 Terminal Mux Linear Add Drop Figure 1 13 Support network topologies 1 2 12 Basic SDH Application E1 DATA xDSL Terminal Multiplexer STM 1 E1 DATA xDSL DATA xDSL Point to Point Application STM 1 STM 1 E1 DATA xDSL E1 DATA xDSL E1 Data xDSL Linear Application Figure 1 14 Basic SDH application B TM mode Basically Mercury 3630 3630E is workable on TM mode which can multiplex all tributary interfaces into STM 1 trunk card STM 1 data streams shall follow the SDH standard and thus it can inter connect with others STM n level equipment B Point to Point A
275. onrai a E A E E 53 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION eee nn ES 2 1 UNPACKIN O spa 55 na A gestao EEA E E 57 Mercury Series User s Manual 2 3 MERCURY 800 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION esee nnne eene nnne nnne inn 58 2 4 MERCURY 800 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION cccccssscccceesecceceesecccceeseccecseeecceeueeeceeeuaeeceeeuees 60 2 5 MERCURY 3600 3600 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION ccccssseccccesecceceeseccceaeeeceeeaneecseeaees 61 2 6 MERCURY 3600 3600 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION cessere 63 2 7 MERCURY 3820 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION eene senes tes sentes senate varanda 64 2 8 MERCURY 3820 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION ccccsssscceceseccecessecccceesecceceesecceeeueeceeeaueeceesanes 67 2 0 MERCURY 3630 3630E FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION cccococccnnnnonccnnnnonocnnnnonocnnnnonocnnnnanoconnnos 68 2 10 MERCURY 3630 3630E REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION ccccccssecceceessccceceeeceecueeeceeeueeeeeeeaees 71 2 INSTALEN NEW CARDS P E 72 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING e ee eene eee ne 73 3 1 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS usinas adere aaa aiaa aeia ndi 73 S LL Operations using ERIPUIT EO LT LITLTTTETT 73 3 1 2 Requirements by using Telnet Protocol oocccccccccconooncnnnnnnonononononcnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonononaninncnnnnos 74 29 2 COMMUNICATED LANGUAGE ietoneiekesenic tuere nes i
276. oss of synchronization to remote port signal red alarm condition this AIS is sent to inform the next terminal that data is not valid The AIS signal is always an all ones 145 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring O unframed signal This function is always used for whole channel E1 to E1 or E1 to T1 or T1 to T1 cross connection ais X O disable default 1 enable SIDLE Signal Idle code this is used to setup the digital idel code when connect to E1 PBX DET Signal Detect code this is used to check the ABCD bit code detected by system then convert to required code by parameter CHG CHG Signal Change code this is comes with DET when system detect the ABCD bit code defined by DET command then convert to the code set by CHG sig ABCD bit value between O to 15 B Example O T1 2b co 0 fr 0 li 2 e Setup T1 port 2B to B8ZS line coding ESF framing mode and Line indicator to 266feet Mercury gt help t1 Usage Setup T1 Parameters Syntax Tl port CO co FR fr LI 1i RRL rr1 DRL drl AIS ais SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig Params port port identifier CO line code FR frame mode LI line driver RRL control remote loopback detect remote loopback Alarm Indication Signal Signal Idle Signal Detect Number Signal Change Number co 0 B8ZS 1 AMI LE ESF 1 D4 2 unframe Li 0ft 1 133ft 2 266ft 3 399ft 4 533ft 5 655ft 6 800ft drl remote loopback off 1 remote loopback on ais disable 1
277. ous menu Figure 5 55 The sub menu tree of Configuration menu 5 7 3 1 Ethernet Setup You can have TCP IP setup for your Ch router module at Configuration System menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface System Configuration LAN Parameters Ethernet MAC 0090BB104491 LAN IP Address 172 16 8 119 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 System Functions SNMP Agent disable Telnet enable Front Panel disable System Security Console Password root Telnet Username root Telnet Password root Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field lt left right ESC abort Figure 5 56 System configuration Chapter 5 Router Configuration Ethernet The Ethernet Interface Media Access Control MAC address of MAC LAN port LAN IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used Address to identify a network and a local host on that network Each IP address consists of four sets of decimal numbers separated by periods e g 192 72 243 1 Each address is composed of two parts a network part and a host part The network part identifies the unique subnet containing the host the host part identifies the actual host device LAN IP An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal NetMask notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which
278. oute Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Configuration MENU Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Traffic Types IP Routing LAN IP Address 172 16 14 1 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 WAN Protocol PPP AUX Port Speed Disable Sync External AUX Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 AUX IP NetMask 0 0 0 0 AUX Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 SNMP Disable DHCP Daemon Disable Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 21 System Encapsulate Traffic Types indicate whether your Router module is in Bridge Mode or Routing Mode Under System encapsulate option you enable it to configure LAN interface with an IP address and a subnet mask The IP address should be your router Ethernet IP address 0 6 4 2 Setting up the WAN PPP link TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over PPP Configuration MENU Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item PPP Local IP Address 10 0 0 1 PPP IP NetMask 0 0 0 0 PPP Remote IP Address 10 0 0 2 NAT Disable Filter Disable Figure 5 22 PPP configure for WAN interface 276 Chapter 5 Router Configuration At Configuration PPP you can configure the WAN port data mode and PPP encapsulation The WAN LED o
279. outer Module Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 Configuration of Channelize Router module Ch R 5 7 1 Menu Tree of Ch R Following Figure 5 52 shows the main menu tree of Channelize router module MAIN MENU System Interface Configuration TSA Routing Table Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statisitics Warm Start Device Control Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Ping Diagnosis Cw I A SL INS iw NINA AN Information Figure 5 52 Main menu tree of Ch R module 5 7 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Main Menu When accessing the Ch r module the default log in username and password are both root After entering into the system the main menu is illustrated as a TCS Terminal Configuration System interface for easy configuration This is shown below Welcome to Access Mercury Channelized Router username root password root Figure 5 53 Access username and password There are four categories in the Main Menu B Configuration This menu includes all configuration of WAN and LAN and some advanced management The detailed settings of this menu will be discussed in later sections B Monitoring Use the monitoring menu to view system status interface statistics and routing table B Device Control The device control menu allows you to restore the default parameters or warm start your Router Modul
280. ove down to ENTER To access in to a submenu sub menu Move up to ESC Press the ESC key to move back to the previous menu previous menu lt gt TAB Use lt or gt to move cursor left and right or up and down press TAB to move cursor sequence Enter Fill in or press You need to fill in two types of fields The First information SPACE BAR requires you to type in the appropriate to toggle information The second allows you to cycle through the available choices by pressing the SPACE BAR Confirm your ENTER Save your configuration by selecting YES at cogu pop 0 Can mese nocao 259 Chapter 5 Router Configuration ui take you to the previous menu Exit the TCS I ESC To exit the TCS interface press ESC at the Main Menu prompt and pop up message Logout select YES Table 5 3 The operations of router module Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 Configuration of Router module N R 5 6 1 The Description of N R Configuration The N Router module for Mercury 800 named Router L can also be equipped into TAINET MSDSL modem Xstream 1300 with different jump connection on its main board On Router L s main board there is a Jump selection JP2 as shown in the following figure for M800 please short Pin 2 amp 3 and for Xstream 1300 please just short pin 1 amp 2 X1300 modem 1 2 Mercury 800 2 3 Mercury 23 TEASE d CN Ill e HL A IY i Figure 5
281. per case or lower case letters All the commands must end with a carriage return or ENTER key The SPACE key is used to insert a separator between commands and parameters and the BACKSPACE key can be pressed to clear the typing errors The command structure is as follows B Command Grammar O O O O Command Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter N Command English letters for a short description or alpha numeric will be valid here Parameter Generally the parameter would be a channel number or time slot number _ Separation character it has to be SPACE with no limit on the count Termination character it has to be a carriage return ENTER B Physical Slot Number O For the physical slot number for Mercury we give each one an exclusive number 1 2 3 4 etc and that is the slot number for the specified slot Mercury 800 supports 5 physical slots Slots 1 and 2 can be plugged into with any kind of interface module and Slots 3 4 and 5 are built into Mercury 800 when ordered Slots 3 4 are E1 interface and Slot 5 is Router interface The built in Router interface is located in slot 11A Mercury 3820 and 6A 3600 3630 3630E B Channel Number O Suppose that there is a 4E1 card which has 4 ports installed in slot number 1 and we name these 4 ports as Port A Port B Port C and Port D The Channel Number is then designated as combining the slot number with the port name Hence the
282. perations using Terminal Any terminal emulation software can be communicated with Mercury Series product to perform the configuration and monitoring The following table lists some common software based on the type of PC you are using Windows 95 98 ME or NT X HyperTerm included with Windows software Windows 3 1 Terminal included with Windows software Macintosh ProComm Versa Term supplied separately Table 3 1 Platform supported The terminal emulation is necessary to perform the initial configuration The supervised port located on the rear Mercury 800 front Mercury 3600 3600 3630 3630E 3820 panel is designed as a craft port of DTE type with a RJ 45 connector Therefore RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter with null modem crossed inside must be connected between PC COM port and Mercury 800 3600 3630 3820 s craft port For Mercury 3600 s craft port it works as a DCE type with a DB 9 connector so that it can be directly connected to PC COM port without Null modem 73 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B Characteristics of Mercury craft port o Data Format e 19200 bps default 8 data bits No parity 1 Stop bit No flow control o Type e DTE mode with RJ 45 connector in V 24 RS 232 physical type 800 3600 3820 3630 e DCE mode with DB 9 connector in V 24 RS 232 physical type 3600 o Emulated Terminal VT 100 ANSI compatible terminal 3 1 2 Requirements by using Telnet Protocol Mercury 800 3600 3630
283. port no action required and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 2 T1 alarm message 211 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 3 Fiber Optical Module Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber B Table 4 3 lists the alarm messages generated by the Fiber Optic module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and otate and explains their meaning Loss of Synchronous Local lost of multi frame synchronization alarm on the specified link Receive Carrier Loss Receive carrier data loss from the remote equipment Code Violation error Detected the particular code error over critical limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 212 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified FOM module 3 Replace the FOM module 4 Check the clock settings Check cable connection to the link connector has been plug properly Have the fiber link checked Informative alert Type Alarm Alarm Alarm P M Class Major Major Major Major 15 SES Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Error Seconds Counting Error
284. pplication Mercury 3630 3630E shall be workable as P to P application The transmission distance shall be selectable by using different optical transceiver Trunk protection might be option when application is required to use 1 1 physical protection 20 Chapter 1 Overview B linear Application Mercury 3630 3630E could be constructed to linear application When Mercury 3630 3630E works as add drop multiplexer it shall able to insert or drop all tributary traffic 1 2 13 Typical SDH Application EMFEX BMF BNFSS EMFPSS Figure 1 15 Typical SDH Application The application case is Terminal Multiplexer TM without protection function The STM 1 interface can link to any SDH equipment User can cross 21 E1 to optical trunk or local cross connect only and the master clock is selectable by STM 1 tributary port internal generator or external option Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 14 SDH connected Application IP Network Ta me 7 qi Router Router 7 E XE Mercury 3630 4 A Mercury 3630 Ass Aa XO l Fxs PA MO L P SDH f _ 4 0 E e e AMS GSI cal M Phone E 51400 Equipment Equipment Figure 1 16 SDH STM 1 Application Add drop multiplexer mode of Mercury 3630 3630E allows a number of remote terminals to be connected to form a two fiber ring This structure provides 1 to 1 protection and can operate in channel 1 or channel 2 when the ring breaks Each device in the network supports byp
285. pplication relative to the previous leased line xDSL modem It supports Routing Bridge access PPP Frame Relay WAN protocol static RIP routing protocol NAT NAPT and filter function For Mercury series product the Non Channelize Router module is built into Mercury 800 and a 16 channels Channelize Router module 32 timeslots totally is built into Mercury 3600 3820 and 3630 for SNMP agent function 5 1 1 Software 5 1 1 1 PPP RFC 1661 RFC 1662 9 1 1 2 Frame Relay for N R only B Multi protocol Interconnect over Frame Relay RFC 1490 B HDLC packet based format link layer 247 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 1 1 3 5 1 1 4 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 6 5 1 1 7 B Three generally implemented specification of Local Management Interfaces LMI o ANSI T1 617 Annex D a CCITT ITU T Q 933 Annex A o LMI Frame Relay Forum implementation agreement B The one multi connection of virtual link by Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI and Permanent Virtual Circuit PVC only Routing TCP IP with RIP1 RFC 1058 RIP2 RFC 2543 or static routing on the LAN WAN up to 16 static routes with default route and the option to not advertise routes for Ch R only supports static routes no RIP supported Ethernet Bridge for N R only B Automatic learning and aging 3000 MAC address LAN table m 1500 frames per second filtering and forwarding rate Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for N R only DHCP Server an au
286. pplications the IP used for NAPT are mostly chosen based on WAN IP address serial interface In this case you can leave both Public IP and Net Mask as 0 0 0 0 the Router Module will then automatically take on the WAN IP as vour NAPT Step 2 Proxy Port List Use this function to make a Server visible to the outside world specify the port number of service and then assign inside IP address for Server behind NAT Enter the protocol and port number in the field and the inside IP address of the server in the Proxy IP 293 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14t System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 168 192 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 248 Porxy Port List Protocol PORT IP Protocol PORT IP TCP 21 192 168 1 24 TCP 80 192 168 1 25 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP O 0 0 0 0 TCP O 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP O 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 42 Proxy Port List Setup The most often used port numbers are shown in the following Table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers FTP File Transfer Protocol DNS Domain Name System HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or Web SMTP simple Mail Transfer Protocol
287. quipped Informative alert Alarm Minor E uem mmm pem por HP TIM J1 HO path trace identifier Informative alert Alarm Minor iili NN E BIP 8 B3 HO path BIP error Informative alert HP REI HO path remote error Informative alert Alarm Minor UM M RE HP RDI HO path remote defect Informative alert Alarm Minor UM RR RR TU AIS Tributary unit AIS Informative alert TU LOP Loss of pointer Informative alert LOM Loss of multiframe Informative alert HP PLM HO path payload label Informative alert Alarm Minor iil Peers fem I LP UNEQ _ LO path unequipped Informative alert Alarm Minor i ent mmm er LP TIM J2 LO path trace identifier Informative alert Alarm Minor ilu RN pim e BIP 2 V5 LO path BIP error Informative alert LP PLM V5 LO path payload label Informative alert Alarm Minor le ee ee LP REI LO path remote error Informative alert Alarm Minor ll NN RR LP RDI LO path remote defect Informative alert Alarm Minor ill NN E Table 4 15 SDH 239 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 2 Performance Monitoring Diagnostics This section describes the performance evaluation and monitoring functions provided by the Mercury The performance parameters defined for Mercury statistics are listed below B Current error seconds ES o An error second is any second containing one or more minor alarm events B Current severely error seconds SES o A severely error second is any second containing one or more Major alarm events B Curre
288. r CLR port sts ets TP pat UP usr TM time B Param o None To view status and BER o err o CLR a port o sts o ets o TP o UP o IM o pat O stop BERT 1 255 insert error number reset BERT port identifier start time slot end time slot test pattern type user pattern byte test period O All 1s 1 2420 1 Modified ARSS 2 31 2 5 1 PRBS 3 63 2 6 1 PRBS 4 511 2 9 1 PRBS V 52 default test pattern 5 511 2 9 1 PRBS reversed 93 Chapter3 Configuration and Monitoring 6 2047 2 11 1 PRBS 0 151 7 2047 2 11 1 PRBS reversed 8 2 15 1 PRBS 0 151 noninverted 9 2420 1 PRBS V 57 10 2420 1 PRBS CB113 CB114 11 2423 1 PRBS 0 151 noninverted 12 ALT 010 alternating 1s and Os o usr 0 255 o time O Continues default value 1 1 Minute 2 15 Minutes 3 30 Minutes 4 1 Hour 5 24 Hours 3 6 5 Boot Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a Simulate the sequence when powering up the system This will perform a complete hardware reset self testing reload the initial profile if specified Some settings will be lost if not saved into profile B Syntax o BOOT S H B Param o None Reboot command supported for Mercury 3600 o S Software reboot for all Mercury series o H Hardware reboot for all Mercury series B Example o BOOTS System software reboot 94 3 6 6 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help boot Usage
289. r since it doesn t have to perform calculations on the fly and send out router updates Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Router Module has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the Router Module knows about network B in the following diagram through remote node Router 1 However the Router Module is unable to route a packet to network C because it doesn t know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 via Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the Router Module about the networks beyond the remote nodes Chapter 5 Router Configuration Network A Network B qi UTR xDSL Modem Router Module Router 2 Router 1 TO Figure 5 35 An application of the router Configuring static routes and default gateway can be finding at Configuration Routing Table menu Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Static Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu left gt right TAB next item Figure 5 36 The sub menu of routing table Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Static Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left right TAB next item Destination Address Net Mask Next Hop Metric m kd re el r m Pe Pe PF Pe Pe Pe Pe Pe Pe ra m3 mm ko li d eo oo LLL
290. r may result if operating instructions are not followed properly Caution This symbol and associated text are used when damages to the equipment or impact to the operation may result if operating instructions are not followed properly Note This symbol and associated text are used to provide the users with extra information that may be helpful when following the main instructions in this manual Mercury Series User s Manual LIMITED WARRANTY TAINET s DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating to Products and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said warranties are satisfactory TAINET warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the Products to be delivered hereunder will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twenty four 24 months twelve 12 months in Taiwan following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR If during the warranty period any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship and DISTRIBUTOR notifies TAINET of such defect within seven days after knowing of such defect TAINET shall for any Product that TAINET agrees is defective at its option supply a replacement part request return of equipment to its plant for repair or perform necessary repair at the equipments location At TAINET s option DISTRIBUTOR shall destroy any Produ
291. rams mode L low latency F frame integrity U voice conversion I idle porta port identifier tsa time slot number portb port identifier tsb time slot number fp front panel count number of timeslot connected 1 default value of count is 1 2 default mode is frame integrity if not specified 3 press ACO key to see remote front panel 4 fp is available for T1 E1 Fiber and IDSL card Hercury xu ACTIVEZALH amp DAC Port F Hl TSA0A xxxxxxx 01A 001 B1A 002 EXXEXEXE XEXEREE TSHBB XXXXXEXX HEXKEXE XEXXEXEX EXEXEEXX XEXEXMXZX TSOT EXXEXXXEX XEXXXXE KEKEXEX XXEXEXX XEXEXMXZX TSH24 EXEXXXEX XEXXXXE XEXXEXEX XXEXEXX XEXEXMXZX AAA AAAAAAA AXAARAA AAA AAAAAAA AXAARAA EAARAAA AAAAAAA AXXARAA EAARAAA AAAAAAA AXAARAA unice conversion amp combined channel lau latency E o loopback x idle frame integrity z DACS ch loss Marked timeslot is unidirection Figure 3 58 XT Command Screen For 3630 3630E 164 3 6 53 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring XV Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Display the cross connect table for the indicated port B Syntax o XV port fp B Param o Port Port identifier for the indicated port o Fp The remote front panel display function B Example o XV 3a View port 3A time slot assignment table o XV 1a View port 1A time slot assignment table o XV 4a View port 4A time slot assignment table o
292. ration and Monitoring Purpose o Setup T1 parameters Syntax a T1 port CO co Fr fr Ll li RRL rri DRL drl SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig AlS ais Param a port Setup the assigned port Oo CO Select the line code format for the indicated T1 port to AMI Alternate Mark Inverting or B8ZS Bipolar Unframed mode o co0 B8ZS default 1 AMI o FrSelect the framing mode to ESF Extend Super Frame D4 also called Super Frame SF or Unframed mode The D4 framing consists of 12 T1 frames and ESF framing consists of 24 T1 frames These two types of super frames are used to enhance the system supervision capabilities When in Unframed mode T1 data uses the 1 544 Mbps bit rate T1 signal with no framed structure and needs to assign 24 time slots o fr O ESF default 1 D4 2 Unframe o LlLine Driver also called Line Built Out For T1 line interface the internal equalizer can be set to equivalent cable distance from O feet to 800 feet o di 0 0ft 1 133ft default 2 266ft 3 399ft 4 533ft 5 655ft 6 800ft o RRL Request remote site Mercury Series Product to start or stop the T1 line remote loopback o rrlO remote loopback stop 1 remote loopback start default o DRL Enable or Disable the function to accept remote site loopback testing request or not a dri O remote loopback off 1 remote loopback on default a AIS Alarm Indication Signal AIS If the signal is cut off between two terminals loss of port signal or local l
293. rce e The FOM volume is 8M e Optical source signal mode laser diode 1310nm e Connector FC type o Timeslot Allocation e User defined any time slot 0 127 to any time slot mapping o Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A C 48 Chapter 1 Overview Fiber 1V amp Fiber 1VWA20 Fiber 1VWB20 O General Description e The FIBER 1V card can provide with alarm and status indicators on Front panel Include Frame Sync Loss Remote Sync Loss Code Violation OE Loss The FIBER 1VWA20 B20 has to be use one A type and one B type as a pair the A20 type has the TX as 1550nm RX 1310nm and running in one fiber line B20 type is same as A type module card but it has the TX as 1310nm and RX as 1550nm Electrical Characteristic Propagation delay time about 600 ns The FIBER 1V card output power gt O 5dbm The FIBER 1V card sensitivity is 32dbm The FIBER 1V card system gain 26db The FIBER 1V provide error rate 1 10 10 transmission The FIBER 1V can be use as clock source The FIBER 1V volume is 8 192M PORT NUMBER One port includes 128 time slots per card DATA RATE amp LINE RATE Line Speed 8 192Mbps Date rate 10 24Mbps VOICE CHANNEL 128 voice channels per card at most OPTICAL INTERFACE Optical Source Laser Single Mode Operating Wavelength Range 1310nm 1280nm 1350nm Optical Connector FC PC type Fiber size 9 125 um Optical Trans
294. rchantability and fitness for a particular purpose TAINET shall not be liable for any loss of use interruption of business iv Mercury Series User s Manual or indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any kind TAINET shall do its best to provide end users with Software updates during the warranty period under this Agreement TAINET has not been notified of any intellectual property rights or others which may be infringed by the Products or the promotion marketing sale or resale or servicing thereof in the Territory but TAINET makes NO WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT THERETO V Mercury Series User s Manual CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW nde 1 1 1 GENBRAL DESCRIPTION cuota peoples l LLE Genera T eA aE aE RE E EEE E EE E E EE 5 1412 eS E o Arae EA EE SaO Eia e d e Eeen 8 AS adi sta AA E 8 PE ES E A e 8 1 1 5 Handling of Alarm and Performance CONdITIONS cccccccccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 9 LLO System Mana emeni Nem 9 Ll Era Ve cin min aC ADOT Sois 9 1 1 8 Remote Management using Telnet over IP sse 9 A ANI PREC UO E 10 Id ODBLOCOBVCEH E1209 ooo nn REOR HRS LOU CE RSS Ra UR a nina 10 1 2 2 Transport of T1 frame over El Transmission Facilit16S oooonnnnnnnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnss 11 1 2 3 Channel Relocation Digital Ac
295. rding problems on one of its link to the other link The alarm indications will support the current alarm and performance monitoring in the individual data link System Management The Mercury Series Product supports two system management options B Use of a craft terminal controlled by the CLI Command Line Interface program stored in the Mercury B Local and remote management by generic IP hosts using the Telnet communication protocol the management functions being similar to those provided by a craft terminal Craft Terminal Capabilities The craft terminal provides a simple command line interface The terminals can communicate with the managed Mercury system via the serial RS 232 communication ports The serial port is generally configured as a DTE for Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E or DCE for Mercury 3600 port for direct connection to a terminal The Null Modem Kit may be required when it works in DTE mode it can also connect the terminal via a leased line modem link or a low speed data multiplexer channel Thus a remote operator can perform all the functions available from a craft terminal connected to the Mercury system Remote Management using Telnet over IP The Mercury system supports the Telnet communication protocol which enables any IP host to access the Mercury system supervision facility using TCP IP communication The Telnet user has access to the same command line interface that is available to the
296. re for Mercury 3600 eeeeesuesse 4T Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3630 3630E 47 The suitable I O module for Mercury Series Product sueusssuuss 54 Front Panel Description of Mercury 800 eee 59 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 800 eee 60 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3600 oocccocccoccccccnccocncccncconncncoconnnonnncnannnnnnnonoss 62 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3600 3600 occccocccnnccccccconcncococoncnononcnanonncononons 63 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3820 65 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3820 eee 67 XVIII Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 3 18 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Mercury Series User s Manual Front Panel Description of Mercury 3630 3630E 69 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3630 erre 11 wieder 73 System Command of Mercury cooccccccccccnccocnconncconnconnncncnnnnnonnnonannonanonnnnonannnnnnona
297. reen 3 6 32 Net Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Mercury Series Product supports Router module and for Mercury 800 3600 3630 and 3820 the router module is already built into the systems The NET command is for entering the TCS Terminal Configuration System mode with a user friendly configuration interface provided by the Router module itself for configuring and monitoring it The default password is root for entering into Router module For more detailed settings please refer to the Manual of 128 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Router Module For Mercury 3820 and 3600 3630 there is a different syntax for this Net command and please refer to the following page B Syntax NET port B Param a port The port number which Router module located B Example o net5A Enter into Router module on port 5A Mercury gt help net Usage Setup Network Device Syntax NET port Params port port identifier Mercury net 5a Mercury 11 Welcome to use MERCURY Router Module Please Enter Password Figure 3 34 NET Command Screen B Accommodate Mercury 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The NET command of Mercury 3600 3630 and 3820 allow the equipment to enter TCS mode provided by Router module In Mercury 3820 it is located at 11A in Mercury 3600 3630 it is located at 6A It also lets user enable the DAC sharing function with port10B of Mercury 3820 and por
298. responding ID B Example o LOGIN TAINET 800 e Enter into Access mode with default ID and Password Mercury gt login TAINET enter access mode Figure 3 29 Login Screen 3 6 27 Logl Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o List all profile names that are saved in Mercury Series System B Syntax o LOGL B Example o LOGL List all saved profiles inside the System currently 125 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 28 3 6 29 Mercury gt help logl Usage List the Name of Profiles Syntax LOGL Mercury gt logl Profile List 01 test chamber 02 test 03 demo 04 test 10 M800 Figure 3 30 LOGL Command Screen Logout Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a Exit the Access mode and return back to Monitor mode When in Monitor mode it only allows user to view the current alarm history port status and performance information for each port BH Syntax a LOGOUT B Example o LOGOUT Turn back to Monitor mode Mercury gt help logout Usage Enter Monitor Mode Syntax LOGOUT Mercury gt logout enter monitor mode Figure 3 31 LOGOUT Command Screen Logtf Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Upload Download a Profile B Syntax 126 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring B OGTF mode address profile proname B Param o Mode u upload d download o Address TFTP server IP addr
299. rm code with the symbol is the default value for CP command 3 6 11 Data Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Define 4P Data port parameters This 4P Data port can be software configurable to change its type to RS530A RS530 X21 V35 interface And all of the 4 data ports A B C D can be set to derive the clock from outside equipment The transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the count parameter for 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps so the count number is 8 and it will start from time slot O and end with 7 B Syntax o DATA port count Type type CTS act DSR act DCD act Rl act DEV dev INV inv B Param o Port Port identifier for the indicated Data port o Count Number of time slots to setup its data rate and it start from time slot O 102 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Type Software configurable to select the interface type to RS530A RS530 X21 V35 Type O N A default 1 R8530A 2 RS530 3 X21 4 V35 CTS Clear to Send signal default act 1 DSR Data Set Ready signal default act 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect signal default act 1 RIRing Indicator signal default act 0 act X O ssignal inactive 1 signal active DEV The clock type for which device connected to and illustrated as following and only valid for 4P Data card dev e O DTE without clock TxC RxC default e 1 DTE without clock TxC ExC e 2 DTE with clock TxC RxC ExC e 3 DC
300. rsion 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table Routing Table Configuration Destination NetMask Nexthop Provision 192 168 254 0 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 yes 192 168 253 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 2 yes 0 0 0 confirm 0 no X YES NO no no no no no no no no no o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO 0000000 ooooooooo ooooooooo OO Oo 0000550 ooooooooo ooooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 00000000 Input SPACE to select TAB next gt forward backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 62 The sub menu of Routing Table setting otatic routes are those routes that you define in the Ch r module manually Static routes exist permanently unless you change them The following describes the details of the Routing Table Chapter 5 Router Configuration Destination The IP address is an unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part Nexthop The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network The next hop must be one of the following a valid IP address on a remote LAN or the IP address at the remote end of a PPP link Enable or Disa
301. s 64 Rear panel view of Mercury 3820 eee errar rer areas 67 Front panel view of Mercury 36030 3030E erre 68 Rear panel view of Mercury 3630 3630E erre 71 Installing New cards for Mercury 800 erre 72 Mercury starts UP SCEGLI senti re accio Tf Mercury Monitoring Mode Screen Mercury 800 77 Mises Help SCN CMa dea RD ERR RD RR NIE 78 MELE SCCO Minera UU MT 90 About Command Screen for 800 occoocccocnccocncccnnccnccncnnonncnnnnonanocnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonarinnnnss 91 About Command Screen for 3000 errar erre 91 About Command Screen for 3030 errar rre aaa 91 About Command Screen for 3820 error rare era rea nns 92 Alm Command SC sairia nanda acia 93 Boot Command Screen ir erreeere era ese ene rea rea rea rna ren re aee nnne senes 95 CLK Command SCS uices sssssbes sad osaV a Peng vus sai aka du UE ad Da E dad PR dio EE dida 96 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49
302. s enabled or disabled SNMP Agent This field identifies SNMP Agent function has enabled or disabled IP Filter This field identifies IP Filter function has enabled or disabled NATO This field identifies NAT function has enabled or disabled Ping In this field enter the IP address you wish to ping shows device is successful receiving responses from destination IP 1 shows a failure Table 5 4 Description of Router Setting Caution Be sure to warm start your Router Module if you have changed the setting of any parameters under System Setup LAN Setup WAN Setup PPP Setup FrRelay Setup and AUX Setup Note Each sub menu contains the individual selectable items Some of the sub menu trees might be changed and come after later version User could download the updated software through Tainet s Internet Web site 5 6 2 Change the System Password Make a preliminary inspection of the shipping container before unpacking Evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the nearest Tainet representative You should change the password to protect your Router Module and prevent unauthorized user 264 5 6 3 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The passwords are separated into two part Console and Telnet To change the System Password enter the Configuration menu and select Security Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security N
303. s the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost and has a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Table 5 13 Descriptions the parameter of Static Routes Configuring Default Gateway Imagine in large network and internet works every router cannot know the exact route to every other router This is why the default gateway sometimes called default route is useful The default route specifies where to send non local packets The router will know what to do with it If the next router doesn t know the necessary route it sends the packet to its own default gateway and this process continues on until the destination network is reached Configuration of default gateway is performed by Configuration Routing Table Default Gateway 290 5 6 6 5 6 6 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Default Gateway Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Primary Default Gateway 172 16 15 254 Figure 5 38 The sub menu of setting Default Gateway NAT amp IP Filter This section shows you how NAT work with your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product and discusses the
304. scripts o Xc 1b 1c a Cross port 1B to 1C higher priority data a Loge 2 Protectloop e Stop and save the above commands into the 2 profile with the name Protectloop Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value User may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set your own criteria 194 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 7 7 N 1 Revertive Protection B Description o Mercury provides the protection facility such as N 1 Revertive protection which is attached in the following figure Main Loop1 and Main Loop2 share the same backup link Protect Loop if Main Loop1 fails the traffic will switch to the Protect Loop and system will also disable the CP function and alarm detection on port 1C When 1A alarm disappears traffic will switch back to Main Loop1 and will also enable the CP function on 1C as before B Structure poe Se eS ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Se ee Se ee ee ee es N 1 Protection Normal Working Path lt gt Protecting Path Mercury A Mercury B C Main Loop1 da E pe pp gt 4 1B 4 1A d 1A F3 1B 4 Main Loop2 gt Z gt Y 1D 4 1C d 1C E FS 1D 4 Protect Loop gt _nx le gt BS 2B lt Xe E S a Figure 3 77 N 1 Revertive Proction Actions on Port 1A Actions on Port
305. service interfaces In any combinations full time slot interchange TSI among ports is possible The LED located at the front panel provides alarm indicators for operator to monitor and maintain the system The interface card for Mercury 800 is the same as Mercury 3600 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E but with different internal connector design The built in non channelized router module for Mercury 800 or 16 channels Channelized router module 32 timeslots totally for Mercury 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E for SNMP agent function are supported Also the firmware of Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E can be upgraded by using TFTP program B Mercury 800 Mercury 800 is a small size multi access platform for 64 Kbps base unit It supports built in 2 E1 interface and router module and other 2 slots are used for optional modules in different applications This compact 2 port mini multi service device is best suitable for CPE side lower capacity requirement of voice and data application Mercury 800 has optional rack mount hardware for mounting into a 19 rack B Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 is a 1U high platform with 4 generic slots and 1 management slot It can support higher capacity for voice data and video application The 5 slot 1 Chapter 1 Overview can be plugged in with a Router interface with SNMP agent It is especially suitable for use as an economic compact remote distribution node It comes with rack mount hardware for mo
306. signment en 352 1P SHDSL V RJ 45 PIN assignment oocccoccccccncccnccncnnocnnnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnononos 354 Mercury 800 Order Information cocccoccccocnccocccocnccnnncncnonnnononnnnnnconcncnnnnoncnnnanonons 364 Mercury 3600 Order Information ooccoccccocnccccncocnconnncncnononononncnnnnnnnnnonnnnncncnanonons 371 Mercury 3600 Order Information cooccccocnccccncocnccnnncccncnonoconnconnnnnnnnonnonncnnnanonnns 377 Mercury 3820 Ordering Informati0N occcoccccccncoccconnncccncnnnnnonnnonnnnncnconnonnnnnnanonons 383 Mercury 3630 Order Information errar 389 Trouble Shooting Table eee eerre nennen nennen nnn nnns 393 Efe lo de I 401 Xxi Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and modularity of Mercury family including the general feature description application technical specification and the information of the tributary modules 1 1 General Description The Mercury Series Integrated Access Devices Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 and 3630E are based on high capacity 1 0 non blocking cross connection technology With modularized design Mercury provides diversified interfaces for terminating network circuits and connecting various Data Voice Video equipment DSO traffic can be consolidated groomed and connected among network interfaces and
307. single IP account The NAPT Network Address Port Translation support popular Internet application such as ICQ IRC 251 Chapter 5 Router Configuration RealAudio VDOLive and PPTP No configuration is needed to support these applications B Full Network Management o SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol support o Accessing TCS Terminal Configuration System through a telnet connection B Filters a The IP filtering functions for N R allows administrator added network security and management 252 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 3 Application of Router Module 5 3 1 Internet Access For SOHO Small Office Home Office environment the Router Module offers the NAT feature that allows multiple users on the LAN Local Area Network to access the Internet concurrently for the cost effective solution Auxiliary port can provide the Internet access with another PPP encapsulation link to the branch office or remote node by low speed modem such as analog modem or IDSL modem See Figure 5 1 Modem Modem Router Sync Async Sync Async a E Phone AUX I F p p Ethernet J RS 232 fay fn o a ET Ml Switching J T e es MER e al HUB Mercury 3600 l E1 T1 Router Multiplixer Fiber 2 A E p ol man Se Mercury 3600 f Mercury3600 Ethernet EN E Hoo o Ethernet Router iz iy Router ama i n Edge Router
308. t 5B of Mercury 3600 3630 if the user wants to make this router module perform in band management function by cross connecting the WAN port to other interface and establish WAN connection to the remote router When user wants to use the WAN port of the built in router module the user should enable the TDM bus sharing with port10B function first then the TDM bus of port10B 5B will be occupied by port11A 6A In this case port10B must be kept empty and cannot have any modules plugged into it Only E1 card can be plugged into slot10 to share the TDM bus DAC table with router module on port11A The time slots assignment for port11A router module must start from time slot O B Syntax o NET port SW sw COUNT count 129 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring e Enable port11A DAC sharing with port10B with 10 time slot B Param Ol o Port o SW o Sw O off default O o Count 0 31 B Example o net sw 1 count 10 bandwidth Oo net O Mercury gt help net Usage Syntax NET po Params SW COUNT sw count Notes 1 view Mercury stat 11a TYPE Rou 32c Cross Connect T TSOOO xxxxxxx TS008 xxxxxxx TS016 zzzzzzz TS024 zzzzzzz Configuration Link on DAC on 3 Mercury net rt Setup Network Device SW sw port port identifier DAC switch timeslot count 0 off 1 on timeslot 0 32 11A DAC switch and timeslot count if no parameter 2 11A DAC share with El only Mercury gt net sw 1 count 10
309. t help idsl Usage Setup IDSL Parameters Syntax IDSL port OP op RDL rdl Params port port identifier OP operation mode RDL remote digital loopback mode op O link 1 al 2 ssp 3 dt 4 dl 5 quiet rdl O normal 1 2B D 2 B1 3 B2 Notes RDL operation is valid when connected op 0 Mercury gt idsl la op 0 Mercury gt idsl 1b op 1 Mercury stat 1b TYPE 4IDSL CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration MODE al Figure 3 24 IDSL Command Screen 3 6 21 Link Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o Enable the local and remote loopback testing for most of the tributary cards By the way this LINK command can also enable disable the alarm or cross connect service DAC B Syntax o LINK port LL sw RL sw ACT act B Param o port Setup the indicated port o LL Enable the local loopback the outgoing signal is looped back through the internal digital time slot interchanged circuit All DSO time slots are looped back to the received path This will check the time slot cross connected table and the physical connection to the user equipment that provides the signal o RL Enable the remote loopback it returns the outside received signal back to the original user equipment This will check the data port including the interface physical cable and connectors which connects to the remote user equipment 119 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring O SW O disable 1 enable 2 enable
310. table clock source Informative message no action required Informative message no action required Corrective Actions Major Major Major Minor Minor Minor Minor Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 11 4P V24 Module Table 4 11 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4P V24 module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning LOS Loss of 1 Check cable Alarm Major Synchronous Local connections to the link lost of connector synchronization alarm on the 2 Check line and or specified link other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Error Seconds Informative alert x Major Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert x Major oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold P M M 15 UA Unavailable Informative alert M Major Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold M M 1H ES Error Seconds Informative alert P Major Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Error Informative alert P Major Seconds Counting 231 Chapter 4 Maintenance 1H UA 1D ES 1D SES 1D UA SLIP Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold
311. ted into global IP addresses on the Internet Router Module uses NAPT Network Address Port Translation device which maps ALL the local IP addresses into a SINGLE global IP address as assigned by an ISP The PAT will perform a mapping of global port numbers to the several hosts of local servers The advantage of this scheme in addition to those mentioned above is cost savings only one ISP account and IP address is required In addition the PAT scheme provides privacy since the internal LAN is unavailable to hosts on the Internet all they can see is the single IP address interface provided by the PAT device 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 1 LAN I F Private IP use in this LAN segment is 192 168 1 0 27 FTP Server 192 168 1 24 xDSL Modem pouer IDSL PPP Link ISP Router Web Server vago A XDSL Modem sue 192 168 1 25 V gt E 168 192 0 2 168 192 0 6 IP Pass Through match to Public IP pool assign by ISP is 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 30 NAT enable 168 192 0 0 29 Public IP 168 192 0 1 Routing Table in ISP Router NetMask 255 255 255 248 ip route 168 192 0 0 255 255 255 248 10 0 0 2 Figure 5 40 Example of NAT Application With Proxy Port List function you can view inside servers for different services they perform e g web or FTP visible to the outside users even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single entity to the outside world The port number and protocol identify
312. ter Access Mode Monitor Mode View Contents of a Profile Performance Monitor Setup ID amp P W entry ABOUT BOOT CLR CRAFT El HELP IDSL LOGB LOGI LOGL LOGR NET SECC SIGIDL About Mercury System Reboot Clear Port Status Setup Craft Speed Setup El Parameters Help Message Setup IDSL Parameters Start Logging Profile Select Profiles for Reboot List the Name of Profiles Run Specified Profiles Setup Setup Setup Network Device ID amp P W confirm Idle Signal NOTE View Port Status T1 Setup View User Status Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup ds 2 Setup T1 Parameters Setup Time Setup V 35 Parameters Setup Connection Port View Connection Table Setup ring protection PM Threshold TIME v35 x 50 MUX Parameters XC Connection Timeslot XV Add Drop Connection TS RP RS530 Parameters extend slot5 for Mercury 3600 only NMS amp SNMP link port for Mercury 3600 only HELP command for command table or syntax port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 4A 5A Figure 3 3 Mercury Help Screen Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Caution Once the Login ID and PW are changed please memorize it otherwise the Mercury must be sent back to TAINET for service while the ID or PW will be lost forever Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 The Basic Concept in Configuring Mercury After entering the Access mode user may follow the instruct
313. ter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury gt help v35 Usage Setup V 35 parameters Syntax V35 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act DEV dev INV inv SW decimal value Params port port identifier sts start time slot number ets end time slot number CTS V 35 CTS signal DSR V 35 DSR signal DCD V 35 DCD signal RI V 35 RI signal DEV the type of device connected to INV TXC and RXC polarity act signal inactive 1 signal active dev DTE without clock 1 DTE with clock DCE without clock 3 DTE with clock amp amp TC RC EXC DCE with clock amp amp TC RC EXC TXC normal amp RXC normal 1 TXC normal amp RXC inverted TXC inverted RXC normal 3 TXC inverted RXC inverted 1 valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 time slot 0 for 2V35 only 2 ets is optional if one time slot selected 3 DEV options are ONLY valid for 2V35 port 4 SW option is reserved for maintenance Mercury gt v35 la 1 10 dev 3 Mercury gt stat v35 lst parameter error Mercury stat la TYPE 1V35 CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration RL no Speed 640 Kbps RTS off DTR off CTS on DSR on DCD on RI off Time Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Connection active TXC normal RXC normal Figure 3 51 V 35 Command Screen 3 6 49 X50 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a Setup X 50 MUX parameters It supports 5 physical RS 232 interfaces to connect to the low speed 2400 4800 9600 1920
314. ter module CRAFT PPP User selectable port by pressing the front panel button PPP CRAFT to change between Craft port or Auxiliary PPP port functionality Relay contact to extend the major and minor alarm to the Table 2 2 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 800 60 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3600 3600 Front Panel Description The Mercury 3600 3600 enclosure has 5 slots 4 slots are assigned to the interface modules and the 5 slot is usually for management use Mercury 3600 supports up to 16 channels and each card can support 4 channels maximum And for Mercury 3600 supports up to 20 channels Figure 2 3 shows the status indicators on each interface module and the buttons Table 2 3 describes the function in detailed am ee S O 2 3 4 8 FASE AO o Q O O NOR MIN MAJ B O O O O O NR MN MAJ MERCURY 3600 cO O O O O NR MN MAJ C DO O O O O NOR MN MAJ Figure 2 4 Front Panel view of Mercury 3600 LED Indicator Description Buttons P Green Card is ready in the indicated slot IN alarm occurred in the indicated slot Card is unavailable Green Indicates this channel in normal condition Yellow Minor alarm occurred in this channel Red Major alarm occurred in this channel Blinking Indicates this channel is under testing mode Off Alarm and DAC function are disabled Green System is read
315. th parameter mode I DACs ch loss This symbol shows the indicated channel is occupied by another channel and always happens when enable the extension slot 5 for Mercury 3600 by executing the XSLT command refer to Section 3 7 43 XSLT Command combined channel This symbol shows the channel is combined with others for 4P V24 card while executing the V24 command with parameter CC refer to oection 3 7 39 V24 Command uni directional channel This symbols show that this connection to the additional ports is a simplex connection so that the additional ports can receive the data carried by the user selected time slots transmitted by the port designated as source but cannot transmit data to the source port the source port can only receive data from the port designed as its destination Refer to Section 3 7 48 XCS and 3 7 49 XTS Command 167 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 54 XCS Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose o The one way port assignment command to do the uni directional mapping from a specified port to another port B Syntax o XCS mode porta portb B Param Oo mode e There are 3 modes for selection e L low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e F frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integr
316. the specified port The 15minute PM and Daily PM reports are available through this command and are based on the data stored in Mercury Series Product memory Syntax 131 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o PM port VIEW view CLR clr BH Param o port The port identifier a VIEW Display the PM data of the indicated port for the current 15minute 1day period and the previous thirty two seven 15minute 1day period reports o view 0 15 min PM history 1 1 day PM history o CLR Clear the 15minute 1day PM report and for Access mode only o clr0 15 min PM history 1 1 day PM history 2 15 min amp 1 day PM history B Example O PM view 1 e View the 1day PM history for all ports PM 3a view 0 e View the 15minute PM history for port 3A PM clr 2 e Clear all 1 minute amp 1day PM history for all ports PM 4a clr 0 e Clear 1 minute PM history for port 4A Mercury gt help pm Usage Performance Monitor Syntax PM port VIEW view CLR clr Params port port identifier VIEW view 15min lday PM history CLR clear 15min lday PM history view 0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history clr 0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history 2 15min lday PM history VIEW or CLR all PM history if no port parameter Either of VIEW and CLR parameters must be required CLR for access mode only Mercury gt pm 3a view 0 15min PM history Period CH Unavailable Error Seconds Severely ES 1E1 75 00593 6 6E 01 00000 0 0E 00 00000
317. the front panel of the physical device Examples include Status Power and System LEDS LLC Multiplexing LLC encapsulation allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit By prefixing the PDU Payload Data Unit with an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header each protocol can be identified Loop reach Loop reach defines speed that can be attained at various distances This is very important for DSL technology as distance from the CO influences attainable speeds MAC On a local area network LAN or other network the Media Access Control MAC address is your computer s unique hardware number On an Ethernet LAN it is the mane as your Ethernet address The MAC layer frames data for transmitted as a stream of bits Modem Modulator demodulator A device that converts digital signal to analog and vice versa so that digital information can be transmitted over analog communication facilities such as voice grade telephone lines Name Resolution The allocation of an IP address to a host name See DNS NAT Network Address Translation is the translation of an Internet Protocol address used within one network to a different IP address known within another network NAPT extends the notion of translation one step further by also translating transport identifier e g TCP and UDP port numbers ICMP query identifiers This allows the transport identifiers of a number of priv
318. the indicated SDSL port to Frame mode or Unframed mode In Frame mode it starts from time slot O and must setup the ets to specify the data rate When in Unframe mode the data rate is 2 048 Mbps a fr O frame default 1 unframed o EOC Enable the EOC channel for remote control device o eoc O off 1 on o count timeslot count 1 31 B Example O sdsl 2a mod 2 fr 0 15 e Setup SDSL card located on port2A to LTU type Frame mode and speed is 1024 Kbps start from time slot 1 and the ets is 15 137 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring Mercury help sdsl Usage Setup SDSL Parameters Syntax SDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr ets Params port port identifier MOD setup LTU NTU To 1300 mode TEST test function FR frame mode mod 0 LTU 1 NTU 2 To 1300 test 0 normal 1 local loopback 2 remote loopback fr O frame 1 unframe ets end time slot 1 31 Mercury sdsl 2a mod 0 fr 0 15 Mercury gt stat 2a TYPE 1SDSL CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration MODE LTU LL no RL no SPECTRUM TEST no FRAME frame EOC on S N 38db RCV GAIN Odb TX POWER 7dbm REMOTE RCV GAIN Odb REMOTE TX POWER 8dbm Time slot 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 3 40 SDSL Command Screen 3 6 38 Secc Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E B Purpose a The SECC command is going to reconfirm the newer Login ID and PW after they are first entered in by SECE command BH Syntax o SECC N
319. the service e g web service is on port 80 TCP and TFTP is on port 69 UDP The protocols supported in this feature are TCP UDP and ICMP Static NAT function maintains a simple one to one mapping between a local and global IP address for each host on the LAN The main benefit of this is to avoid reconfiguration of local IP addresses on each host 292 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Figure 5 7 13 shows you how NAT work with the public and private IP Assume you have applied the network segment of public IP from your ISP say 168 192 0 0 29 the public IP for you to use is between 168 192 0 0 168 192 0 7 so you have only 5 public IP one for router another two for net ID and broadcast for your LAN But in reality you have a total of 30 computers in your LAN including workstations and a few servers NAT will help you resolve this situation the configuration of this example is as follows otep 1 Selected the public IP for PAT Choose one IP between 168 192 0 1 168 192 0 6 for PAT The Net Mask should match the network segment that ISP assigns to you Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 168 192 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 248 Figure 5 41 Choose the NAPT Note For some LAN to WAN a
320. tomatic assignment of IP address mask default gateway DNS server address and WINS server address to work stations RFC 2131 RFC 2132 IP Address Translation for N R only NAT NAPT Network Address and Network Address Port Translation RFC 3022 Provide enhanced security and flexibility by hiding all IP address on the LAN behind a single static IP on the Internet Sophisticated extension NAT that provides security of a NAT wall to hide LAN IP addresses while providing flexible use of all addresses offered by Internet Service Provider ISP Security for N R only otatic IP Filter Incoming and Outgoing 248 5 1 1 8 5 1 1 9 5 1 2 1 9 1 2 2 9 1 2 3 9 1 2 4 5 1 2 5 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Management E SNMPv1 RFC 1157 and MIB II REC 1213 m TELNET RFC 854 E ICMP Ping RFC 792 B local management through Console port Firmware Upgrade TFTP RFC 1350 Hardware LAN Interface Ethernet 10 Base T RJ 45 WAN Interface B Provides private interface connected to Main board DIN 3 16 B Through put 440 pps for Router Module 575 pps for Router C Module AUX Interface for N R only B Provides RS 232 DTE interface RJ 45 B Synchronous up to 128 Kbps and Asynchronous up to 115200 bps data format Processor B 32 768 MHz Motorola MC68EN360 QUICC B 1 MByte Flash memory and 4 Mbyte DRAM Operating Environment B Temperature 0 C to 50 C Chapter 5 Router Con
321. umption BH Maximum Power Consumption of Mercury Series Product B Mercury 800 36W m Mercury 3600 15W B Mercury 3600 40W B Mercury 3820 42W B Mercury 3630 3630E 27W Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 6 Electromagnetic Spec B FCC Part 15 Class A B EN50082 1 B EN50082 2 B IEC 950 52 Chapter 1 Overview 1 4 Module Information Mercury Series products are modular systems with various equipped I O modules They can be equipped with the specific I O modules in different physical slots Please refer to following Table 1 33 for the compatible combinations V Available X Non Available M3630 3630 M3600 M3820 Module E 3600 Compatibility M800 rtu ird Slot10 when Table q SlotS Slot1 5 Ka M In band INMS used E1 4CB U iv ports only E1 2CB U muaa a Y moe Y eas K o y yo wa v yey z awaa eo y amos e EPL LT pm FEE ECCE EC xomuXs p MP xoma pp somas y y Foes p A 7 Re p ERE E ER Few y e E Y sos pause Raters iM i we p py o y SS STSI STTK x SS hii lt S lt lt x IS AS ESTIS gt gt Chapter 1 Overview M3630 3630 M3600 M3820 Module E 3600 Compatibility M800 Slot10 when Slot Slot 1 3 Slot 4 5 Table lSlot5 Slot1 5 gt In band 1 4 6 8 9 10 A U Law slot x X 2 7 4 FXS 4FXS D Ko k k un A A aporsemm y k op py mers y ZM o MM y Table 1 33 The suitable I O module for Mercury Series Product
322. unting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Severely Error oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Severely Error oeconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour 217 Corrective Actions link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified X 50 module 3 Replace the X 50 module Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Alarm lt lt U AY U lt lt lt Major Major Major Major Major Major Chapter 4 Maintenance DO threshold 1H UA 1D ES 1D SES 1D UA TXS1 TXS2 Unavailable second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold severely Error seconds Counting severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Unavailable second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Frame Alignment synchronization Loss Detected FAS error occur over critical limited lt 8 bits sec Transmit Elastic Store Slip Detected Tx clock slip on port 1 Transmit Elastic
323. unting in a 19 rack B Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 is a 1U high platform with 5 generic slots and Built in channelized router module is supported with SNMP agent It can support higher capacity for voice data and video application It is especially suitable for use as an economic compact remote distribution node It comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack B Mercury 3820 Mercury 3820 is a 3U high platform with 10 slots Built in channelized router module is supported The high capacity platform will be the best application for edge office and POP site It shares the same modules and cards of Mercury 3600 It also comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack B Mercury 3630 Mercury 3630 is a 1U high platform with 5 generic slots and Built in channelized router module is supported Mercury 3630 is a versatile device with SDH STM 1 interface device depending on the plug in cards selected multi access platform for 64kbps base unit It supports one high speed optical link to multiplexer 21 E1 It comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack B Mercury 3630E Mercury 3630E is a 1U high platform with 5 generic slots and Built in channelized router module is supported Mercury 3630E is a versatile device with SDH STM 1 interface device also supports EOS with RJ 45 interface depending on the plug in cards selected multi access platform for 64kbps base unit It supports one high speed optical
324. urpose o Setup the E1 parameters Syntax o E1 port Fr fr CAS cas TCRC act RCRC act CV cv AIS act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig SA sa SAD val BAL bal HAUL haul Param o Port Setup the assigned port o FrConfigure the indicated E1 port to FAS Frame Alignment Signal or Unframed mode When in FAS mode it allows to select which of the available time slots can be used for data transmission When in Unframed mode E1 data uses the 2 048 Mbps bit rate E1 signal with no synchronization signal and needs to assign 32 time slots o fr O fas default 1 unframe 108 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring CAS Select CAS Channel Associated Signaling or CCS Common Channel Signaling under the FAS framing mode In both CAS and CCS mode time slot O is always indicated to a fixed synchronization pattern and frame alignment word But in CAS mode time slot 16 is usually indicated to channel signaling So in CAS mode time slot O and 16 are not used for data transmission totally 30 time slots In CCS mode only time slot O can not used totally 31 time slots cas O ccs default 1 cas TCRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Tx port RCRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Rx port act O disable 1 enable default CV Select CV Code Violation or BPV Bipolar Violation cvO cv default 1 bpv AIS A Alarm Indication Signal AIS If the signal is cut off between two terminals loss of port signal or there is a local loss
325. voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning MICO MICO Fail 2015 Replace the FXS Alarm Major FAIL chipset initial failed module given PCM to IOM 2 signal convert error PCM PCM Lost Detected 1 Check cable Alarm Major LOS PCM signal lost connections to the FXS connector 2 Check clock source on network facilities 3 Replace the data module 3265 3265 Chipset fail Re boot system Alarm Major FAIL Fail on reading amp writing with PEB Check any unsettled 3265 chipset over voltage on the phone two times during line re boot 3 Replace the FXS module 15 ES Error Seconds Informative alert P M Major Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Error Informative alert PM Major Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Informative alert P M Major Second Counting 224 1H ES 1H SES 1H UA 1D ES 1D SES 1D UA SPIKE Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 day threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds
326. xplains their meaning Loss of Link Local 1 Check cable Alarm Major lost of connections to the link synchronization connector alarm on the specified link 2 Check line and or other communication 219 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message 1D ES Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Error Seconds Counting Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Severely Error Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Error Seconds Counting Error oeconds over 1 day threshold equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert 220 lt lt U AY U lt lt lt lt lt Class Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Chapter 4 Maintenance 1D SES Severely Error Informative alert Seconds Counting Severely Error Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Informative alert Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold ALM OF Alarm Off Alarm In
327. y Off System is under self testing while initialing Red Major alarm occurred in the system Of No major alarm Yellow Minor alarm occurred in the system Off No minor alarm Green Power ON 61 Chapter 2 Installation LED Indicator Description Buttons P Off Power OFF Reset the hardware by pressing this button Key Pad Press Show alarm history on LCD panel Table 2 3 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3600 B ALARM o The ALARM relay contact is to extend the major and minor alarms of Mercury 3600 3600 to the office audible and visual alarm system Refer to Appendix A for its pin assignment B CRAFT a The Front panel CRAFT port serves as a normal supervise port and operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DCE mode in DB 9 type connector it can direct connect to PC COM port for operation 62 2 6 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3600 3600 Rear Panel Description There are 5 slots on the rear panel of Mercury 3600 3600 the first 4 slots can be plugged in with I O modules while the 5 slots is usually used for management with the Non Channelized or Channelized router module 3600 only Figure 2 5 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 3600 3600 with 5 slots power supply socket and ground screw Each slot is marked with a label that designates the slot type and definition Table 2 4 describes the function of each port Please refer to Section 1 5 about the compatible I O modules for Mercur
328. y 3600 Data port 1 to 5 are user Plug in cards Power supply socket for Mercury 3600 3600 Protective Ground screw for connecting to the earth ground Table 2 4 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3600 3600 63 Chapter 2 Installation 2 7 Mercury 3820 Front Panel Description Mercury 3820 is a 10 slots digital cross connect system with user selectable O modules The front panel of Mercury 3820 enclosure includes the status indicators on each interface module the buttons ALM relay PPP Craft port and LAN port as shows on Figure 2 6 Table 2 5 describes the function in detailed Ou DoD 20 Cua o uh dd de H o lA i ku teses TETEE te E a E ittre TF FEF ii El so oo Figure 2 6 Front panel view of Mercury 3820 LED Indicator 201 Description Buttons Red Major alarm occurred in this channel E e Red Major alarm occurred in the system Off No major alarm Yellow Minor alarm occurred in the system Off No minor alarm UL When data is being sent received PPP protocol is DOWN 64 Chapter 2 Installation LED Indicator Buttons Description LAN Green An Ethernet is connected Blinking When data is being sent received or JAn Ethernet is unconnected properly PWR1 2 Note Off Power OFF 48V Power 48V ON Note Power 48V OFF PPP CRAFT Press The front panel PPP Craft port change to Auxiliary PPP mode ACO Release The front panel PPP Craft
329. y Error Seconds over Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert Informative alert 222 u PM PM PM PM PM PM PM M Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Chapter 4 Maintenance LL i Unavailable Informative alert P M Major Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Handshake Checked the line or Alarm Minor handshake in remote IDSL equipment progress with didn t act as NT mode specify port Informative testing alert Alarm Minor diagnosis the line performance R amp D debug using only Send Single Pulses Informative testing alert Alarm Minor test mode To diagnosis the line performance R amp D debug using only SLIP Slip Detecting Problem at unstable Alarm Minor DO fonseca jaeimome O QUIET Quiet Analogy Informative alert State Minor output disable on the specify port ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm Informative message State Minor report has been no action required switch off at port LM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Informative message State Minor OFF Off Alarm report no action required and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 7 IDSL module alarm message 223 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 8 FXS Voice Module Table 4 8 lists the alarm messages generated by the FXS
330. yntax O RS530 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act Rl act INV inv B Param O port Port identifier for the indicated RS530 port sts ets The start time slot number The end time slot number CTS RS530 Clear to Sed signal default act 1 DSR RS530 Data Set Ready signal default act 1 135 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o DCD RS530 Data Carrier Detect signal default act 1 o RIRS530 Ring Indicator signal default act 0 o act O signal inactive 1 signal active o INV TxC and RxC clock polarity o Inv B Example O TxC normal amp RxC normal default 1 TxC normal amp RxC inverted 2 TxC inverted amp RxC normal 3 TxC inverted amp RxC inverted o RS530 2a 1 6 dsr 0 e Set up the speed for RS530 card on port 2A to 384 Kbps start from time slot 1 and end with time slot 6 Deactivate the DSR signal Mercury gt help rs530 Usage Setup RS530 parameters Syntax RS530 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act Params port sts ets CTS DSR DCD RI INV act inv NOTE 1 2 INV inv port identifier start time slot number end time slot number RS530 CTS signal RS530 DSR signal RS530 DCD signal RS530 RI signal TXC and RXC polarity O signal inactive 1 signal active 0 TXC normal amp RXC normal 1 TXC normal amp RXC inverted 2 TXC inverted amp RXC normal 3 TXC inverted amp RXC inverted valid time slot number is between 1 and 31
331. yntax o TIME hh mm ss B Param Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring o None Display the current time for Mercury o hh Hour 00 23 o mm Minute 00 59 o ssSecond 00 59 B Example o TIME e Display the current time in Mercury o TIME 12 10 30 o Setup the time to 12 10 30 Mercury time 2002 03 08 12 06 44 Mercury gt time 12 10 30 Figure 3 48 TIME Command Screen 3 6 46 User Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose o List all the user ID and Password and display their status oyntax USER Example o USER List all users ID PW and their status for reference Mercury gt help user Usage View User Status Syntax USER Mercury gt user Password User Mode Active Supervisor Normal Figure 3 49 USER Command Screen 149 Chapter 3 Configuration and Monitoring 3 6 47 V24 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 3630 3630E Purpose o Setup 4P V24 card parameters lt supports 4 physical RS 232 interface in DCE mode to connect to the low speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 data terminal Each of the channels can be software selectable to occupy 1 time slot 64 Kbps individually or can be combined with a few of the channels into 1 time slot to save bandwidth It supports Sync mode in Internal clock so that the outside equipment should follow Mercury s clock For Async mode it supports 7 or 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control data format

Mercury Series

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents